« eee 


i 


1 - sa 
ee Poe 


(n 


Library of the Museum 


OF 


COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY, 


AT HARVARD COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE, MASS. 


C/ re - 
CAL ¢ oe Oe Sore by of 
The giftof) =» | oe 
Souths JTUS Moalvos 


No. 7256. | 
GF 957 Dice ube 
J pb MES — fore 4), IEBY | 


Dae 
© ae 
ra ert si 


TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS 


AND 


Reb ePe@ KR ef 


OF THE 


ROYAL SOCIETY of SOUTH AUSTRALIA. 


a 


at ie OD Lied I Ss pes 
(FOR 1882-83.) 


PFESUED DECEMBER, 1882. 
Ye 


Adelaide : 


G. ROBERTSON, ie KING WILLIAM STREET. 
1883. 


Parcels for transmission to the Royal Society of South Aus- 

tralia, from Europe and America, should be addressed ‘‘ per 

W. C. Rigby: care Messrs. Thos. Meadows & Co., 35, Milk 
Street, ci ar London.”’ 


Aopal Society of South Australia. 


Patron: 
HER MAJESTY THE QUEEN. 


Gite-Patrow: 
HIS EXCELLENCY SIR WILLIAM ROBINSON, K.C.M.G., C.B., &c. 


O FE We Ta. S. 


[ELECTED OCTOBER 2, 1883.1] 


aresivent : 
H. T. WHITTELL, ESQ., M.D. 


Gice-Dresidvents: 
PROF. H. LAMB, M.A. | E. C. STIRLING, ESQ., M.D., F.B.C.S. 


How. Secretary: Hon. CGreaswrer, 
W. L. CLELAND, ESQ., M.B. THOS. D. SMEATON, ESQ. 


Other Members of Council: 


D. B. ADAMSON, ESQ. PROF. TATE, F.G.S., F.L.S., &e. 
WALTER RUTT, ESQ. (National Science Director) 
Cc. TODD, C.M.G., F.R.A.8. (Re- 
presentative Governor) 


Assistant Secretary: 
MR. A. MOLINEUX. 


CON TEN ES. 


SES KRe 


Dr. J. Davies Thomas: Hydatid Disease in Australia .. = ae 


D. B. Adamson: Improvements in the construction of Curre’s Di- 
electric Machine .. ee a oe Se as de Se 


F. W. Andrews: Notes on the Night-Parrot (Geopsittacus occidentalis) 


Baron Sir F. von Mueller: Diagnoses of a new genus and two species of 


Composite from South Australia a a ae ne ef 
Baron Sir F. von Mueller: tea of a New Genus of Verbenacex 
from Arnheim Land ae AF ee > as Sts 
James Stirling: The Proteacex of the Victorian Alps .. ie 
Dr. H. T. Whittell: Notes of the Dissection of a Pee eas Ascidian 
found in St. Vincent Gulf (plate i.) .. . ae oe 
Professor R. Tate: Descriptions of some of New Species of Squilla 
from South Australia (plate ii.).. ae =e He ar ee 
John Haslam: House Sanitation .. ae s a 4 =~ 


J.G. O. Tepper: Botanical Notes relating to South Australia .. oe 
YW. Andrews: Notes on some Rare Birds inhabiting South Australia 
T. C. Cloud: A Catalogue of South Australian Minerals .. ue a 


Professor R. Tate: List of Plants unrecorded for Southern ee Penin- 
sula . ae ae ae Hic oe a i “ =. 


Professor R. Tate: A list of unrecorded Plants and of New Localities 
for Rare Plants in the South-East zn as ms fe a 


Professor R. Tate: List of some Plants Baers: the North-Eastern 
part of the Lake Torrens Basin ae oe Le ae 
Baron Mueller and Professor Tate: Diagnoses of some New Piants from 
South Australia .. ats oa ~: us ae 


Professor R. Tate: Additions to the Flora of South Australia .. ee 


Professor R. Tate: The Botany of Kangaroo Island, with Historical 
Sketch of its eee and Settlement, and Notes on its Geology 
(plate iii.) aH : Ae - ac =< 


116 


lv. 
Miscellaneous Contributions to the Natural History of South Australia— 


ZooLoey. 
Note on the Occurrence of Psalidura in South Australia oa eee 


Notes on three South Australian Coleopters destructive to 
Vegetation ae : a. = “e by ‘ia es 


List of Marine Mollusea, Rottnest, Freemantle.. iz oankae 


Botany. 
Bibliographical Notes refuting the alleged alien nature of 
Orebanche australiana and Verbena officinalis .. pee 
Notes on Microstemma tuberosum .. ae 50 oe ie a 


Note onthe presence of Tannin in Muehlenbeckia Cunninghamii 175 


HYDATID DISEASE IN AUSTRALIA. 


By J. Davies THomas, M.D., London. 
(Read October 3, and November 7, 1882.] 


[ ABRIDGED. | 


The Royal Society has on several occasions shown an interest 
in questions respecting the common weal and health, and has, 
I feel sure, contributed to no small degree in educating the 
public on some matters closely connected with general hygiene. 
I therefore venture to think that any communication which has 
for its object the prevention of disease, pain, and death will 
meet with lenient criticism and friendly reception from the 
members of this Society. 

Apart from the importance of the hydatid as a cause of 
disease in man and stock, its study is of great interest from a 
purely scientific point of view ; so that any hesitancy | may 
feel is not because the subject is bald of interest, but rather 
lest the writer may prove unequal to his theme. 

In dealing with hydatids, there are two points of view from 
which the subject may be regarded. Thus we may consider it 
merely from a biological standpoint, and study the parasite 
itself, its mode of origin, growth, and death, in the various 
phases of its hfe-history; or we may consider it from a medical 
aspect, as causing a disease often great in its painfulness and 
terrible in its danger to man and beast. 

In connection with this latter view we might further discuss 
(1) the mode of its prevention, and (2) the best mode of treat- 
ment when it is present. The subject will, however, be pre- 
sented to your notice only asa brief summary of what I have 
been able to learn about the prevalence of hydatid disease in 
man, and chiefly as concerns the Southern Hemisphere; and I 
shall also endeavour to point out how the risk of infection may 
be .reduced to more moderate limits. On our way we shall 
see that there are many points upon which more information is 
needed, and in the investigation of which some members of 
this Society may do good service to science and to public 
health. 

Dr. Thomas then gave an exhaustive account of the natural 
history of Echinococcus, as far as present knowledge of the 


2 


subject permits, and briefly summarised the matter as fol- 
lows:— 

What is known as the hydatid cyst is really the cystie or 
bladder-worm phase of development of a minute tapeworm 
which inhahits the upper part of the small intestine of the dog. 
Three varieties of the hydatid have been described, viz., the 
Acephalocystic form, where no scolices or daughter-cysts are 
found; the variety called Echinococcus Scolicipariens, where 
brood-capsules and scolices are present; and finally, Echino- 
coccus Altricipariens, where daughter-cysts are developed. 
There are good reasons, however, for the opinion that these 
forms do not mark distinct species, but merely variations of one 
species. I may remind you also of the remarkable transmuta- 
tions and transmigrations undergone during the complete life- 
cycle of this parasite; how the adult tapeworm inhabits in great 
numbers the small intestine of the dog, but in which animal the 
hydatid cyst has never been found; that the last joint filled 
with ripe ova passes from the intestine of the dog into the 
outer world, and that the eggs are conveyed by the various ex- 
ternal forces of nature into drinking water, and that they are 
scattered on grass and herbage; that the egg becomes swal- 
lowed by some herbivorous animal or by man, and that then 
the egg-shell becomes digested in the stomach, thus releasing 
the six-hooked boring embryo formerly enclosed within it. 
That the embryo begins at once to bore its way into the coats of 
the stomach until it reaches the inside of a small blood vessel, 
where it is caught in the current of blood, and conveyed to the 
capillaries of the portal system within the liver; here the 
majority rest and develope into hydatids. Some of them, how- 
ever, pass through the capillaries of the liver and enter the 
general and pulmonary circulation. In this way it follows that 
any organ of the body may become the resting place of an embryo, 
which proceeds to continue its development into a hydatid. 
We shall find from the statistics of the disease that the 
lungs, heart, brain, spleen, kidney, muscles, and bones are all 
liable to be attacked, although by no means in a like propor- 
tion. The six-hooked embryo then proceeds to change into a 
hydatid cyst. This in turn produces by a process of “budding 
the Echinococci. The Echinococci when transplanted into the 
small intestine of the dog develope into the Scolices. These now 
form joints, two or three in number, and the last one of these 
contains the ripe eggs. To such curious series of .changes 
Steenstrup gave the name of the ‘alternation of generations.” 
in sheep and oxen the cystic form of the parasite exists in 
the liver, lung, and other organs; but they never have the 
little tapeworm in the bowel. The hydatid lives, not on 
chyme, as the tapeworm does in the intestine of the dog, 


3 


but on fluids secreted by itself from the blood of its host. 
It is extremely important to remember that sheep and oxen 
get the hydatid, and the dog the tapeworm. No one has ever 
seen this rule reversed in the case of Echinococcus. Man, in 
his relation to Echinococcus, resembles the sheep and ox, and 
not the dog, for he gets the hydatid cyst, but not the little 
tapeworm. The great practical fact is this:—That if there 
were no dogs we should not get hydatid disease. Eating 
underdone mutton or beef can never give us hydatids, though 
it might give us certain kinds of tapeworms. The dog, how- 
ever, would not get Tenia Echinococcus if it did not swallow 
living scolices from hydatid cysts. Now, if all this be correct, 
we can see that the existence of a great many dogs, sheep, 
oxen, pigs, &c., in a country produce favourable conditions 
for the propagation of hydatid disease in man, for the 
ereater the number of dogs the greater the number of 
hosts for the tapeworm form, and in like manner the greater 
the number of sheep, &c., the greater the number of hosts for 
the cystic form. There are four chief factors which determine 
the spread of hydatid disease in any country :—1l. The number 
of dogs inthe country. 2. The opportunities that exist for 
enabling the eggs, bred in the dog, to be swallowed by the 
sheep. 3. The number of sheep, oxen, pigs, &c. 4. The fre- 
quency with which dogs eat the organs of infected sheep con- 
taining living hydatids. Take a country with many sheep, the 
organs of which are often eaten raw by dogs, let the water 
supply be scanty and procured from bogs, swamps, waterholes, 
and dams, on the banks of which dogs may deposit the eggs, 
to be blown in by the winds, and washed in by the rain ; let 
there be dogs in abundance, and we then have all the condi- 
tions necessary to the spread of the disease. 


Tue GrocrapuicaLt Distrreurion or Hyparip DisEasz. 


This disease is known to occur with greater or less frequency 
in all countries inhabited by Europeans or their immediate 
descendants. From Great Britain to America, from Denmark 
to Bengal, from Iceland in the north to New Zealand in the 
south, may this ubiquitous parasite be found. It would be safe, 
I think, to assert that wherever man and his faithful com- 
panion and servant, the dog, are found together, there will be 
found, with greater or less frequency, hydatid disease in the 
former. But the frequency of the disease varies greatly in 
different countries, and I shall give you as briefly as I can, the 
facts bearing upon this point, at least as far as I have been 
able to ascertain them. More particularly, I shall bring 
before your notice, figures illustrating the frequency of the 


4, 


disease in Australia. As British subjects, we naturally ask, 
in the first place, how often this disease occurs in our ancestral 
home. 


Hypatrp DisrasE In Great Brirarn.—When I entered 
upon the investigation of this question it seemed to me that 
there were two sources from which some reliable information 
might be gleaned, viz.:—l1st, the Annual Mortality Returns 
of the Registrar-General of Births, Deaths, and Marriages ; 
and 2nd, the annual records of the various hospitals. From 
the former source we might expect to learn how many persons 
die every year in Great Britain from hydatid disease, and from 
the latter how many patients come under treatment from this 
cause in the various hospitals. I regret to state that the 
amount of information from either source that I have as yet 
succeeded in acquiring is by no means so extensive as I could 
wish, for I have had at my disposal a few only of the Annual 
Reports of the Registrar-General of Births, Deaths, and Mar- 
riages for England and Wales, and I have been unable to learn 
anything about Scotland and Ireland. 


Through the kindness of Mr. Cleland, the obliging Registrar- 
General for South Australia, I have been able to examine the 
annual reports of the Registrar-General for England and 
Wales for the decade 1871 to 1881. During these ten years 
there died in England and Wales—Males, 2,679,416 ; females, 
2,498,895 ; total, 5,178,311. Of these 436 persons were re- 
ported to have died of hydatid disease, being at the rate of one 
out of every 11,876 deaths. Now, I think with Dr. Cobbold, 
that this return is very far below the true one, for many cases 
of hydatid disease, fatal and otherwise, are no doubt not re- 
cognised as such. However, we must for the present accept 
the figures as they stand. In round numbers, then, we must 
assume that about one death out of every 12,000 in England 
and Wales for the decade 1871 to 1881 was due to hydatid 
disease. 


And now what do the hospital records teach us? About 
three years ago I forwarded to the authorities of a large 
number of London and provincial hospitals printed forms 
seeking mformation upon this point. Out of several dozens of 
such appeals, only two received any attention, for replies 
reached me only from the London Hospital and the Bristol 
Royal Infirmary. However, I have attained access in another 
way to the statistics of St. Bartholomew’s Hospital for the 
decade 1869 to 1879, and to those of St. Thomas’ Hospital for 
the four years 1876 to 1880. The return of the London Hos- 
pital extends over the five years, 1876 to 1881; that for the 
Bristol Royal Infirmary includes only the year 1880. However, 


5 


by throwing together the returns of those four hospitals we 
get an idea of twenty years of hospital work in Great Britain, 
and they show that in all 110 cases of hydatids were under 
treatment. During the same period there were about 99,000 
in-patients, medical and surgical, treated, so that about one case 
out of every 900 treated in these institutions during the periods 
in question was one of hydatids. As far, then, as the data at 
our disposal extend, we may conclude that about one death out 
of every 12,000 in England and Wales during the decade 1871- 
81 was due to hydatids, and that about one out of every 900 in- 
patients of the four hospitals mentioned was a case of 


hydatids. 


GERMANY, France, Iraty, Austria, AND Russra.—As far as 
I have been able to ascertain no data exist to show the 
prevalence of hydatids in these countries. However, the 
occurrence of the parasite in France, Germany, and Italy is 
certain. 


Hypatip Disease In Iceranp.—This country holds the 
unenviable position of being the one most highly infested 
with Echinococcus disease, and it may be instructive to 
devote some attention to the matter. It appears certain that 
hydatid disease has been just as prevalent in Iceland for cen- 
turies past as it is at the present time, for the earliest medical 
records of the country contain references to the prevalence of 
an affection of the liver, which could have been nothing 
other than this parasitic disease. Up to the present time 
an exact estimate of the frequency of the disease cannot 
be given, for the medical men resident in the country 
do not agree as to the proportion of the population at- 
tacked. Then, a great many persons have hydatids, and 
yet die of some other complaint; moreover, post-mortem ex- 
aminations are made comparatively rarely ; and, lastly, many 
of the victims of the disease recover by the efforts of unaided 
nature. However, many good authorities believe that from 
one-fifth to one-seventh of the entire population of Iceland 
suffers from hydatid disease. Other medical observers regard 
this estimate as too high, and consider that from one-fiftieth to 
one-sixtieth would be a more correct calculation. On the 
whole it seems to me that the balance of evidence points in the 
direction of the higher rather than of the lower figures. The 
Danish Government was so impressed with the gravity and 
extent of the evil that in 1863 it deputed a distinguished hel- 
minthologist, M. Krabbe, to investigate and report upon this 
question, and the result of his inquiries appeared in a treatise 
published in 1866, written, fortunately for us, in French, and 
not in Danish. He points out that the prevalence of hydatids 


6 


in man is in correlation to the frequency with which sheep and 
oxen suffer from the same disease, and, above all, in correspon- 
dence with the very common presence of the adult tapeworm 
in the dogs of Iceland. In Iceland, at the time of Krabbe’s 
report, there were for every 100 inhabitants 488 sheep and 36 
horned cattle ; pigs, however, were scarce. Now, the propor- 
tion of sheep and cattle per 100 inhabitants in Great Britain, 
according to Mulhall’s balance-sheet of the world, 1870 to 1880, 
is—sheep 93, cows 29. So that if we include under the com- 
mon title of ‘domestic herbivora” sheep and horned cattle, we 
shall see that in Great Britain, per 100 persons, there were of 
domestic herbivora 122; in Iceland, 524. Tersely, then, in 
Iceland there are per head of human population more than 
four times as many possible hosts for hydatids as there are in 
Great Britain. Now, as regards the possible hosts of the 
tapeworm, 7e., the dogs. According to Krabbe there was in 
Great Britain in 1855 about one dog to every 50 inhabitants. 
In Iceland, at the time of his investigation, about one dog to 
every three to five inhabitants, z.e., there were, at his lowest 
computation, ten times as many dogs per head of population 
in Iceland as in Great Britain. From this it follows, other 
things being equal, that an Icelander was threatened with 
hydatid infection from the dogs ten times more than an Eng- 
lishman, and, besides that, every Icelandic dog had four times 
as many chances of eating the host of an hydatid as an English 
dog. But there are two other very important points to con- 
sider, viz., the opportunities that the dogs have of eating 
hydatids, and the chances of a man swallowing the eggs of the 
tapeworm. Of course the number of domestic herbivora and 
of dogs form only two elements in the chain of causation of 
hydatid disease. The most important elements by far are the 
numbers of these animals infested with the parasite, and the 
chances of mutual infection of the dogs and domestic herbivora. 
And, first, how many sheep, for example, are there affected 
with hydatids in the two countries? As regards Great Britain 
I have no data, but as concerns Iceland we have some facts, 
and in this connection I cannot do better than quote the fol- 
lowing statement by Dr. J. Wjaltelin, who for many 
years was the chief medical officer for Iceland. He writes :— 
“J have for many years been investigating how frequent 
this disease is in the Icelandic sheep, and I have come 
to the conclusion that traces of it are found in more than 
every fifth sheep ; nearly all the peasants have ascertained that 
this parasite may be found in every third sheep that is more 
than three years old. In a district called Skaptar-Syssel, with 
about 3,000 inhabitants and 22,000 sheep, the Echinococci are 
said to be found in every adult sheep, and it is worth attention 


7 


that just in this district every third adult person is said to 
have hydatids. Whether this is exact or not i cannot tell, but 
thus it was stated to me by a physician who has been serving 
there for more than thirty years.” So much for the preva- 
lence of hydatids in the chief domestic herbivora of that 
country; and now let us turn our attention to the dogs of Ice- 
land. Krabbe examined 100 Icelandic dogs, and found that in 
28 of these Tenia Echinococcus was present, often in vast 
numbers. In Copenhagen he examined 500 dogs, but found 
this worm present in only two instances. Thus Tenia Echino- 
coccus is seventy times as common in Icelandic dogs as in those 
of Copenhagen. According to Cobbold, who is the first 
authority on helminthology in Great Britain, Tenia Echino- 
coccus has never been found present in any English dogs which 
had not previously been fed experimentally upon hydatids. 
This quite corresponds with the comparatively rare occurrence 
of hydatid disease in England. Then it must be remembered 
that in a country where sheep are so numerous, the dogs enjoy 
innumerable opportunities of eating the livers and lungs of 
sheep affected with Echinococcus, and thus they come to harbour 
vast numbers of the little tapeworms. And now as regards 
the last link in the chain of causation of hydatids, viz., the 
swallowing by man of the eggs of the tapeworms. All travellers 
whose works on Iceland I have read draw special and fre- 
quent attention to the gross uncleanliness of the people. 
Sheep, cows, and dogs live under the same roof as the family 
during the long weary months of Iceland’s bitter winter. The 
houses are devoid of ventilation, and almost entirely of light. 
The configuration of the country is such that extensive bogs 
and swamps alternate with lofty mountains, large rivers, and 
numerous lakes of all dimensions. The bogs and swamps are 
just the most suitable receptacles for the eggs of the tapeworm, 
deposited in myriads on the long matted grass, or more solid 
hummocks that often stud the area of the swamps. Then, 
owing to the diet of the people being largely composed of 
stock-fish, scurvy is common, and raw vegetables are a delicacy 
and greedily consumed, thus giving another agent for the con- 
veyance of the ova into the body. No doubt the three chief 
media are the bog and swamp-water used for drinking pur- 
poses; the consumption of raw vegetables, upon which the 
eggs have been deposited; and the habit of allowing dogs 
to cleanse the plates by hcking them. Even the stock-fish that 
constitutes the staple article of diet is heedlessly piled on 
the filthy floor of the dwelling-house, ready to become befouled 
by the dogs. The prevalence of the disease among the sheep is 
explicable in like manner by the swamp-water drunk, and the 
grass eaten by them. ‘The only land cultivated in Iceland is 


8 


the tun, which is a meadow surrounding the house, varying in 
extent according to the number of cows kept on the farm. 
This field is dressed with their dung, and produces the hay 
which constitutes the food of the cattle during the winter” 
(Baring Gould, p. 45). It is evident how easily the grass and 
hay of this small meadow may become infested with the minute 
ova of the innumerable Tenia harboured by the numerous 
dogs of an Icelandic homestead. 


Hypatip DISEASE IN THE AUSTRALASIAN COLONIES. 


I think that most of the intelligent public of Australia have 
known or heard that hydatid disease is a common one in this 
Southern Britain, but hitherto no extensive investigation into 
the prevalence and causes of this disease has been undertaken 
in Australia. Now, as this malady is, theoretically at least, 
pertectly preventible, and as moreover it may, I believe, be 
practically reduced in extent, I think that the entire subject is 
worthy of careful study and close investigation. Of course the 
first step in any such inquiry is to ascertain as far as possible 
the extent and local distribution of the disease; and in the 
case of Australia, as in that of Great Britain, we may hope to 
get reliable data from—Ist. The mortality returns of the 
various colonies; and, 2nd. The records of the hospital in each 
province. I mentioned my desire to the Hon. W. Morgan, 
who was Chief Secretary of South Australia at the time I com- 
menced this work, and he most kindly offered to use his influ- 
ence with the Governments of the other colonies to further my 
inquiry. I beg to offer my most cordial thanks, not only to 
Mr. Morgan, but also to the Hon. J. C. Bray, who has also 
greatly aided me. Through the kind influence of our two Chief 
Secretaries, I have also received the greatest assistance from 
Mr. Graham Berry and Sir Bryan O’Loughlen in Victoria, and 
from Sir Henry Parkes in New South Wales. Equally ready 
and courteous help has been given by the Governments of 
Queensland, New Zealand, and Tasmania. Not only have the 
Governments of all the colonies given their powerful and in- 
deed indispensable aid, but the hospital officials and public 
registrars have ungrudgingly and carefully taken infinite 
pains to supply the facts required. I cannot too gratefully 
acknowledge my obligations to my fellow-workers in this 
cause, and can only earnestly hope that great public good will 
result from the publication of the facts supplied by them. I 
shall first draw your attention to the hydatid statistics of the 
various colonies, and then I shall endeavour to point out the 
causes of the striking prevalence of the disease in some of 
them. From all the colonies of Australasia replies to my 
questions have been received, but as might have been expected, 


9 


the amount of information obtained is not equal in all cases. 
Thus I may dismiss Western Australia very briefly. In March, 
1878, the Colonial Secretary wrote that he regretted his in- 
ability to supply information as to deaths from hydatid 
disease, because “under the Registration Act of this colony, it 
is not compulsory on individuals registering deaths to produce 
the certificate of a professional man; consequently, causes of 
death in most instances are recorded in general terms, and it 
would be impossible to render any return of the kind required, 
there being no reliable data at command.” As regards Vic- 
toria, New South Wales, Queensland, South Australia, New 
Zealand, and Tasmania the case is different. 

Vicroria.— Before giving you the statistics of the province, 
J cannot refrain from expressing my admiration of the exhaus- 
tive character of the returns, and of the promptitude with 
which they were supphed. The details of official records in Vie- 
toria must be as near perfection as possible. In the first place, 
let me remind you that by the census taken in 1881 the popu- 
lation of Victoria amounted in round numbers to 862,000 souls, 
of whom rather more than one half were males. The mean 
annual mortality of the colony has lately been 13°5 per 1,000 
inhabitants. And now as regards the number of deaths attri- 
buted to hydatid disease. From the Registrar-General’s 
returns, it appears that during the twenty years, from the 
commencement of 1862 to the close of 1881, 584 persons died 
from hydatids. Of these there were of males, 388 ; of females, 
246; total, 584; and during the fourteen years, 1868 to 1881, 
it appears that 2°98 per thousand of all the deaths in the 
province were caused by hydatids. I will not inflict upon you 
the details of the annual figures, but I wish to mention that 
upon the whole there has been during these twenty years a 
constant but somewhat irregular increase in the mortality from 
hydatids with advancing time. This is particularly conspicuous 
when we compare the four quinquennial periods embraced 
within the twenty years. Thus :—First quinquennium, 1862 to 
1867, 59 cases ; second do., 1867 to 1872, 112 cases; third do., 
1872 to 1877, 182 cases; fourth do., 1877 to 1882, 281 cases ; 
total, 584 cases. This steady and gradual increase is evidently 
due to one or both of two causes, viz., either hydatid disease is 
becoming more prevalent in Victoria, or the Registrar-General 
is being more accurately informed as to the true causes of 
death. But of course it must be borne in mind that the popu- 
lation of Victoria has increased greatly during these twenty 
years. Thus :—Population of Victoria, 1862, 554,358 souls; do., 
1882, 862,346 souls. But then, in the last quinquennium 
there were nearly four times as many deaths from hydatids 
as in the first quinquennium, whilst the population was 


7 


10 


not nearly twice as great—probably only about half as 
much again. As regards the ages of the victims, no age 
was exempt—the child, the adult, the old, all succumbed 
to this parasite. Thus:—Under 10 years of age there were 
36 deaths; from 10 to 20, 57 do.; from 20 to 30, 89 do.; 
from 30 to 40, 100 do.; from 40 to 50, 109 do.; from 50 to 60, 
73 do.; over 60 years of age, 32 do.; ages not stated, 4 do.; 
total, 500 deaths. These numbers include the deaths in the 
fourteen years, 1868 to 1882. I have not the data as regards 
age prior to 1868. From these figures it will be seen that the 
number of deaths increases steadily with advancing age up to 
50. Afterwards the numbers diminish. This is not because 
people are less liable to hydatids after fifty, but because the 
greater proportion of people die before reaching that age. 
Now as regards the data supplied by the hospital records of 
Victoria, I have received returns from the following hospitals:— 
Alexandra, Alfred, Ballarat, Beechworth, Belfast, Castlemaine, 
Clunes, Creswick, Daylesford, Dunolly, Geelong, Heathcote, 
Horsham, Inglewood, Kilmore, Kyneton, Maldon, Mansfield, 
Maryborough, Melbourne, Pleasant Creek, Portland, St. Arnaud, 
Sale, Sandhurst, Swan Hill, Wangaratta, Warrnambool, Woods 
Point. I need not trouble you with the details of these returns, 
but I shall pick out those facts only which are of general 
interest. In some of these institutions no cases of this disease 
were recorded in the books. This was the case at the Belfast, 
Maldon, Mansfield, Swan Hill, and Warrnambool Hospitals. 
In the remaining hospitals, however, no fewer than 1,001 
cases had been treated. Of these, the result was unknown in 
373. In 206 instances death was known to have resulted, so 
that we can reckon the mortality of hydatid disease even under 
the best available treatment as at least 20 per cent., and per- 
sonally I am convinced that this is much below the real figure, 
for many cases are discharged from hospitals, and leave the 
care of their medical advisers, which are apparently cured, and 
yet come back in a few months or years worse than ever. Now 
taking the lowest estimate—7.e.,20 per cent.—as fatal, and 
remembering that the Registrar-General’s report for 20 years 
gave 584 deaths from this disease, it follows that in Victoria 
there were about 3,000 cases of hydatids during the 20 years 
1861 to 1882. I think that this estimate of preventible 
disease is sufficiently startling, and not only justifies, but 
urgently invites, inquiry. And yet one case of smallpox 
would receive more attention than these 3,000 sufferers have 
done—at any rate, at the hands of the official guardians of the 
public health. As regards the proportion in which the two 
sexes were attacked, some information may be given :—Sex 
not stated, 171 cases; males, 493; females, 337; total, 1,001. 


11 


There was thus a preponderance of cases in males, but as there 
has been a considerably larger number of males than females 
in Victoria until quite lately, there cannot be much import- 
ance attached to the disparity of sexes attacked by hydatids. 
The proportion in which the different organs of the body were 
attacked was very interesting, but as I shall consider this point 
in connection with the total number of cases occurring in all. 
the colonies, I need not discuss it here. It is important to no- 
tice that if we take the hospitals of Victoria as a whole, there 
was about one case out of every 175 of the total indoor patients 
treated suffering from hydatid disease. I may remind you that 
in the four English hospitals the proportion was one hydatid 
out of about every 900 patients, so that it appears that hydatid 
disease is more than five times as common in Victorian as in 
the four English hospitals. But the different hospitals of 
Victoria itself did not show a like proportion of cases. Thus 
no cases at all, as I have already stated, were recorded in the 
Belfast, Maldon, Mansfield, Portland, Swan Hill, and Warr- 
nambool Hospitals, and yet between them they had 5,639 in- 
patients during the periods over which their returns extended. 


Sourn AvusTRALia.—According to the census taken in April, 
1881, the total population amounted to 279,865 — males, 
149,530; females, 130,335. The death-rate in 1881 was 13°90 
per 1,000. The Registrar-General’s returns of hydatid deaths, 
for which I am indebted to the kindness of J. F. Cleland, Esq., 
extend over the 16 years from 1866 to 1881. In six of these 
years, viz., 1866-70 and 72, no deaths were returned as due 
to hydatids. In 1871 there was returned 1 death; in 1873 
there were 3 deaths; 1874, 1; 1875, 2; 1876 and 1877, to- 
gether, 11; 1878-79, 3; 1880-81, 13; total, 34. So that for 
all the 16 years in question there were only 34 deaths attri- 
buted to this parasite. Now, if we take the last ten years, z.e., 
from 1872 to 1881 inclusive, we find that there were 33 deaths 
from hydatids out of a total of 34,431 deaths (Statistical 
Register for 1881, page 25) occuring during the same period ; 
so that hydatid disease is credited with having caused about 
one death out of every 1,043 during the last ten years. I am 
inclined to think that this is considerably below the number of 
deaths that actually occurred from this parasite. And now as 
regards the data supplied by the records of the various 
hospitals in the province. Of such institutions there are nine, 
viz., the Adelaide, Mount Gambier, Port Adelaide, Port Augusta, 
Port Lincoln, Wallaroo, Kapunda, Blinman, and Burra 
Hospitals. Of these the only ones which are large enough to 
supply any information on this subject are the two first named. 
I am indebted to Mr. E. H. Hallack for the very exhaustive 
returns of the Adelaide Hospital, which extend over a period 


12 


of 30 years, viz., 1852 to 1882. During this time 158 cases of 
hydatids were recognised and treated. There were in all under 
treatment as in-patients 36,556 persons, so that about. one case 
of every 245—exactly 24468— in-patients was hydatids. As 
regards the results of the treatment, we find that in 18 cases 
the results were not given; of the remaining 145, 20 died 
whilst in hospital, being at the rate of 12°66 per cent. 

The Mount Gambier Hospital.—t have to thank Dr. Jackson, 
lately Assistant Colonial Surgeon, for the statistics of this 
hospital during the seven years 1873 to 1880, and they are very 
significant. During these seven years 36 cases of hydatid 
disease were under treatment. During the same period there 
were of in-patients 1,905. So that no less than one case out of 
every 52°9 was hydatid disease. I am convinced that out of 
Iceland no place in the known world is so badly infested with 
this parasite as the South-Eastern district of this colony, which 
supplies the majority of the inmates of the Mount Gambier 
hospital. As I shall revert to this point afterwards, I need 
not discuss it here. In order to strike an average for the 
hospitals of South Australia we must add together the results 
of the Adelaide and Mount Gambier Hospitals. This will 
show us that about one case out of 198 in-patients suffered 
from hydatids. 


QUEENSLAND.— According to Hayter, the populatian of 
Queensland on December 31st, 1880, was 226,077 persons. 
The average death-rate for the decade 1869-79 was 17°27 per 
1,000. It appears that the published statistics of this colony 
did not contain any particulars respecting deaths from hydatid 
disease prior to the year 1878, so that the only data at my 
disposal have extended over the four years 1878 to 1882, and 
during this time only five deaths from this cause were 
registered; so that only about one death out of 6,000 arose 
from hydatid disease in Queensland. 


The Hospital Statistics of Queensland.—Returns were sent 
from the hospitals at Bowen, Ipswich, Springsure, Stanthorpe, 
Charters Towers, Towoomba, George Town, and Maryborough. 
In five of these no cases of hydatids had been met with, viz., 
Bowen, Charters Towers, George Town, Maryborough, and 
Springsure. As regards the Ipswich Hospital, the return com- 
prises the 20 years 1860 to 1880. During this long period only 
two cases of hydatid disease were treated. The average number 
of in-patients is stated to be 300 per annum. The Stanthorpe 
Hospital’s record extends over the five years 1875 to 1880. 
Four cases only were observed, and one of these was not a 
hospital case. In the Toowoomba Hospital books only one 
case of hydatids appears. Thus it will be seen that the data 


13 


supplied from Queensland are too scanty to permit any 
numerical estimate to be made, but they show conclusively that 
the disease is comparatively rare in that colony. 


Tasmanta.—The population on December 31st, 1880, was 
114,762. The mean death-rate for the decade 1869-79 was 
15°59 per 1,000. First, as regards the deaths registered as 
due to hydatid disease :—In March, 1878, the Colonial Secretary 
wrote that during the ten years immediately antecedent to 1878 
“no deaths from this disease were registered.” However, in 
1878 there were two deaths, in 1879 two deaths, in 1880 one 
death, in 1881 one death; total, six deaths. So that in the last 
four years there have been six deaths from that cause. This 
was at the rate of ‘871 per 1,000 deaths. 


Hospitals of Tasmania——Returns were received from the 
Hobart, Launceston, and Campbelltown Hospitals. There was 
no record of any case of this disease in either the Launceston 
or the Campbelltown Hospital. The returns of the Hobart 
Hospitai comprise the four years 1878 to 1881 inclusive. There 
were thirteen cases treated suffering from hydatids. During 
the same period there were 4,223 in-patients, so that in the 
four years under our notice about one case out of 528 total in- 
patients was hydatid. As by some misunderstanding J have 
not been able to learn the total number of in- patients treated 
at the Campbelltown Hospital, I am unable to give the general 
hospital hydatid-rate for the colony, but I have reason to 
believe that not more than one out of every thousand cases 
treated is of this nature. 


New Zwaranp.—Population on December 31st, 1880, 484,864 
souls. Mean death-rate from 1869 to 1879, 12°17 per 1,000. 
The Acting Colonial Secretary, in a letter dated March 7th, 
1878, states that the causes of death were not compiled by the 
Registrar- General’s department prior to the year 1873. A 
statistical return that should have accompanied this letter has 
not reached my hands, so that the only returns in my posses- 
sion are those for the four years 1878, 1879, 1880, and 1881, 
and they show that in the year 1878 the deaths from hydatids 
were six, equal to 1°29 per 1,000; in 1879, seven, equal to 1°25 
per 1,000; in 1880, nine, equal to 1°65 per 1,000; in 1881, 
three, equal to 0°55 per 1,000; total, 25. So that 1185 per 
1,000 of the deaths that took place i in these four years resulted 
from hydatid disease. In hospital returns for New Zealand 
reples were received from Auckland, Charlestown, Christchurch, 
Dunedin, Gisborne, Hokitika, Lawrence, Napier, Naseby, 
Nelson, New Plymouth, Oamar u, Picton, Reefton, Southland, 
Thames, Timaru, Wakatipa, Wellington, and Westport. In 
eleven of these no hydatids had been treated, viz., Charlestown, 


14 


Gisborne, Lawrence, Napier, Naseby, Oamaru, Picton, Reefton, 
Southland, Thames, and Timaru. In the nine remaining hos- 
pitals there had been in all 57 cases of hydatids under treat- 
ment, and the proportion of cases of this disease to the total 
in-patients, as far as I could ascertain, was one out of every 
745°7. I think that this estimate is rather too high, but it is 
based upon the statistics at my disposal. From both the 
Registrar-General’s and the hospital returns it will be seen 
that hydatid disease is not very prevalent in New Zealand. 


New Sourn Wates.—According to Hayter’s Year Book, the 
population of this province on December 31st, 1880, was 
739,385 persons. No separate classification of hydatid disease 
was made by the Registrar-General’s department prior to the 
year 1875. Since that date, however, I have, through the 
favour of the Government, been supplied with the annual 
returns of deaths due to this cause. I need not now enter into 
details, but merely give you the gross result for the seven years, 
1875 to 1882. During this period 56 persons died from 
hydatids, viz., 29 males and 27 females. During the same 
period 75,563 persons died in this province, so that one death 
out of every 1,349°3 was caused by hydatid disease, being at 
the rate of ‘741 per 1,000. From the hospital returns there 
appear to have been 103 cases of hydatids in all. From these 
we have to omit nine cases, as there are no corresponding 
returns of in-door patients. This will leave 94 cases out of a 
total of 35,760 in-door patients, being at the rate of one out of 
every 380 cases. 


SUMMARY. 


From the returns of the departments of the various Registrars- 
General, we find that there died of hydatid disease :— 


Period over . 
i : Rate of Mortality due to 

Name of Country. sap on Hydatid Disease. 
England and Wales..; 1871 to 1881 1 out of about 12,000 
Tasmania .. --| 1878 to 1882 ‘871 per 1,000 
New Zealand... .-| 1878 to 1882 1:185 per 1,000 
Queensland .. al 

| New South Wales ..| 1875 to 1882 ‘741 per 1,000 
South Australia ..; 1866 to 1881 *94 (nearly) per 1,000 
Victoria + --| 1868 to 1882 2°98 per 1,000 


15 


The following shows the proportion of the hospital in- 
patients suffering from hydatids:—Four English hospitals, 
about one out of 900; Victorian do., about one out of 175; 
New South Wales do., about one out of 380; South Australia, 
do., about one out of 245; Queensland do., returns inadequate ; 
New Zealand do., about one out of 746; Tasmanian do., about 
one out of 325. 


TaBLE showing the number of domestic herbivora (including 
-sheep and horned cattle) per 100 inhabitants in the fol- 
lowing countries :— 


Domestic 
Country. Sheep. Horned Cattle. radon: 
Great Britain 2% 93 | 29 122 
France .. = 64 30 94 
Germany .. “A 55 35 90 
Iceland .. ye 488 36 524 
Europe... en vi ee | 30 96 
Victoria .. ey 1,204 | 149 1,353 
New South Wales.. 4,381 | 348 4,729 
Queensland a 3,067 1,398 4,465 
South Australia .. 2,415 114 2,029 
New Zealand am 2,695 119 2,814 
Tasmania .. st 1,554 | 110 1,664 


The numbers for Great Britain, France, Germany, and 
Europe as a whole are from “ The Balance-sheet of the World, 
1870-80,” by Michael G. Mulhall, F.S.S.; London, Edward 
Stanford, 1881 (table 27, page 40). Those for Iceland are 
from Krabbe, “ Recherches Helminthologiques en Danemark et 
en Islande,” page 59. Those for the colonies of Australia are 
from Hayter’s “ Victorian Year-Book, 1880-81” (folding-sheet 
No. 3). When we come to consider the number of domestic 
herbivora in each colony, we find that in Victoria, where, 
according to our statistics, hydatid disease in man is most pre- 
valent, the number of domestic herbivora per 100 inhabitants 
is the iowest. So that it is quite plain that other important 
elements must co-operate to cause hydatids in man; and this 
bears out my assertion that domestic herbivora do not directly 
infest man with Echinococcus disease, but merely suffer in com- 
mon with him. 


16 


TaBLE showing proportion of registered dogs in Victoria to 


population :— 

Veh Population, ac- Number of Proportion of Dogs to 

1 cording to Hayter. Dogs. Population. 
1872 32,504 
1873 772,039 33,284 | 1 to every 23 
1874 783,274 34,191 it oc oe 
1875 791,399 36,917 1 oe: Sara 
1876 801,717 36,532 el an 
1877 815,494 37,097 1 ah 
1878 827,439 37,251 | 1 #- Be 
1879 840,620 37,248 1 «224 
1880 860,067 37,495 1 6 ae 

Discusston. 


Professor Tare said there was something incompatible in 
the existence of the disease in the South-East, with the 
large quantities of water there, and he would rather have 
expected that 1t would be found most frequently in the North, 
where the people for the most part got their water from dams, 
and towards the Wimmera District. He was also disposed to 
doubt the localization of the disease by the statistics which 
had been given, and was rather disposed to think that the 
reputation of Dr. Jackson, formerly of Mount Gambier Hos- 
pital, had something to do with the disproportionate number of 
cases that had been attributed to the South-East. In fact, he 
thought the Mount Gambier Hospital had drained large dis- 
tricts of Victoria of hydatid cases. Those acquainted with 
Mount Gambier knew that the water was always running under- 
ground and near the surface, so that it could not be permanently 
contaminated by dogs, and the water used for domestic purposes 
was for the most part obtained from wells, the swamp water 
being rarely used. Then the statistics showed that women and 
children died from this disease in about the same proportion as 
the men, who might be supposed 10 run greater danger on 
account of their vocations, clearly indicating that the disease 
was generated near the homes. For his own part he was dis- 
posed to think that the disease was largely communicated by 
means of the uncooked vegetables so generally used in salads. 
More evidence should be obtained on the point whether water 
was the chief means of conveying the Tenia Echinococcus into 


17 


the intestines of the human subject, as the statistics available 
had so far failed to prove it. We wanted to know how the 
disease was contracted, and under what circumstances; how 
long the eggs would endure submergence in water, and whether 
they would float or sink ; and what temperatures they would 
stand without losing their vitality? It was also desirable 
to ascertain if eggs deposited in a swamp, and subsequently 
blown about with the dust, when the swamp had dried up, 
would retain their vitality. These important inquiries 
into the secondary causes of hydatids could not be carried 
out effectually by private persons. It was a work that 
should be undertaken by Government, and it would not be out 
of place for the Society to suggest to the Government the 
advisableness of having such investigations undertaken, as 
these statistics showed that the disease was a growing one. 
Another question was— Could we deal with this difficulty 
from the dog point of view? Could we cure the dogs? If 
not, then all the dogs should be killed and cremated. The 
disease should be stamped out at all events, for it in a measure 
involved the life of the nation. Under these circumstances the 
Government would fail in their duty if they did not do some- 
thing to deal effectively with this disease in its infancy. 

Dr. Pret Nessirr thought there was no doubt that the ova 
were ingested with uncooked vegetables, and this was probably 
the reason why the disease was so common in the neighbour- 
hood of Mount Gambier, because it did not exist in the North, 
where the people drank water obtained from dams, and did not 
often get fresh vegetables to eat. He did not believe, however, 
that many patients suffermg from hydatids came to Mount 
Gambier Hospital from Victoria, for although Dr. Jackson had 
a high reputation every effort was made to exclude Victorian 
patients He agreed that something should be done with the 
dogs if the disease was to be stamped out. 

Mr. Smeaton suggested that it might be well to go further 
back—to the sheeps’ livers with which the dogs were fed. 

Mr. Smyru was of opinion that some comparison should be 
instituted between the livers of the sheep in Adelaide and 
those of the sheep in the South-East, with the view of ascer- 
taining why the latter contained more hydatids than the 
former. If the disease was communicated by means of un- 
cooked vegetables it should be very prevalent in and around 
Adelaide. 

Professor Tarr asked Dr. Thomas if the water of the South- 
East had been examined, with a view of detecting any eges of 
the Tenia, as this was one link in the chain of research which 
should be carried out. 

Dr. Tuomas was of opinion that this had not been done. 

B 


18 


Dr. Wuirrett said there could be no doubt that this was a 
subject which was of the greatest importance to this colony, 
because if Dr. Thomas’s papers proved anything they proved that 
hydatids were largely on the increase ; that they were spreading 
from place to place, and that year by year a larger number of 
people died from them. After complimenting Dr. Thomas on 
his research, he expressed the opinion that the papers would 
do a great deal of good in dissipating some of the ignorance 
that existed amongst the people with respect to the causes and 
development of this disease. He had felt for some time that, 
although scientific men had done a great deal in investigating 
this subject, they had not quite succeeded in clearing up all 
the difficult poits connected with hydatid disease as it 
affected man. Tenia Echinococcus, like all tapeworms, had to 
pass through two stages—first, as larva in the cysts, and then 
in a developed state after it had obtained entrance into the 
human subject. There was no doubt that there was a direct 
connection between the cyst in one animal and the tapeworm 
in another; and it was also certain that there were different 
kinds of tapeworms and different kinds of cysts which affected 
or preferred particular animals. In fact, it was possible 
from an examination of the cysts to predict the kind of 
tapeworm that would be produced, and to fix upon the kind 
of animal that bred it. They found, moreover, that there were 
certain larve in the cow, in the pig, in the sheep, in dogs, and 
in man which were called hydatids, and so far as they had been 
able to tell there was a great resemblance between the hydatids 
of the sheep andof man. Up to recent times these had distinct 
names, but closer observation had led scientific men to the 
opinion that the hydatids of the sheep and of man were identical 
—that they were both derived from Tenia Echinococcus. 
Personally he was satisfied of this identity, but it was only an 
assumption which might at some future time be overturned. 
He was strongly of opinion that this question should receive 
more attention than it had, and this was apparent when they 
remembered the evidence upon which scientific men had based 
their conclusion that hydatids came from the Tenia in the dog. 
Experiments in dogs had been generally successful in countries 
where Tenia were rare; but in this colony, where they were 
common, such experiments would not be so satisfactory. So 
far, however, failure had attended all experiments to convey 
hydatids taken from the human subject to dogs, and this was 
the weak link in the chain. It had not been demonstrated 
absolutely and positively that the Tenia was the cause of 
hydatids. He would suggest to Dr. Thomas the advisableness 
ot experimenting in this direction, in order to get a satisfactory 
solution of the problem, and he believed that this end could be 


19 


attained by an expenditure of time, money, patience, and some 
little personal risk. And this would be a great gain, because 
it was the question of questions in regard to the settlement of 
the origin of hydatid disease. He also thought that a large 
number of ova obtained from the Tenia in this colony should 
be sent to England for experiment in the same direction. He 
was afraid that he had made a mistake in saying “to England,” 
because if a scientific man caused the same amount of pain to 
animals, with a view ot discovering something that would tend 
to the saving of human life, as resulted from many so-called 
sports, he would stand a good chance of seeing the inside of 
one of Her Majesty’s prisons. These ova should be sent to 
some place where the physiologist and biologist were not 
watched by the policeman while they were making their experi- 
ments. Physiology was not exactly dead in England, but it 
was seriously hindered in its investigations by the senti- 
mentality of old women of both sexes. While he could 
bear testimony to the industry that had characterized Dr. 
Thomas in the collection of his statistics, he could not agree 
with some of the conclusions that he had drawn. A leading 
proposition. in the paper was that there are four factors 
which regulated the spread of hydatid disease in any country— 
(1) the number of dogs in proportion to the population 
of the country; (2) the number of sheep and oxen in the 
country; (8) the opportunities that existed for the dogs to 
swallow the eggs bred in the sheep; (4) the frequency with 
which the dog devoured the organs of infected sheep containing 
hydatids. As far as Australia was concerned the two last 
factors would be equal in all the colonies, and the sheep in one 
colony would be just as liable to get the disease as any other, 
so that they were reduced to the other two factors. Although 
there was only one series of figures the conclusions suggested 
were different from those drawn by Dr. Thomas. In Victoria, 
the number of dogs during the seven years dealt with remained 
about stationary, viz., one dog to every twenty of the inhabi- 
tants, but the deaths from hydatids had enormously increased. 
From 1872 to 1877 the number of deaths was 960, but in the 
next five years they had increased to 1,150. Of course there 
had been some slight increase in the population, which should 
be taken into consideration; but that should not add more than 
three or four deaths to the number, but instead of that they 
had an annual average death-rate of 231 against 182. Then, 
as to the other factor, the statistics seemed to prove that the 
greater the number of sheep and oxen the less hydatids. New 
South Wales had the most stock, but was only fifth on the list 
of mortality from hydatid disease; while Victoria, with the 
least stock, had in proportion to her population the highest 


20 


death-rate from hydatids. Queensland in stock came close be- 
hind New South Wales, and there hydatids were practically 
unknown, as only six cases of death from that cause had been 
reported. From these facts he was disposed to think that there 
was something wrong about Dr. Thomas’s figures—there seemed 
to be a hidden factor somewhere, which had not yet been dis- 
covered, but he hoped that Dr. Thomas, during his forthcoming 
visit to the South-East, would be able to ascertain what it was. 
With regard to the number of cases of hydatids at Mount 
Gambier, he was inclined to think that the comparison had not 
been drawn correctly—that Dr. Thomas had overlooked one 
fact which vitiated a great part of the conclusion he had come 
to, that the South-East was, next to Iceland, the country most 
affected by hydatids. He had taken the experience of the 
Adelaide Hospital during the past thirty years, and the experi- 
ence of the Mount Gambier Hospital for seven years, and this 
was hardly fair. The first death from hydatids in the Adelaide 
Hospital was reported in 1876, and it was only right to assume 
that the disease had not been known or made its appearance in 
Australia much before that time. A more equitable comparison 
would have been to take the results of seven years’ experience 
at both hospitals, and if this were done he did not think that 
there would be so great a difference in the proportion of per- 
sons suffering from hydatid disease as Dr. Thomas’s figures 
indicated. The practical question we had to deal with was how 
to arrest the ravages of this enemy, which was rapidly extend- 
ing in all directions, and although it might be necessary to call 
on the Government to assist in the making the prolonged in- 
quiries that were necessary, a great deal might be done by the 
agencies already available. Professar Tate had asked a ques- 
tion with regard to the vitality of the Tenia. He did not 
know that any evidence existed with regard to that, but 
Davaine had demonstrated the extreme vitality of the pig tape- 
worm. After the ova had been kept in water for over twelve 
months, they were found to be living and able to create disease 
in animals to whom it was administered. Other observers had 
ascertained that even after the worms had become rotten and 
mildewed, the eggs, when taken away and administered to 
animals, produced cystic disease. There was one satisfactory 
fact about the matter, however, and it was this—that all ob- 
servers were agreed that after the eggs became dry they lost 
their vitality ; and bearing this in mind it was easy to realise 
the vast amount of good done by our hot weather and winds. 
If there were the requisite determination, he was convinced 
that the disease could be stamped out in three or four months, 
because Tenia were not very long-lived parasites, and came to 
maturity and fulfilled ali their functions in ten or thirteen 


21 


weeks. If all those interested in the slaughter of sheep, oxen, 
pigs, and other animals, whenever they saw any indication of 
hydatids in their internal organs, cut out the affected parts and 
burned them the disease would be stamped out within four 
months. Of course there would be still those animals affected 
with the diseases ; but as far as human beings were concerned, 
the doctors would cure some, the hydatids would kill some, and 
others again would outlive the hydatids. There was a want of | 
knowledge how to deal with this matter all over the colony; 
the people were looking everywhere for means to escape from 
or cope with this disease, but they nad looked in the wrong 
directions. 

Dr. THomas, inreply to the criticisms and observations made 
on his papers, referred briefly to the various points involved in 
the discussion of such a subject, and expressed the opinion 
that Professor Tate had pointed out the direction in which 
inquiries should be made. While his statistics were not so 
complete as was desirable, he believed they were as complete 
as could be obtained in the colonies. He believed that the 
tapeworm and Tenia were conveyed into the dog by means 
of herbivorous animals, and that at least 40 per cent. of 
the stray dogs of the city were affected with this pest. In 
fact, the specimens of the Tenia which had been shown 
under the microscope had been taken from various dogs of 
that description. He suggested that pigs or other suitable 
animals should be obtained and inoculated, and kept for say 
twelve months, as by this means all the stages of the parasite 
from the larve to the secondary cysts might be ascertained. 
Even if his comparison had been restricted to a seven years’ 
experience of the Adelaide and Mount Gambier Hospitals, 
he did not think that it would alter the fact that the South- 
East was the worst place after Iceland for hydatids. In 
referring to the four factors which, in his opinion, regulated 
the spread of hydatids, he never meant to say that the number 
of herbivorous animals or dogs decided this question, but that 
these factors must all work together in a co-ordinate strain. 
With regard to water being the main medium for the propaga- 
tion of the disease, Dr. Jackson was distinctly of opinion, 
before the people of the South-East awoke to the fact, that 
their water was their poison, that they were very careless in 
their use of it. He intended to have the water of the district 
tested, not only shortly, but also later on in the season. He 
also intended, if possible, to ascertain what proportion of the 
sheep and cattle had the hydatid disease. Mr. Chalwin, the 
veterinary surgeon, had made the statement on good author ity 
that every beast was affected, and as he thought the kangaroos 
also were very much affected with hydatids of the liver, of 


22 


course, when the dogs killed them they too contracted the 
disease. With regard to the dogs, he was convinced that if 
he could not find 40 per cent. unaffected in Adelaide, the 
percentage diseased would be 60 or even more in the South- 
East. 


SUPPLEMENT. 
[Read March 6, 1883.] 


[Dr. Tuomas, at a subsequent date, after a personal inspec- 
tion of the South-Eastern portion of South Australia, the 
western district of Victoria, and the City of Melbourne, made 
the following additional remarks as the result of his observa- 
tions :— | 

As regards our colony, my investigations were principally 
made in two directions :—First, as to the alleged prevalence of 
hydatid disease in man and the lower animals in the South- 
East; and, secondly, as regards the occurrence of the adult 
tapeworm in the dogs there. Upon the first of these points the 
records of the Mount Gambier Hospital and the experience of 
the medical men practising in the various towns supplied me © 
with valuable information, and I shall in the first place com- 
municate that to you. From questions put to medical men 
practising at Kingston, Millicent, and Mount Gambier, I was 
informed that hydatids were extremely common in their several 
practices, and it appeared that the part of the country most 
liable to this disease was, roughly speaking, a triangular dis- 
trict, which was bounded on the north by the line of railway 
from Kingston to Narracoorte; on the east by a line drawn 
from Narracoorte to MacDonnell Bay; and on the west by the 
coast line. Of course it is not meant that this is the only 
infected part, but merely that in a rough-and-ready way this 
marks the worst part of the country. And it appears, too, that 
kangaroo and domestic animals suffer more from hydatids here 
than elsewhere. Of course during a brief sojourn in these parts 
it was impossible for me to authenticate these statements for 
myself, but I am quite willing to believe them. I must say, how- 
ever, that at Benara Station, near Mount Gambier, where alone 
I had the opportunity of examining about half a dozen brush- 
kangaroos, I failed to find in any single instance any hydatids, 
either in the lungs or other viscera of the animals; and the 
same remark applies to eight brush-kangaroos examined on the 
opposite side of the Victorian frontier at the Punt. This, 
however, proves but little, for at the Punt there is an abundant 
supply of drinking water in the beautiful Glenelg River, and 


23 


of course so large a water supply could never suiier serious 
contamination. I do not know whence the game on Benara 
obtain their drinking water. In order to arrive at any trust- 
worthy data of this kind the water supply most accessible to 
the kangaroo should be noticed, and as this is being done in 
some parts of the South-East, I have no doubt that ere long we 
shall have some interesting facts to record. Dr. Jackson, whose 
opinions upon this subject must command the greatest respect, 
was of opinion that “ the unusual prevalence of hydatid disease 
in the South-Eastern District may be fairly attributed to the 
large number of marsupials and (to a lesser extent) of native 
dogs or dingos which abound, and to the peculiar disposition of 
the water supply, most of which exists as surface-water or 
swamps.” Dr. Jackson attributes the chief réle to the mar- 
supials, inasmuch as the dingo is rapidly becoming extinct. It 
is highly probable that kangaroos are much infested with 
hydatids in this district as a whole, so that I attach no import- 
ance to my inability to find cysts in the few specimens examined 
by me. It would be very interesting to receive information 
upon this point from sportsmen of a scientific turn of mind. 
As regards the sheep, there is no doubt that hydatid infection 
is very common in them, and that the parasite often co-exists 
with, and is often mistaken for, fluke. This is not surprising, 
when we learn that the water supply is the medium of infection 
in each case. And now as regards the records of the Mount 
Gambier Hospital. I may remind you that in my statistical 
paper I gave you, upon the authority of Dr. Jackson, the 
returns of this hospital for the seven years 1873-1880. They 
showed that during that period one out of every 53 in-patients 
treated was a case of hydatids. Of course this represents a 
very alarming prevalence of the disease; but it was doubted 
by Professor Tate whether the localization of the disease in 
the South-East was proven by the cases treated in the Mount 
Gambier Hospital. Professor Tate was inclined to think that 
the high reputation of Dr. Jackson—then in charge of the 
Mount Gambier Hospital—had something to do with the large 
number of cases of hydatids treated in that institution. This 
was, of course, a very cogent objection, and during my recent 
visit to Mount Gambier I brought this question before the 
notice of Mr. A. K. Varley, the very obliging Secretary of the 
hospital. This gentleman, who has taken a warm and intelli- 
gent interest in this subject, has been kind enough to collect 
and tabulate for me all the cases of hydatids admitted into the 
hospital from January, 1869, to December, 1882, 7.e., for 14 
years. They amount in all to 54 cases, and during the same 
period there were 3,365 admissions of in-patients duly recorded. 
So that in round numbers about one out of every 62 cases 


24, 


admitted during these 14 years was hydatid. This is a rather 
lower proportion than that of Dr. Jackson’s seven years, but 
still the difference is not very great. Now, Mr. Varley has 
recorded the places of residence of these hydatid cases, and 
this is very important. He states that “all the cases except 
one are from the South-East, and nearly all from swampy 
country.” This is more than a complete answer to Professor 
Tate’s objection, for Dr. Jackson had a very high reputation 
as an oculist, and cases of eye diseases came far and wide to 
reap the fruits of his skill. So that if we eliminated cases of 
eye diseases that did not come from the South-East, the pro- 
portion of hydatids would rise even higher than the figures 
quoted. Dr. Whittell objected that I had omitted to take 
corresponding years into account when contrasting the propor- 
tional numbers of cases of that disease treated at the Adelaide 
and Mount Gambier Hospitals. I have now done so, and the 
results are as follows for the years 1873 to 1880:—Mount 
Gambier Hospital, one hydatid out of 53 in-patients ; Adelaide 
Hospital, one hydatid out of 144°6 in-patients. So that hydatids 
were in proportion three times (nearly) as numerous in the 
Mount Gambier as in the Adelaide Hospital during the seven 
years in point. 

Ten dogs were examined at different places, viz., Millicent, 
Mount Gambier, and Penola. In each place the parasite was 
found. In all, four dogs were actually found to be infested, 
and a larger proportion may have been so. As regards both 
Adelaide and the South-East, 40 per cent. of the stray dogs 
have Tenia Echinococcus. Of course this is a very serious 
matter, and it quite explains the frequency of hydatids in man 
and animals in this country. Even in Iceland Krabbe found 
only 28 per cent. of the dogs thus dangerous to man and beast. 
Of ten dogs examined in Melbourne, five contained Toenta 
Echinococcus, viz., No. 2 contained hundreds, No. 3 thousands, 
No. 4 only a few, Nos. 9 and 10 a very few; but.in all cases of 
doubt the specimens were identified by microscopic examina- 
tion. So that Melbourne dogs appear to be quite as dangerous 
in this respect as those of Adelaide. The Dog Act is virtually 
in many parts at least of Victoria a dead letter, for during my 
recent visit to Melbourne I had the curiosity on two or three 
oceasions to count the dogs provided with, and also those not 
possessed of, collars. The figures were—Without collars, 59 
dogs; with collars, 4 dogs. The dogs counted were wandering 
about the streets of Melbourne and Richmond. It was much 
the same at Casterton, Hamilton, and Ballarat. In many of 
the country towns of Victoria the source of infection of the 
dogs is evidently the same as in South Australia—ze., the 
easy access of stray dogs into slaughterhouses and butchers’ 


25 


premises, and the careless habit of throwing offal infected by 
cysts aside, so that dogs might eat it. In consequence of these 
observations I am convinced that the elaborate returns so 
courteously supplied to me by the Victorian Government as to 
the dogs registered in the various cities, towns, boroughs, and 
by the ‘Shire Councils do not represent by a vast number the 
real number of dogs in the province. 

As regards the media of conv eyance of the tapeworm 
egos into the body, there can be no doubt that the water 
supply is the chief one. ‘There is really every factor at 
work in the South-East to spread the disease—a large 
number of sheep, marsupials, &¢., to act as “hosts’’ for 
the cystic germ; a great many useless dogs which, through 
want of know ledge ‘of their owners , are allowed to eat the 
offal of sheep and the viscera of kangaroo caught in the 
chase; a reat area of land, swampy in the w inter, and in 
places pe erennially so, but at other spots becoming dry or sandy 
in the summer. Finally, many people are not acquainted with, 
or too indifferent to, the danger of drinking from water-holes or 
smail swamps; and in excuse it must be remembered that the 
dangerous draught may be cool, clean-looking, and inviting. 
Hence we cannot wonder that hydatids are common in man. The 
perversity of ignorance is often astounding. An influential 
sheep-farmer in “the South-East assured me recently that he had 
found it almost impossible to prevent station hands in his em- 
ployment from drinking surface-water, although he had 
thoughtfully provided an . auple supply of ‘wholesome and safe 
drink for their use. 


DiIscussIon. 


Mr. Grunpy drew Dr. Thomas’s attention to the nature of 
the water supply on the Benara Station. It consisted of two 
well-watered permanent creeks, and the water collected in 
underground caves. There was always an abundant supply. 

Mr. “Topp, C.M.G., remarked that in the country townships 
the people mainly got their water supply from tanks and wells. 
He thought that the swamps in the South-East were far too 
extensive to be capable of becoming infected to any appreci- 
able extent with the ova from the tapeworm of the dog. 

Prof. Tare asked Dr. Thomas if he thought the parasite to 
be endemie. 

Dr. Tuomas, in replying, made a few remarks respecting 
prophylactic measures. He thought that the chief of these 
would be to increase the dog-tax, see that it was rigidly carried 
out, and take steps to destroy all unregistered dogs. A pure 


26 


water supply was also very important. He thought that Mr. 
Grundy’s statement respecting the abundant water-supply of 
the Benara Station exceedingly confirmatory of his views 
respecting one of the chief sources of hydatid infection, viz., a 
scanty surface supply of water, to which dogs could have 
access; and that it fully explained why that part of the 
country should have such a happy exemption from the parasite. 
With respect to Mr. Todd’s objection that the swamps would 
be too extensive to be capable of being contaminated by 
dogs, he would say that he had not meant that the whole of the 
larger swamps had been thus infected, but merely small 
portions near dwellings and presenting such conditions as he 
had mentioned, favourable for the reception and retention of 
the ova, and to which man and the lower animals had easy 
access. In reply to Prof. Tate’s question as to whether he 
thought the parasite to be endemic in the colony, he said that 
he thought not, as there was no tradition of the natives having 
suffered from hydatid disease prior to the coming of the white 
man. Neither did he think that the dog had brought it here, 
for as a rule the Tenia Echinococcus did not live for more 
than twelve weeks in the intestine of the dog, and in the early 
days of the colony voyages from Europe took a much longer 
time. In sheep and oxen the hydatid may, on the other hand, 
remain for years embedded in the tissues; and these were 
most probably the source of the infection. There appeared to 
be no increase in the recorded cases of the disease in man at 
the Adelaide and Mount Gambier Hospitals during the past 
five years as compared with the previous five. 


27 


ON SOME IMPROVEMENTS IN THE CONSTRUCTION 
OF CURRE’S DI-ELECTRIC MACHINE. 


By D. B. Apamson. 
(Read February 6, 1883.} 


My object in coming before the Society on this occasion is 
principally to detail a few experiments made by me in con- 
structing the machine now before you. Being desirous of 
rendering it as effective as possible, I took some trouble in 
experimenting in various ways for that purpose. 

The machine is known by the name of “ Curre’s Di-electric 
Induction Machine.” It consists of two parts, one resembling 
the common frictional-plate machine with its rubbers and 
collecting comb; the other of a larger dise overlapping the 
former, and running as close to it as may be, without touching. 

The large dise acts the part of a di-electric between the 
smaller one and the points of a comb which carries off the 
electricity toward the prime conductor. The smaller disc, as it 
passes between the rubbers, becomes charged with positive 
electricity, and therefore, by induction, attracts negative 
electricity from the points of the comb, which is deposited on 
the large disc, and leaves the lower comb and its conductor 
charged positively. The large disc, which by means of the belt 
and pulley is made to rotate eight times for every turn of the 
smaller one, delivers up its charge of negative electricity as it 
passes the points of the upper comb, and so the prime conductor 
becomes negatively charged. 

By the upright rod which acts on a joint, the ball at the top 
can be brought nearer to, or removed further from, the prime 
conductor, so as to show the length of spark the machine can 
produce. 

The wooden apparatus on the top forms no part of Curre’s 
machine, but is an addition of my own, and is a modification of 
what is known as Winter’s ring. 

Having finished the machine in the first place without this 
appendage, although I found it gave out electricity in con- 
siderable quantity, I was not satisfied with the length of spark, 
which was seldom above five inches, and my first experiment 
was on the slab of ebonite opposite the upper comb. This 
appendage is by some makers supposed to lengthen the spark 
by one-third. Others again who have tried it say it has no 


28 


effect whatever, their machines working equally well without 
it. For my own part, after having experimented with this 
appendage in various forms, I have laid it aside, replacing it by 
an ebonite ball. These ebonite balls, I may remark, I have 
found to be much more effective than brass for the prevention 
of the escape of electricity. 

My next experiment was on the rubbers, the stuffing of 
which is commonly of horse-hair, but in my machine is com- 
posed of sheet-indiarubber about half-inch thick, covered with 
sheepskin, which forms a good flat surface, and fits closely to 
the plate. 

I thought by raising these rubbers higher there would be 
less time for the charge to escape from the friction plate before 
its coming opposite the di- electric, but after having raised 
them one and a-half inches there was no perceptible difference. 

While speaking of the rubbers, 1 may remark that it isa 
very common opinion that the electricity generated by the one 
on the side of the plate farthest from the di-electric is lost or 
wasted, but that such is not the case 1s easily proved, as one 
can be laid off; and we find on applying them alternately that 
the most distant one is quite as efiective as the other. 

My next experiment was on the spindle of the upper disc, 
which being of iron allowed some of the electricity to escape. 
This spindle I replaced by one made of ebonite, but the slight 
advantage gained was so small that it was more than counter- 
balanced by the loss in stiffness; so I laid this aside, and again 
used the iron one. This spindle I have insulated from the disc. 

I next tried the effect of lengthening the upper comb by 
means of an additional point projecting from the lower ball of 
the same. This proved to be a decided disadvantage, as it con- 
siderably diminished the length of spark, the reason being, as 
I afterwards found, that the di-electric—while it is from the 
circumference to a certain distance inwards negatively charged 
—has at the same time its central parts and spindle equally 
charged with positive electricity ; and so the extra point ap- 
proaching too near this central portion, instead of receiving an 
addition, gave up a part of what the comb had already 
gathered. 

As there exists a diversity of opinion as to the best form of 
collectors, many. being highly in favour of those used in 
‘“‘ Winter’s’”? machine—which are made in the form of a ring, 
and having the points set in a groove—I constructed a pair on 
this plan. These I found not quite so effective as the forks, 
but this, I think, is to be attributed to their diameter being 
somewhat less than the length of the forks; otherwise I think 
their performance would have been very nearly equal. 

My next experiment consisted in the introduction of the 


ive 


ed 


ioe 


29 


link-shaped appendage on the top of the machine. This con- 
tains a continuous core of iron wire, which communicates with 
the cylinder through the supports at the ends. and works on 
the same principle as a “ Winter’s” ring, of which it is a modi- 
fication, being made in the link-shape for the purpose of 
keeping it as low as possible. This appendage adds consider- 
ably to the length of spark; still I believe the same end might 
have been attained by making the prime-conductor of larger 
dimensions. 

The last experiment I have to mention is the substitution in 
the place of the slab of ebonite before-mentioned of one of 
the ring collectors. This addition I find still farther increases 
the length of the spark, so that the machine which originally 
would only spark about six inches, will in its present form, 
under similar conditions, yield ten-inch sparks. 


NOTES ON THE NIGHT PARROT 


(Geopsittacus occidentalis). 


By F. W. Anprews. 
[Read February 6, 1883. | 


The Night Parrot (Geopsittacus occidentalis) is found in the 
northern and north-western portions of this colony, and speci- 
mens have also been procured from Western Australia. 

During the day this bird lies concealed in the inside of a 
tussock or bunch of porcupine grass (Zriodia), the inside 
being pulled out and a snug retreat formed for its protection. 
Here, also, its rough nest is formed, and four white eggs laid. 
When the dark shades of evening have fairly set in it comes 
out to feed, but generally flies direct to the nearest water, 
which is often at a considerable distance from its nest ; in some 
instances I have known them to fly a distance of four or five 
miles. After drinking and shaking themselves up a little they 
fly off to feed on the seeds of the porcupine grass, returning to 
the water two or three times during the night. 

The name given to this bird by the aborigines is “ Myrrlum- 
bing,” from the supposed resemblance of their whistling note 
to the sound of that word. They have also a very peculiar 
croaking note of alarm whilst at the water, which much re- 
sembles the loud croak of a frog. On one occasion one of 


30 


these parrots was caught in a hut, where it had apparently 
been attracted by the ght of a bush lamp; it was put into a 
box witha handful of dry grass. On examination next morning 
the bird could not be seen; it had placed the dry grass ina 
heap, and had then drawn out the inside straw by straw until 
it had formed a hole, in which it had concealed itself. 

These birds are pretty generally distributed through the 
north and north-west of this colony; they come and go 
according to the nature of the season. When the early season 
is wet the porcupine grass flourishes and bears large quantities 
of seed, on which many birds feed; but if, on the contrary, the 
season is a dry one the grass does not seed, and no birds are to 
be seen. 

I shot some specimens at Cooper’s Creek in 1875, when out 
as collecting naturalist for the late Mr. J. W. Lewis in his 
exploration of the country about Lake Eyre. They were in 
that district observed to conceal themselves during the day in 
the thick patches of shrubby samphire, on the salt flats bor- 
dering on the creeks and on Lake Eyre. The first specimen of 
this bird brought under notice was forwarded to the late Mr. 
Gould, from Perth, in Western Australia, and was named by 
him in consequence Geopsittacus occidentalis. He was not 
aware until many years afterwards that it was a night bird, 
and numerous mistakes were made concerning its habits and 
economy which I have endeavoured to correct by many years 
of study and observation. 


BrsLioGRaAPHicaL Notes, by Professor R. Tate. 


Geopsittacus occidentalis was first diagnostically made known 
by Mr. Gould in Proceedings Zoological Society, 1861, p. 100, 
from askin sent from Perth. Itis described by the same author 
in his ‘‘ Handbook to Birds of Australia,” 1865, vol. 2, p. 88, and 
is figured in the “ Birds of Australia,” supplt., part iv., pl. 2, 
1867. 

Baron Mueller, towards the end of 1867, transmitted to the 
Zoological Society’s Gardens, London, a living specimen of 
this singular bird ; it was described by the donor as inhabiting 
the Gawler Ranges in South Australia, and in some respects to 
be a night-bird, like the Nightjars and Owls. During its short 
life in the Gardens, its habits were carefully watched, and the 
results arrived at were—that it is chiefly a nocturnal bird, 
shows a preference for green food, and that its voice is a 
double note harsh and loud. The specimen was anatomically 
examined by Dr. Murie, Prosector to the Society, and his 
observations are detailed in a paper printed in the Proceedings 
Zoeiogical Society, 1868, pp. 158-165. 


ol 


DIAGNOSES OF A NEW GENUS AND TWO SPECIES 
OF COMPOSITZ FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA. 


By Bazon Siz F. von Mvenier, M.D., F.BS., &e., 
Hon. Member. 


[Read March 6, 1883.] 


Epaltes Tatei. 


Annual, dwarf, diffuse, somewhat downy; leaves small, 
oblong-lanceolar, quite or almost sessile, not decurrent, 
toothless or towards the summit minutely denticulated ; the 
lower mostly opposite, the upper somewhat crowded; flower- 
heads small, axillary, sessile; bracts few, irregular, in two or 
three rows, scarious, whitish, mostly oval, ciliolated, forming a 
campanular-ovate involucre ; female flowers in several circum- 
ferential rows, with exceedingly narrow corolla and exserted 
style-branches ; bisexual flowers few, central, partly sterile ; 
corolla widening gradually upwards, towards the summit dark- 
purplish ; fruits minute, cylindrical-ellipsoid, slightly angular, 
not furrowed, faintly scabrous ; pappus on none of the flowers. 

On sandy scrub-lands between Wellington and Mason’s 
Look-Out, at the east side of Lake Alexandrina. (Prof. R. Tate). 

In external appearance this plant reminds of some minute 
Alternanthera. Stems numerous from a slender root, not ex- 
ceeding two inches in height. Indument from short crisp to 
partly papillary hairs. Leaves flat, occasionally some oval, 
measuring only 2 to 4 lines in length. Flower-heads not above 
two lines long; when in fruit upwards contracted. Receptacle 
flat, smooth. Involucrating bracts light-brownish towards the 
base, occasionally one or more of the innermost rudimentary, 
these narrow and stalked. Corolla of bisexual flowers com- 
paratively slender, not callous at the base. Style branches not 
thickened at the summit. Female corollas slightly widened 
towards the base. Achenes when fully ripe dark-brownish, 
hardly one-third line long. 

The identical species was known to me since very many years 
from the vicinity of Spencer’s Gulf; but as the specimens from 
there were gathered in mid-summer, all their florets had 
dropped. It is an early spring plant, for Professor Tate found 
it in full fruit already at the commencement of October. 

I have not ventured to exclude this interesting little weed 
from a generic position in Epaltes, although the outward aspect, 


32 


the disposition of the leaves, the paucity and petaloid colora- 
tion of the involucre-bracts, as well as the approach to 
universality in fruit-ripening flowers would warrant to assign 
to the species sectional rank under the name Petalopholis. 
Systematically the plant should be piaced nearest to #. Harrisit. 

Still more anomalous in the genus is #. Cunningham through 
its almost complete diclinism, and through its bisexual flowers 
being provided with pappus-bristles to the number of five, as 
shown in the lithogram xxxviii of the ‘‘ Plants of Victoria.” 

As a genus Epaltes shows also some affinity to Hlachanthus, 
Tsoetopsis, and Stuartina. 


[Read April 3, 1883.] 


Achnophora. 


Flower-head heterogamous. Bracts in few rows, of unequal 
length, nearly ovate, not much pointed, membranous at the 
margin, forming an almost hemispheric involucre. Receptacle 
conically raised at its centre, bearing as many canalicular- 
lanceolate deciduous bracts as flowers. Outermost flowers 
ligulate and female, the other flowers bisexual, all fruit-bear- 
ing. Corolla of the bisexual flowers tubular, slightly widened 
upwards, terminated by five or rarely four deltoid very short 
tooth-like lobes. Anthers narrow-acuminate, without basal 
appendages. Stigmata short, capillary, neither truncated nor 
dilated at the end. Achenes semiovate, wedge shaped, some- 
what three or four-angular. Segments of the pappus eight to 
twelve, semilanceolar-subulate, flat, very shghtly ciliated. 

A stemless glabrous herb, in appearance like the smaller 
species of Brachycome, with bundles of short rather thick 
rootlets with all the leaves radical filiform-linear and quite 
entire, on broader clasping and rather long and mem- 
branous stalks with elongated single-headed bractless flower- 
stalks, with pale ligules and silky slightly compressed achenes. 

This new genus of Asteroidez differs from Wablonium in the 
involueral bracts being more unequal, in the development of 
ray-flowers, in not distinctly bi-tailed anthers, in acute stig- 
mata, as well as in the number and tender texture of the 
pappus-segments. From Ozlotis it is at once removed by the 
presence of bracts on the receptacle, as also by the structure 
of the pappus, in which latter respect it is nearer Quinetia ; 
from Erodiophyllum and Ammobium it is still more widely 
distant. But it shows among Extra-Australian genera some 
approach to the South African Amellus, though it is readily 
separable by habit, by more deciduous floral bracts and par- 
ticularly by the pappus and achenes. 


33 


Achnophora Tatei. 


On wet heathy ground about two miles east from Karatta, 
on the Stun’sail Boom River, Kangaroo Island, forming peren- 
nial tufts. (Professor Ralph Tate). 

Leaves three-fourths to one and a half inches long, a half to 
one line broad. Leaf-stalks measuring one-half to three- 
fourths of an inch in length, one to two lines in width, pellucid, 
three nerved. Peduncles thin, about two inches long. Outer 
involucral bracts shorter than the inner ones, and hardly pellu- 
cid towards the margin; inner bracts two or three lines high. 
Ultimate separate floral bracts entire and membranous at the 
margin, somewhat broader upwards, reaching as high as their 
flowers. Corolla of bisexual flower about two lines long. Anthers 
enclosed. Ligules narrowly oblong-lanceolar, hardly three 
lines long. Achenes scarcely one line high. Segments of 
calyx-limb (pappus) brownish-yellow, equal in size or somewhat 
unequal, but all of one form, about one line long, persistent. 


DIAGNOSIS OF A NEw GENUS OF VERBENACE& 
FROM ARNHEM’S LAND. 


By Baron Sre F. von Mvetrer, M.D., F.RS., &e., Hon. 
Member. 3 


‘Read May 1, 1883.] 


Tatea. 


Calyx with a semiovate soon hemispheric tube and five 
somewhat unequal semiovate deltoid or finally semiorbicular 
lobes. Corolla with very short blunt irregular lobes of imbri- 
cate preflorescence and with a short tube inside bearded 
towards the middle. Stamens four, inclosed, didynamous. 
Filaments short, inserted near the middle of the corolla-tube. 
Anthers almost cordate, longitudinally dehiscent, without 
any appendage. Style singularly short, deciduous. Stigma 
minute. Disk none. Ovary two-celled, with a solitary 
amphitropal ovule in each cell. Fruit drupaceous, ovate- 
globular, clasped at the base by the persistent calyx, perfectly 
two-celled, two-seeded or by evanescence of one of the ovules 
one-seeded. Placente axillary, fixed to the middle of the 
septum, moderately convex. Pericarp baceate. Endocarp 
bony, wrinkled or furrowed, not splitting. Seeds oblique- 

c 


34 


ovate, impressed at the placenta, fixed at the middle. Testa 
membranous, pale. Albumen thin, amygdaline. Embryo 
white, but little shorter than the albumen. Cotyledons plane- 
convex, free, downwards straight, upwards somewhat bent or 
twisted. Radicle very short, almost globular, exserted, 
inferior. 

A somewhat hairy herb, stemless or producing a very short 
stem, with creeping root-stock, with leaves opposite or quatern- 
arily crowded of comparatively large size, of ovate shape, 
of wedge-shaped attenuation into their very short stalk or 
sessile base, and of upwards many denticulation, with cymes 
on rather short peduncles, with narrow or minute bracts, with 
small flowers and outside black drupes. 

This new genus, notwithstanding its albuminous seeds, is 
better placed into the tribe of Viticee than that of Chloan- 
thacez, approaching to some extent Premna, but introducing 
unwontedly the feature of a stemless gesneraceous or scrophu- 
larinous plant into the order of Verbenacee. It is dedicated 
to the accomplished and unwearied Professor of Natural 
Science in the University of Adelaide, who himself was the 
first discoverer of this remarkable botanic novelty. 


Tatea subacaulis. 


In Arnhem’s Land, North Australia, along the route from 
Bridge Creek to McKinlay River at the Twelve-Mile, on 
alluvial soil (Professor Ralph Tate); near Yam _ Creek, 
(Inspector Foelsche). 

Rhizome sometimes two feet long. Leaves of tender texture, 
generally four only in number, measuring two to five inches 
in length and one and a half to three inches in width; always 
flat, almost glabrescent, paler beneath. Peduncles one to two 
inches long, beset with very short spreading hairlets. Cyme 
compound, hardly ever exceeding one and a half inches in 
length, conspersed with minute glands irrespective of its 
copious hairlets. Calyces one to one and a half lines long. 
Corolla about twice as long as the calyx, glabrous outside. 
Upper anthers at least sometimes smaller than the others. 
Style only about two-thirds of a line long. Fruit measuring 
three to four lines. 

This plant is principally in flower from March to April, and 
ripens its fruit towards the end of the year. 


35 


THE PROTEACEZ OF THE VICTORIAN ALPS, 


Wirth an InrRODUCTION ON THE TOPOGRAPHICAL AND 
GEOLOGICAL FEATURES OF THAT REGION. 


By James Srrrimne, Corresponding Member. 
(Read April 3, 1883.) 


The Australian Alps, in Victoria, may be described as con- 
sisting of a vast extent of mountains traversing the south- 
eastern portion of Australia ; flanked on the south-east by lower 
lying tracts, which embrace the lacustrine areas of Gippsland, 
and on the north by the extensive levels of the Murray basin. 

The central mountain mass does not, however, present to us 
an original axis of elevation, but, on the contrary, the area 
embraced by what is now called the Main Dividing Range was 
during Miocene times covered by an extensive plateau. ” Since 
that period long-continued sub-aerial denudation has eroded 
drainage channels, and has so altered the surface configura- 
tion as to produce orographical features essentially different 
from those which existed during the Miocene period. It seems 
probable that the present drainage channels, especially those 
forming the Murray-source affluents, were considerably in- 
fluenced by the pre-existing meridional corrugations of the 
Paleozoic rock masses, as well as by their composition and 
texture. Whether these regions were subjected to a period of 
climatic conditions analagous to that which formed the glacial 
epoch of Europe is a matter of some uncertainty, as no precise 
data exist, as far as known at present, for aiding in the solution 
of the problem. However, from the remarks “made by Prof. 
Tate in his admirable “ Address to the Royal Society of South 
Austraha,” vol. IL., p. lxiv., it would appear that there are not 
wanting evidences of glacial action in South Australia; it 
would, ‘therefore, be at least probable that the Australian Alps 
participated in those glacial movements. I have carefully 
examined the old lake basins near Omeo, referred to by my 
friend Mr. A. W. Howitt, F.G.S. (Quart. Jour. Geo. Soc., vol. 
Xxxv., p. 35, 187), and although there are not wanting evidences 
of transportation in the huge blocks now undergoing decom- 
position which compose the so-called false bottom of these 
ancient lake basins or tarns, yet there are no traces of ice 


36 


action in the form of grooved or scratched rock surfaces. It 
is possible, however, that powerful meteorological conditions 
during the past have removed by denudation evidences of 
glacial action such as those referred to by Prof. Tate as existing 
in South Australian territory. The orographical features of 
the main watershed line which constitutes the central chain of 
the Australian Alps is most varied, rising into dome-shaped 
heights as Mount Hotham, 6,015 feet above sea level ; opening 
out at lower levels into flat, although somewhat limited, ex- 
panses of table-lands, as Paw-Paw and Precipice Plains, 5,000 
feet above sea level, forming thence an anticlinal ridge; again 
descending into low gaps or saddlebacks; rising again as a 
well-defined ridge, which gives place to rugged mountain peaks, 
as Mount Tambo and the Cobberas, the latter over 6,000 feet 
above sea level; and finally culminating in the towering heights 
of Mount Koscuisko, 7,308 feet above sea level. Connected 
with this main watershed line by ridges of varying width and 
surface contour are lofty plateaux, snowclad during winter for 
many months, such as Bogong High Plains, at an elevation of 
6,000 feet above sea level, north of it; and the Snowy, Dargo, 
and Gelantipy tablelands, at 4,000 to 5,000 feet, south of it. 
These plateaux.form the gathering ground of some of the prin- 
cipal streams flowing northerly into the Murray River and 
southerly into the Gippsland lakes and Southern Ocean. 
During the midsummer these lofty plateaux, with their verdant 
aspect, rich carpetings of alpine flowers (principally of the 
order Composite), mosses, and lichens, form a striking and 
most agreeable contrast with the burnt-up, browned appearance 
of the lower lands and valleys, languishing in excessive dryness, 
at this time of the year. The surrounding scenery, as observed 
from the summit of one of the low rolling ridges intersecting 
the Bogong High Plains, is very grand and impressive—seas 
of mountains rising wave-like on every side, presenting in the 
distance almost infinite shades of blue and purple colouring ; 
while the extreme rarity of the air and other conditions all | 
tend to produce a scene of wild mountain grandeur charming 
beyond description. Unfortunately, the severity of the winter 
months and the accumulated snow render these high lands 
practically inhospitable at that time of the year. 

Geologically considered, the Australian Alps may be 
briefly described as consisting of highly-inclined Lower Palzo- 
zoic strata, on the denuded edges of which rest isolated tracts 
of either Upper Paleozoic strata or Tertiary volcanic sheets. 
The Lower Paleozoic formation, showing in many places as 
highly metamorphosed schists surrounded by, or surrounding, 
more or less central granitic masses, the latter being in all 
probability the lower portions of the Lower Palzozoic strata 


37 


partially or completely altered by the influence of central 
heat, and which have become exposed by long-continued pro- 
cesses of sub-aeriel denudation. The Metamorphic rocks are 
themselves invaded by porphyrites. Amoug the isolated patches 
of Upper Paleozoic rocks are remnants of a Devonian forma- 
tion of limestones and conglomerates, as at Bendi and other 
localities. The Tertiary basalts occupy mostly elevated posi- 
tions, forming indeed parts of the lofty plateau before referred 
to. They appeared to be the remnants of extensive lava flows, 
filling up the valleys excavated during the Miocene period, 
while the ancient ridges have in many places become the sites 
of the present river valleys by the extensive denudation and 
erosion which subsequently took place. Along the course of 
the principal streams are deposits of Tertiary gravels all more 
or less auriferous. The Tertiary formations which fringe the 
mountain mass on either side do not appear to rise on their 
flanks to a greater-height than S00 feet above the present sea 
level; or, in other words, the maximum level in respect to the 
mountain mass at which the sea has stood during Cainozoie 
time, or the total elevation of the land above sea level during 
that period. 

In order that local collections of indigenous plants may be 
made scientifically valuable for future phytographic researches, 
it seems to me that more attention to the precise locality 
should be noted, so that as the areas become geologically 
mapped, the formations upon which any given species pre- 
dominates may be traced out, and by this means aid in 
determining how far varieties of plants are due to geological 
or meteorological agencies. As far as our alpine representa- 
tives of the order under consideration are concerned, 1t seems 
probable that they are confined to the granitic and Silurian 
areas. It is much to be regretted that many of the names 
given to prominent peaks of our Australian Alps by our dis- 
tinguished botanist, Baron von Mueller, during his early 
botanical explorations, and published in that grand standard 
work, the “Flora Australiensis,’” have been subsequently 
arbitrarily altered, thus leading to confusion in tracing out 
the stations of any particular species. 

As far as known at present our alpine Proteaceous plants 
are endemic in these elevated regions, and I would remark, en 
passant, that it may be interesting to South Australian 
botanists to determine how far our alpine species may be 
correlated with any South Australian species under different 
climatic and geologic conditions. Most of the species herein 
referred to occur in the catchment basins of the Mitta Mitta 
and Hume Rivers, both source affluents of the Murray River. 

Of the Proteacee as a whole, the researches of Baron 


38 


Mueller, Robt. Brown, Dallachy, Bentham, and others have . 
determined the predominence of species in Western Australia 
and North-Eastern Australia.* Outside of Australian terri- 
tory, the order would appear to have a wide geographic range, 
through New Caledonia, Indian Archipelago, and Eastern 
tropical Asia to Japan, and also in South Africa and South 
America. Of the relation of this order of plants to the pre- 
existing flora of Australia, it seems probable that Proteaceous 
genera were contemporaneous with the deposition of the Lower 
Pliocene deposits, the fossil fruit Conchotheca rotunda bearing a 
resemblance to several tropical representatives of the genus 
Grevillea. 

As might be inferred from the altitudinal conditions, the 
Australian Alps present hypsometric zones of vegetation, rising 
from the gigantic Eucalypts of lower levels, through dense 
masses of arboreous shrubs clothing the moist heads of gullies 
at higher elevations, through zones of pasture lands and 
dwarfed heath-like plants to the treeless region at 6,000 feet, 
covered with alpine herbs, grasses, mosses, and lichens. Such 
hypsometric zones, however, do not present us with any great 
ordinal differences; on the contrary, the shrubs and plants 
found growing at sub-alpine and alpine heights are, for the 
most part, dwarfed representatives of lowland genera. There 
are, of course, a few exceptions to the rule, such as the genus 
Orites, which, as far as known, is limited to the mountainous 
regions of New South Wales, Victoria, and Tasmania. 


List oF SPECIES OF PROTEACE®S. 


Persoonia confertiflora Grevillea ramosissima 

Af Chamepeuce Hakea eriantha 

‘i juniperina “« rugosa 

Va Bereich 

Orites lancifolia ‘ acicularis 
Grevillea alpina ‘¢ — microcarpa 

ne Miqueliana Lomatia ilicifolia 

parviflora “ longifolia 

¢ - . 5 . 

‘ australis Banksia marginata 


Persoonia confertiflora, Bentham. 


This interesting plant forms at elevations between 1,000 and 
8,000 feet an erect shrub, but at higher elevations up to 4,500 
feet it becomes dwarfed and divaricate. It is most abundant 


*From Baron Mueller’s “Systematic Census” the following statistics 
have been compiled :—Total Australian species, 587; number in West 
Australia, 396; South Australia, 33; Victoria, 51; Tasmania, 23; New 
South Wales, 127; Queensland, 63; North Australia, 35.—R. Tate. 


39 


on the heathy, rocky ridges of Metamorphic schist near Omeo, 
and also on the Silurian areas at Limestone Creek (head of 
Murray River) at elevations of 3,000 feet. Its other station 
is on the Genoa River (F. v. I). 


Persoonia Chamepeuce, Lhotsky. 

This is a rather decumbent shrub; is abundant on the un- 
dulating ranges of mica schist at elevations between 2,000 
and 4,000 feet. It extends as far westward as the Broken 
River (fF. v. J), and northerly to Bathurst, New South Wales. 


Persoonia juniperina, Labillardiére. 


On the margin of source runnels intersecting the basaltic 
plateau at the head of Victoria River. This species forms a 
low divaricate shrub seldom exceeding one foot in height. It 
has a much wider geographic range than either of its congeners, 
as it has been found growing at the Genoa River; Tasmania, at 
elevations of 3,200 feet; Wimmera and Glenelg Rivers; and 
on the higher parts of the Mount Lofty Range in South Aus- 
traha. 

Orites lancifolia, F. v. M. 

This very handsome shrub inhabits the rocky summits of the 
Great Dividing Range as at Mount Hotham, and the high 
lateral ranges as Mount Feathertop; Mount Bogong, 6,508 
feet, and Mount Wellington, principally on Silurian and 
granitic soils. I have not seen the species below 3,000 feet 
altitude ; its general limit is between 5,000 and 6,000 feet, and 
appears to flourish best at that zone. 


Grevillea alpina, Lindley. 


This interesting species is prolific in the ranges around 
Omeo on Metamorphic schists. It ascends to 4,000 feet. At 
3,000 feet it is an erect shrub attaining a height of six feet. At 
the higher elevations it becomes dwarfed to a low straggling 
bush scarcely a foot above ground. It extends westerly to the 
granitic ridges of the Buffalo Ranges to the Upper Yarra 
Ranges, and further westward to the Grampians. 


Grevillea Miqueliana, F. v. M. 


On the porphyritic (Lower Devonian probably) ridges near 
the Omeo Plains, between Mount Sisters and Mount Tambo, 
at elevations of 4,000 feet, it forms a robust shrub fully ten 
feet high. It extends westerly in favourable rocky situations 
along the northern flanks of the Dividing Range to Mount 
Useful ; and has been found by the writer on the Silurian 
ranges near Grant, south of Dividing Range, at elevations of 
4,000 feet. 


40 


Grevillea parviflora, R. Brown. 


Along the margin of the streams forming the source 
affluents of the Mitta Mitta River, on Metamorphic and 
Silurian areas, it is an erect rather bushy shrub, which attains 
a height of ten to twelve feet; but at elevations of 4,000 feet 
it becomes dwarfed. It extends easterly to the Genoa River, 
to the Illawarra and Blue Mountains in New South Wales; 
westerly to Portland, and South Australia at Kangaroo Island. 
It would be interesting to note the difference between the 
South Australian variety if found growing on the Tertiary 
formation of Kangaroo Island and our alpine form common to 
the older Paleozoic and Metamorphic schists. 


Grevillea australis, R. Brown. 


This much-branched shrub is found growing on the Silurian 
areas in the Mitchell River source basin south of the Dividing 
Range, at elevations of 5,000 feet. Near Mount Selwyn it be- 
comes dwarfed and decumbent, clinging to the rocks. It has 
been found at Mount Wellington and the sources of the Yarra 
River, and southerly in Tasmania, at elevations of 4,000 feet. 


Grevillea ramosissima, Meissner. 


This interesting species is apparently confined in Victoria to 
two stations—the Upper Hume River on Silurian formation 
(Baron Mueller), and at the junction of Livingstone Creek 
with the Mitta Mitta River on Metamorphic schists. At the 
latter station it attains a height,of three to six feet, and its 
altitudinal limit is 3,000 feet. It appears to be rapidly under- 
going extinction. It is more plentiful in New South Wales, 
extending to the Goulburn River, Macquarie River, and other 
localities. 


Hakea eriantha, R. Brown. 


An erect arborescent shrub, the fruits of which are locally 
known as hickory nuts; is most abundant on the Silurian areas 
of the Tambo and Dargo Rivers, south of the Dividing Range, 
at elevations of from 2,000 to 4,000 feet ; and on the gneissic 
schists of the Mitta Mitta basin, at elevations of 3,000 feet. 
It extends easterly to the Genoa River, and to the Hastings 
River and New England, New South Wales. 


Hakea rugosa, R. Brown. 

A prostrate species; confined, as far as known, in Victoria 
to the Upper Paleozoic formation at the head of the Macalister 
River, south of Dividing Range. It is widely distributed in 
South Australia. 


41 


Hakea acicularis, R. Brown. 


An arboreous shrub or small tree. Attains a height of 15 
feet on the basaltic ledges of the Dargo High Plains tableland, 
at Mayford Spur, at an elevation of 5,000 feet. It extends 
northerly to Port Jackson and Blue Mountains, N.S.W., and 
southerly to the head of the Macalister River and Tasmania, at 
elevations of 2,000 to 4,000 feet. 


Hakea microcarpa, R. Brown. 


This stout, rigid shrub is common along the banks of the 
streams forming the head waters of the Mitta Mitta River on 
Metamorphic rocks up to 5,000 feet elevation. On the Omeo 
Ranges it attains a height of 8 to 12 feet, but becomes almost 
prostrate at the higher alpine stations. It extends northerly 
to the Macquarie and Clarence Rivers in New South Wales, 
and southerly to Tasmania, at elevations of 3,000 feet. 


Lomatia ilicifolia, R. Brown. 


This is an erect, somewhat arboreous shrub, attaining amid 
the sub-alpine slopes of our Australian Alps a height of 20 
feet ; it is most abundant south of the Dividing Range, in the 
humid gullies at the sources of the Wentworth and other 
affluents of the Mitchell River, on Silurian soils, at elevations 
of 3,000 to 5,000 feet. It extends westerly along the Dividing 
Range to the Delatite Mountains and the Dandenong Ranges, 
and also to Port Phillip, and northerly to the Clarence River 
and Snowy Mountains at the heads of the Macleay and Bellinger 
Rivers, N.S.W. 


Lomatia longifolia, R. Brown. 


On the Livingstone Creek and Upper Mitta Mitta sources 
this erect shrub attains a height of 12 feet, on Metamorphic 
schist areas; on the Mitchell River basin, on the Lower 
Silurian areas, it is equally robust. It extends westerly to the 
Buffalo Ranges and King Rivers, and northerly to the Blue 
Mountains, N.S.W. 


Banksia marginata, Cavanilles. 


On the rocky ledges of Metamorphic schist, near Omeo, 
Livingstone Creek, at 2,000 feet elevation, this species forms a 
small bushy tree. It extends from the Wonnangulla River, 
on Paleozoic rocks, to Port Phillip; southerly to Tasmania, at 
elevations of 3,000 feet; westerly to Port Lincoln, in South 
Australia; and northerly to Port Jackson and Mudgee, in New 
South Wales. 


42 


Discussion. 


Professor Tare, in the course of his remarks, stated that of 
the sixteen species of Proteacee inhabiting the alpine region 
about Omeo four of them occur in South Austraha. They 
are :— 

Banksia marginata and Hakea rugosa, which he regarded as 
lowland plants straggling to high elevations; they flourish in 
the warm regions wherein the annual rainfall is not below 20 
inches. The latter species he considered to be of South Aus- 
tralian origin. 

Persoonia juniperina is, in South Australia, restricted to the 
Mount Lofty and Willunga Ranges, and descends rarely below 
about 1,500 feet elevation. He was inclined to claim it asa 
survival of an alpine flora of Pliocene date. 

Grevillea parviflora in a varietal form is known from two 
stations on Kangaroo Island, on rich loam in river valleys, both 
at elevations not much above sea level. The Kangaroo Island 
plant is readily separable from the alpine one, and he thought 
that it had fair claim to subspecific rank as G. halmaturina. 


43 


NOTES OF THE DISSECTION OF A COMPOUND 
ASCIDIAN FOUND IN ST. VINCENT’S GULF. 


By H. T. Warirrert, M.D. 
[Read April 3, 1885.) 


Plate I. 


I do not know whether the Ascidian I am about to describe 
has been found or named by earlier observers. It is new to 
me, and differs in many respects from other Ascidians found at 
the same locality, and from the description of the compound 
Ascidians given in the text books of zoology. I have found 
two specimens on different days during the last two months, 
both floating in the ripple at low water within a little distance 
of the Glenelg jetty. 

The larger one was flattened, oval, and about three inches 
long by two broad; its thickness was about the third of an 
inch. In the water it was not unlike a piece of boiled tripe. 
It was soft and villose over its whole surface except at one 
portion of the side, where it was smooth and membranous, and 
in the centre of this smooth surface there was a small round 
opening which looked like a mouth. This specimen was decom- 
posing when I found it, and I could make nothing out of its 
structure except that on cutting through it, I found a number 
of bodies which I supposed to be ova. 

The second specimen was very much smaller, but in a good 
state of preservation. This also had the side opening at about 
the same part as in the larger one. I preserved this as nearly 
as possible in its natural condition, and before dissecting it, 
Professor Tate kindly gave me his opinion that I should find 
it to be a compound Ascidian. After hardening the specimen 
in spirit, I commenced the dissection by passing a fine probe 
through the opening at the side. The probe moved freely in any 
direction for about a quarter of an inch, but beyond this dis- 
tance there was resistance. One point of a small scissors was 
then introduced into the orifice, and the opening was enlarged 
above and below. An attempt was made from this point to 
peel off the outer membrane. We know it is easy as a rule in 
dissecting the solitary Ascidians to separate the outer test 
from the membranous mantle or second coat. In the specimen 
now under examination the separation could not be effected 
except. with the assistance of frequent snippings with the 


44 


scissors, and even then the work was anything but clean. In 
some parts nothing remained but the membrane, together with 
a portion of the softer tissue on the inner surface, in which, as 
seen under a simple lens, were numerous small pits, and at the 
bottom of each of these there was a small opening leading to 
the exterior (see a, fig. 1). On that part of the membrane 
where the removal had been less successful there remained 
numerous minute bodies, which at a glance proved the correct- 
ness of Professor Tate’s diagnosis, each of these being a small 
Ascidian with its branchial chamber or pharynx, according as 
we adopt Professor Huxley’s or Professor Allman’s nomen- 
clature, so beautifully shown that I doubt if any dissection of a 
larger Ascidian could enable a student to get a more accurate 
knowledge of this structure. The numerous sago-looking 
bodies which can be seen by the unaided eye are each the body 
of an Ascidian, having a complicated organization; but the 
most striking part of the view is the structure intervening 
between these bodies and the little openings communicating 
with the outer world—the so-called branchial chamber or 
pharynx. Many of these will be seen to be torn from their 
attachments, but some will be found in sitw, and. afford us a 
perfect knowledge of their arrangement. If we imagine a 
Chinese lantern to be divided by horizontal ribs, and the parts 
between these ribs to consist of many longitudinal bars, 
separated from each other at intervals, so as to give a bird-cage 
appearance to the whole, we shall have a rough notion of the 
appearance of these structures. In some instances the mouth 
(6, fig. 1) is still attached to the border of the opening. Be- 
hind this is a conical cap (c, fig. 1) denser and less transparent 
than the other parts, and composed of long flat fusiform cells 
with central nuclei. This cap, which fits on to the bird-cage 
structure, is composed of three or four tiers of perpendicular 
bars divided by the horizontal ribs as already described. 
Under a high power we can sometimes see here and there 
the remains of the cilia attached to these bars, by which, as 
in all the Ascidians, the animal keeps up a constant flow of 
water through its system. Each of these perpendicular bars 
appears to be hollow, having on each side a row of oblong 
cells with central nuclei. In all the specimens examined there 
was a thickened structure on the outer side of the bird-cage 
arrangement (d, fig. 1), and running up as high as the cap. 
It is certainly hollow, but terminates in a blind extremity. It 
has often been asserted that this structure being hollow serves 
as a means of conveying fluid along the walls of the bird-cage 
structure, and that the transverse bars are also hollow, and 
open into this tube. It is probable that the large tube may have 
some uses of this sort, but I have here a preparation adapted 


45 


for the highest powers, and it shows that each of these ribs is 
in fact a thin band of finely-striated muscular fibres, which can 
be traced all round the cage, and can be seen to divide into 
smaller fibres and fibrille, which split up and distribute them- 
selves on the walls of the large tube at the side. We can 
understand the uses of these muscles, which, by contracting, 
can readily cause the walls of the cage to contract, and eject 
water rapidly, as Ascidians are known to do, and from which 
the larger ones get the popular name of sea-squirts. I think 
it not improbable that the tube at the side also has muscular 
fibres entering into its structure, but I have not yet been able 
to demonstrate them. 

The end of the cage nearest to the body of the animal is 
larger than the mouth, and joins by a tube the digestive cavity 
of the Ascidian. 

If we turn again to the mouth of the animal we find seven 
short leaf-like expansions, which probably admit of motion 
during life (a, fig. 2), but cannot be extended and retracted 
like the tentacles of the Polyzoa. We know that the absence 
of vibratile ‘tentacles in Ascidians led to great difference of 
opinion between no less distinguished observers than Profes- 
sors Allman and Huxley as to the exact nature of the part I 
ha¥e hitherto mentioned as the bird-cage structure. By Pro- 
fessor Allman the true mouth of the Ascidian is supposed to be 
at the farther end of the structure, near the digestive cavity ; 
and the ribs and bars of the cage are believed to be the homo- 
logues of the tentacles of the Polyzoa. By Huxley the end 
nearest the outer membrane is believed to be the true mouth ; 
and the cage-like structure is supposed to be a greatly modified 
and dilated pharynx. My own observations have hitherto in- 
clined me to the views of Professor Allman, but an attentive 
study of the specimen now under notice leads to the belief 
that Professor Huxley is more correct. I find attached just 
within the cap a plentiful supply of conspicuous tentacles, 
which are sufficiently long to be easily protruded when neces- 
sary. In one of my mounts I have seen one or two of these 
tentacles protruded through the mouth, but in the majority of 
instances they are retracted, as in the Polyzoa, and he curled up 
within the cap. Fig. 2 is an enlarged view of the cap, and at 
bare seen several of these tentacles as observed in a slide J 
have here for exhibition. 

These cage-like bodies separate so easily from the other parts 
of the Ascidian that hundreds of them were found floating in 
the water under which the dissection was made. 

After the outer membrane had been removed as described, 
there remained an appurently semi-solid substance in which 
Ascidians in every stage of development were embedded. A 


46 


longitudinal incision was made through this substance, and it was 
found after cutting about one-eighth of an inch inward, that the 
knifeentered a cavity from which fluid was driven out with some 
force. On examination, it was found that this cavity was lined 
with a rather tough membrane not unlike the external coat, 
except that it was much smoother, and no openings could be 
found in it. I was not prepared for this cavity, and it was 
too late to take careful measures to ascertain whether it com- 
municated by any canal with any other part of the structure, 
but a prolonged search with a fine probe did not reveal any 
such opening, and I am inclined to believe that the only com- 
munication between the walls of this cavity and the other 
portions is by imbibition through the substance of the structure 
itself. 

During the dissection it was abundantly shown that the 
chief mode of growth, if not the only one, in this compound 
form was budding. I met with numerous buds growing inward 
from the lower part of the more mature Ascidians, and also 
embryo forms in all stages of development. We are all aware 
that a mass of evidence has been accumulated within the last 
few years tending to show that the Ascidian is the connecting 
link in the stage of evolution between the invertebrata and the 
vertebrata. The young larva of the solitary Ascidian has a 
tail, but as in the case of the young embryo of man, the tail 
disappears in the progress of development. Within this tail 
there is a prolongation of nervous structures, which also dis- 
appear, but during the existence of these structures the young 
Ascidian has a close resemblance to the forms of animals on 
the border land of vertebrata, as seen in the Amphioxus, one of 
the primitive forms of fish. I have here specimens of embryos 
dissected out from the substance of the Ascidian I am describ- 
ing; some are stained and others are simply mounted in pre- 
servative fluid. All these show that even in the compound 
Ascidians the embryos, though never likely to require to swim 
about, but always confined in the substance of the tissue, within 
which they are developed, have long well-formed tails, and in 
some of the better marked specimens there is evidence that 
there is within the tail a canal in which cells of a somewhat 
ovate shape can be distinguished. These tails show under a 
one-fifth objective unmistakable transverse markings like those 
of striated muscle. In one of the thicker specimens there are 
numerous embryos, showing the stages of tail formation. Fig.3 
vives a view of one of these embryos, and ¢ shows the fully 
formed tail winding around the body. 

It will be remembered that in the embryo of the solitary 
Ascidian, and in its early free swimming stage of existence, 
there is to be seen near the head three rope-like appendages, 


47 


with bell-shaped ends not unlike the ends of the old-fashioned 
bell-pulls of former days. It has been ascertained that these 
are suckers, if I may use the expression, by which the young 
Ascidian ultimately fastens itself to stones or seaweeds when 
it settles down to a quiet life and a permanent residence. 
These appendages are remarkably well shown in some of the 
embryos under notice (fig. 3, 6). Three are always very 
distinct, and in some specimens three or four smaller ones 
are present. It is difficult to understand why they are there, 
knowing as we do that these embryos can never enjoy a free 
swimming existence. As the embryo grows we see _ these 
appendages lengthen out, and they may be seen traversing the 
inter-ascidian tissue in all directions, and can be sometimes 
traced for considerable distances. I suspect that these cords 
are hollow, and that they form a network of communication 
between the members of the colony. I must, however, wait for 
chance to put in my way a few living specimens before this and 
many other questions can be worked out. 

In all the embryo specimens there is a projecting portion of 
ill-defined tissue (fig. 3, a), which is probably nervous, and 
in it are embedded behind each other two distinct masses of 
pigment, which I take to be rudimentary eyes; but I do not 
notice any ocelli between the tentacles of the adult animal. 

The digestive organs, nervous system, and organs of cireula- 
tion are not so distinct in any of my specimens as to enable me 
to note more than that they appear to have a general resem- 
blance to those of the larger Ascidians. Some specimens I 
began to prepare yesterday will probably enable me by means 
of differential staining to get a step onward to more minute 
details. At present I believe the intestine terminates in a 
tube passing a short way upward by the side of the pharynx 
(fig. 3, e), opposite to that where the longer tube already 
described is seen. I have not been able to trace how it com- 
municates with the exterior. 

I believe this Ascidian comes nearest to the family of 
Botryllide, but to all appearances it is free swimming. 


Expranations To Puare I. 

Fig. 1. a, Pits in external test ; 6, mouth; ¢, cap; d, tube run- 
ning up side of pharynx; e, supposed end of intestine ; 
jf. body of Ascidian. 

Fig. 2. Enlarged view of cap. a, Mouth-tentacles ; 0, vibratile 
tentacles. 

Fig. 3. a, Eye and otolith; 4, suckers; ¢, tail; d, digestive 
organs in formation; e, birdeage-like pharynx in for- 
mation. 


48 


DESCRIPTIONS OF SOME NEW SPECIES OF 
SQUILLA FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA. 


By Prorressor Ratren Tare, F.G.S., F.LS., &e. 
[Read May 1, 1883.] 


Plate IT. 


With the aid of Mr. Mier’s* “ Revision of the Genera and 
Species of the Squillide,’’ I have undertaken with some con- 
fidence an examination of the Australian species preserved in 
the South Australian Museum. These are, with one exception 
(Gonodactylus graphurus, from Edgecombe Bay, Queensland), 
from the tropical and extra-tropical waters of our province, 
and are as follows :— 


SPECIES FROM THE NortTHERN TERRITORY. 
1.—Squilla raphidea, Fabricius. 

The only example in the collection, which is, from the 
Northern Territory (probably Port Darwin), I have identified 
with S. harpax, De Haan,+ placed by Mr. Miers as synonymic 
with the Fabrician species here named. 8S. raphidea has 
hitherto been unrecorded for Australia, though it is known 
from various parts of the Indo-Pacific region. The Port 
Darwin specimen measures 7} inches in length. 


2.—Gonodactylus chiragra, Fabricius. 
Many examples from the Northern Territory, probably Port 
Darwin, whence I have seen several specimens in the collection 
of Mr. W. T. Bednall, by whom they were taken. 


3.—Gonodactylus graphurus, White. 
Two examples from the Northern Territory, probably Port 
Darwin. 
The following are also known from Port Essington :— 
Lysiosquilla acanthocarpus, Miers; Chloridella microphthalna, 
M.-Edw. ; and Squilla scorpio, Latreille. 


SpecrEs FRoM SourH AUSTRALIA. 


Mr. Haswell had evidently not been aware of the occurence 
of any member of the Squilla family in South Australian 
waters, as in his “ Australian Crustacea” not one of the species 


~ *« On the Squillide,” in Annals Mag. Nat. History 5, vel. 5; 1880. 
+ ‘*Fauna Japonica, Crustacea,” p. 222, t. li., fig. 1; 1850. 


49 


has assigned to it a South Australian habitat; indeed, our 
knowledge of the existence of representatives of the family 
off the whole of the south coast of the continent is limited to 
Squilla miles—a Victorian example of which is in the British 
Museum. Under these circumstances it is with much satisfac- 
tion that I have to report the presence of three species in our 
much-neglected field of carcinographical research. 

These species are, moreover, diagnostically unknown, and I 
propose to describe them under the names of Squilla pectinata, 
S. inornata, and S. subfasciata. They agree in one character, 
namely, that the anterior margin of the penultimate joint of 
the raptorial limb is furnished throughout its whole length 
with close-set comb-like teeth. This character is entirely 
foreign to the genus, though present in Chloridella and some 
species of Lysiosquilla. My S. subfasciata makes some approach 
to Chloridella, but the generic characters are those proper to 
Squilla. 

Following the analytical scheme of Mr. Miers, I have in the 
subjoined schedule brought the three South Australian species 
into correlation with others of the genus. 

A, Exposed thoracic and first five abdominal segments, with 

submedian carine on the dorsal surface. 
1. Penultimate jomt of the raptorial limbs without a 
series of immobile spines. 
11. Penultimate joint of the raptorial limbs with immo- 
bile spines (or denticulations) along its whole length. 
* Armature of penultimate joint spinous, as in 
S. raphidea. 
** Armature of penultimate joint consisting of 
denticles, in addition to the mobile spines. 
1. Dactyli of raptorial limbs armed with 
four spines; antero-lateral angles of 
carapace rounded ty es! S. pectinata 
2. Dactyli of raptorial limbs with six 
spines; antero-lateral angles of carapace 
spinous... ae Ae ase S. inornata 


B. Exposed thoracic and first five abdominal segments with 
the dorsal surface smooth. 
1. Dactyli of raptorial hmbs with six spines; antero- 
lateral angles of carapace spinous. 

1. Penultimate joint of the raptorial limbs 
without immobile spines ... 22 S. fasciata 
2. Penultimate joint of the raptorial limbs : 
margined with close-set denticles ... S. subfasciata 


50 


Squilla pectinata, spec. nov. 


Species name in allusion to the comb-lke front margin of 
the penultimate joint of the raptorial limbs. 


Carapace in the form of a truncated isosceles triangle, with 
the sides nearly straight, and the angles rounded; length, 
1:05, breadth at base, ‘85, breadth at front, ‘5 of an inch; 
smooth, very convex in the middle, with the sulci deep and 
prolonged to the cervical suture. Posterior to the cervical 
suture are two lateral carine on each side. Rostrum semi-oval, 
as long as broad—0:15 of an inch—partially covering the 
ophthalmic segment. The exposed thoracic and the first five 
abdominal segments ornamented with two submedian carine, 
and a lateral carina on each side. The first five abdominal 
segments have in addition two lateral carine inferior to the 
first on each side; the postero-lateral angles spinulate. The 
sixth abdominal segment has two submedian and four lateral 
carine, each terminating in a strong spine. 

The telson has seven acute longitudinal crests and a few sub- 
marginal carunculations, more or less confluent ; the median 
crest terminates in a spine, and the crest on either side of the 
median one has a few spinulose serrations towards the ex- 
tremity. The margin is produced into two submedian triangular 
spines and four lateral spines, the spaces between the sub- 
median and the first lateral spines with about ten strong 
serratures. The basal prolongation of the uropoda is margined 
on the inner side with narrow and acute spines gradually in- 
creasing in length; the inner of its two elongated terminal 
spines is slightly longer, and is notched on its outer margin 
near to the extremity. 

The dactyli of the raptorial limbs have four spines, the ter- 
minal one more than half the length of the dactylus. Penulti- 
mate joint armed on its anterior and superior margin with 
close set comb-like teeth ; there are afew unequal-sized mobile - 
spines in the grooved front of the same joint. The appendages 
to the thoracic limbs are styliform; the lateral processes of 
the first exposed thoracic segment is narrow, straight, and 
acute; those of the following are truncated laterally with 
rounded angles. 


Length of the body, 43 inches ; greatest breadth, 1 inch. 

The colour of the specimens preserved in spirit is pale-horn, 
the coste and margins of the carapace and thoracic and 
abdominal segments dark-coloured. 

Locality.—Port Adelaide Creek and St. Vincent’s Gulf (8. 


Aust. Mus., three specimens) ; Fowler’s Bay (Vrs. 4. Richards, 
one specimen). 


51 


Squilla inornata, spec. nov. 


Species name in allusion to the unornamented telson. 

Carapace with the base much arched, the postero-lateral 
angles rounded and backward produced, sides slightly excavated, 
front margin sinuous, the antero-lateral angles are armed with 
a short spine; median longitudinal diameter, °51, breadth of 
base, ‘4, breadth of front, ‘125 inch. There are three longi- 
tudinal carine, which are interrupted by the distinctly marked 
cervical suture, posterior to which, the median carina is 
bipartite anteriorly and terminates in a spinule. 

Rostrum oblong, a little longer than wide, with the lateral 
margins slightly raised, there is no median ridge; it reaches to 
the base of the ophthalmic segment. 

The exposed thoracic and first six abdominal segments are 
ornamented with six longitudinal carine ; all the carine of the 
fifth and sixth, the laterals of the fourth, and the inferior 
laterals of the third and second abdominal segments terminate 
in spinules; the postero-lateral angles of the first five abdominal 
segments spinulose. 

The telson is smooth on its upper surface, but is provided 
with a median crest ending in a spinule; its margin is pro- 
longed into two submedian spines and two laterals on each 
side. The deep notch between the submedian spines has on 
each side four blunt denticulations; between the submedian 
and superior lateral spines there are eight comb-lke denticu- 
lations. 

The distal prolongation of the basal part of the uropoda is 
armed on the inner edge with minute serratures, and ter- 
minates in two unequal spines, the inner one of which is the 
longer and is armed with a spinule on its outer edge. 

The dactyli of the raptorial limbs have six spines, the 
terminal one half the length of the joimt. The penultimate 
- joint much compressed, its anterior edge denticulated through 
its length; a few mobile spines arise from the marginal groove. 

The appendages to the thoracic limbs are styliform. The 
lateral processes of the exposed segments are bilobate ; the 
anterior lobe of the first of the exposed segments is elongated, 
curved forward, and acute; in those of the second, third, and 
fourth exposed segments the posterior lobe is the larger. 

Length of body, two and a half inches. 

Colour in spirit, greenish-brown. 

Locality—St. Vineent’s Gulf (S. Aust. Mus., two examples.) 

In general appearance S. inornata resembles S. Dufresnii, 
Miers (loc. cit, t. 2, f. 8), but differs in the pectinated 
margin of the penultimate joint of the raptorial limbs, in the 
shape of the rostrum, and in the lateral processes of the ex- 


52 


posed thoracic segments. In this last character our species 
resembles S. nepa. 


Squilla subfasciata, spec. nov. 
Species name to indicate its affinity with S. fasciata. 


Carapace smooth, with a faint lateral carina on each side, 
widening posteriorly ; very convex in the middle, with the sulei 
deep, and produced to the posterior margin; antero-lateral 
angles armed with a spine; postero-lateral angles broadly 
rounded; posterior margin strongly arched. Rostral plate 
truncatedly trigonous, a little longer than broad, reaching to 
the base of the ophthalmic segment. 


The exposed thoracic and the first five abdominal segments 
have their medio-dorsal surfaces convex, smooth, but are faintly 
marked with a lateral carina on each side, whilst the abdominal 
segments have a stronger carina on each side inferior to the 
other. The postero-lateral angle and the inferior carine of 
each abdominal segment end in spinules. On the sixth 
abdominal segment the submedian as well as the lateral carine 
are present and end in spines. 


The telson is much broader than long, and is ornamented 
with a median acute crest, spinous at the end, and about six 
ridges on each side. The margin is prolonged into six acute 
teeth, between which are a number of smaller spiniform teeth. 


The basal prolongation of the uropoda is armed on its inner 
edge with narrow and acute spines gradually increasing in 
length; the inner of its two elongated terminal spines is the 
longer, and armed with an acute tooth on its outer margin. 


The dactyli of the raptorial limbs are six-spined, gradually 
increasing in size. The anterior margin of the penultimate 
joint is pectinated throughout its length, and carries on the 
inferior face a few mobile spines. The appendages of the three 
post-thoracic limbs are linear-spathulate, flat. The first ex- 
posed thoracic segment is not laterally produced, but is armed 
with a spinule on each side; the following segments are suc- 
cessively broader, scarcely laterally produced, and rounded on 
the sides. 


Length of body, two and one-fourth inches; greatest 
breadth, one-fourth inch. Colour in spirit, pale straw. 


Locality —St. Vincent’s Gulf (S. Aust. Mus., one example). 


S. fasciata has much resemblance to Chloridella microph- 
thalma; and differs from S. fasciata only in its pectinated 
penultimate joint of the raptorial limbs, in the arched 
posterior margin of the carapace, and in the truncated apex 
of the rostral plate. 


53 


EXPLANATIONS TO Prats II. 


Fig. 1.—Squzlla subfasciata: a, carapace; b, dactylus and penul- 
timate joint of raptorial limb; ¢, telson; d, basal pro- 
longation of uropoda. 

Fig. 2.—Squilla pectinata: a, carapace; b, dactylus and penul- 
timate joint of raptorial limb; ec, telson and_ sixth 
abdominal segment; d, lateral view of exposed thoracic 
segments. 

Fig. 3.—Squilla inornata: a, dactylus and penultimate joint of 
raptorial mb; 6, telson; ¢, lateral view of exposed 
thoracic segments. 


—— se Ba fot. 


HousE SANITATION. 


By Jonun Hastram. 
{Read June 5, 1883. | 


(Abridged. ] 


The subject of sanitation is one that is exercising the 
thoughts of the professional and scientific world, in the hope 
of discovering the most effectual means to deal with an enemy 
that is still defeating their most careful research. 

In the air of sewers and house drains the products of de- 
composition are variable, arising from both solid and liquid 
excreta, together with house water and other refuse matter 
poured down the sinks, which pass into the sewers. 

Diarrhea and typhoid fever arise from the air of sewers and 
fecal emanations. With regard to the productions of 
diarrhoea from fecal emanations, it appears from observations 
in England that it is intimately connected with temperature, 
and usually commences when the thermometer is persistently 
above 60°, and when there is at the time a scarcity of rainfall. 
T wish to show that it will be in the summer in this climate 
that any defects in the sanitary arrangements of the city will 
assert themselves with the greatest persistency, as heat is one 
of the chief agents in inducing the sewer gas to leave its 
solitude and poison our homes and surroundings. 

The presence of such sewer gas in the air we breathe will be 
an unfailing source of depression and debility, and will be a 
certain source of the spread of typhoid fever. 

During the last ten years the subject of sanitation has been 
discussed in England in all its bearings. The results have 
been varied, but the discussion has established two things. 

First —That when drinking water is contaminated by sewage 
those who drink the water are in danger of suffering from 
typhoid fever, diphtheria, scarlet fever, and other febrile ail- 
ments classed under the term zymotic. 

Second.—That when sewer gas finds its way into a house or 
its surroundings the inmates are in danger of an outbreak of 
such zymotic diseases, not to speak of minor illnesses, the 
connection of which with sewer gas has: been clearly 
established. 

We should, therefore, be inspired with the determination to 
have the best system of house sanitation, together with the 


55 


most efficient ventilation of the sewers, adopted in Adelaide as 
its system of sewerage is being completed. We have the 
advantage of knowing what has been done in England by the 
best engineers; we have the knowledge of the climatic changes 
of the country, and we ought to have a drainage system based 
it may be from English practical experience, but adapted to 
our altered circumstances. 

I am indebted to our esteemed President for the comparison 
of the climatic conditions of Greenwich and Adelaide for the 
year 1880 (vide appendix). I will quote the main points as 
they bear upon our subject :— 


GREENWICH. ADELAIDE. 
The average mean temperature is 49°5 ft ... 63°3 
“ highest reading is We: 87°5 ott ... 1145 
“lowest reading is ee 17°2 adi Lie ere 
** mean daily range is... 15°2 a ere 
‘“* humidity is nos Me 83°0 a ets 70), 
** rainfall is ee ae OG et .. 22°47 


For ten months the mean temperature at Greenwich is under 
60°, whilst in Adelaide only during six months does the same 
temperature prevail. For eight months the highest readings 
at Greenwich vary from 61°4 to 87°5, whilst in Adelaide the 
highest readings vary from 63:2 to 114°5. 

Barometric changes affect the amount of foul air present in 
the sewers. The diminution in barometric pressure leads to 
the escape of gases, which are stored in the interstices of the 
sewage, and favours decomposition. An increase of barometric 
pressure enables sewer air to carry a larger amount of the 
vapour of water, and for the sewage to retain a larger volume 
of the offensive gases due to decomposition or absorption 
without parting with them. Temperature and barometric 
changes are therefore the fruitful agents by which air is 
liberated from sewage, and it is consequently during atmos- 
pheric changes that sewers which appear sweet at other times 
become offensive and noxious. 

Under these conditions, and with the knowledge that in 
England “ preventible disease” caused by drainage is intimately 
connected with temperature, and, as stated, usually commences 
when the thermometer is persistently above 60°, inasmuch 
as then the fecal emanations reach a certain rapidity of evolu- 
tion in consequence of the high temperature, it behoves us to 
examine these figures, which go to prove that in Adelaide the 
decomposing matter will cause the sewer air to be ina constant 
state of evolution, and, therefore, requires the most thorough 
and perfect system of ventilation. I may here say that 
extreme cold will prevent the germ matter from being diffused, 


56 


and, therefore, restrain decomposition ; and this condition may 
be indefinitely prolonged at or below freezing point, but with 
an elevation of temperature the lability to undergo change or 
decomposition immediately returns. Heat above 140° destroys 
the structure of organic poisons, while it otherwise operates 
beneficially by producing expansion and consequent dilution 
of the noxious matter. But under 120° it evolves gaseous 
matter. 

In the ventilators from the sewers to the street level 
in my opinion columns of sewer gas will be formed through 
the various causes within the sewers which are always in opera- 
tions—escapes from which will be determined by the tempera- 
ture and barometric changes; and thus the air of our streets 
will be rendered impure by such emanations, and the body less 
healthy, and, therefore, less capable of resisting disease poisons. 


In the treatment of this subject I propose to consider— 
1st. House drainage in Adelaide as proposed by the late 


Mr. Clark. 

2nd. House drainage in Adelaide, as enforced by regula- 
tions. 

3rd. House drainage in Adelaide, as suggested by the 
author. 


I.—Mr. Criarx’s System. 


The report under date January 14, 1878, by the late Mr. 
Clark distinctly lays down fixed laws, viz., (1) pure air is 
essential to healthy existence; (2) modern instances are 
numerous, testifying to the sanitary influence which pure water 
and efficient drainage have upon the public health; (3) if all 
the filth which is produced be removed at once and completely 
before decomposition can take place, and the malarious gases 
are engendered, the city is in a perfect sanitary condition. 

He then states :—‘‘ The third use of the sewers is the re- 
moval of the water supply after having served its domestic 
purposes, and with it the excrementitious and other matter 
which can be conveyed away in running water. To do this 
perfectly and continuously they must be laid with an inclination 
which shall insure a certain velocity. There must be no stoppage 
or stagnation in the stream from the point of inlet to the outlet. 
If these objects be attained—and they easily can be—it is evident 
that there will be no time for decomposition to engender 
noxious gases in the sewer.” He then recommends for con- 
sideration of the authorities that a plan of the city be made 
with the points where drainage will be required shown on, 
such as sinks, closets, water taps, and stack-pipes. The pos- 
session of such a plan will enable the engineer to lay out in 


57 


detail all public and private drainage with confidence and ac- 
curacy. 

In every system of sewers provision for perfect ventilation 
must be made, as every cubic foot of fluid admitted will dis- 
place a similar quantity of air. If no provision be made for 
escape, the air in the sewer would be under pressure, and tend 
to force its way through every imperfectly trapped inlet which 
may be existing; and should such inlet be within the house, 
the atmosphere thereof would be vitiated. 

The means of ventilating the sewers is by small brick 
chambers placed five or six hundred feet apart, constructed in 
connection with a manhole at or near the centre of street. The 
air in escaping passes through a basket of charcoal, and after- 
wards through an iron grid fixed at the level of street surface, 
the charcoal rendering the air inodorous. A more active venti- 
lation has in some cases been attempted by connecting the 
sewers with a furnace or large chimneys. Undoubtedly a more 
rapid change of the air of the sewers would thus be effected, 
as the draught would be promoted by the heated chimney. If 
any stagnation should occur in the sewers of Adelaide it will 
be due to errors in construction. 

When there are several branches to the house drains it is 
desirable to carry them all to one point into adip trap. if 
this be done, no further trapping at the junction of the house 
drain with the public sewer will be required. A direct com- 
munication from this trap to some convenient wall where a 
ventilating pipe can be fixed is desirable, as it removes all 
chance of pressure within the pipes, and ensures a perfect 
ventilation. If the soil pipe be carried for its full size up to 
the top of the house, and a syphon trap be fixed at its lower 
end, the ventilation of the pipe will be perfect, and the danger 
of gas entering the house reduced to a minimum. 

Such, gentlemen, is the advice the late Mr. Clark gave the 
citizens of Adelaide in his report. 


IIl.—Tuer System EnNFoRCED BY REGULATIONS. 


Under the heading of “ Descriptive Directions’’ the regula- 
tions say :—‘“‘The most important part of a system of deep 
drainage, such as has been carried out in Adelaide, is the estab- 
lishment of connections between the sewers and dwelling- 
houses. Upon the manner in which these connections are 
made, and the care bestowed upon them, will depend in a great 
measure the success or failure of the whole undertaking. If 
the connections are properly made avast benefit will have been 
conferred on the community by the construction of the works, 
and a considerable improvement in the health of the city may 
be expected ; if, however, the connection be improperly made, 


58 


then great injury and inconvenience may result, and the conse- 
quences to the public health may be most serious. At the lower 
end of every house drain what is called a disconnector trap 
will be fixed; this will prevent any passage upwards of any gas 
Jrom the sewer, whilst at the same time it will admit air to the 
drain. At the upper end of every drain a ventilating shaft 
will be placed leading from a second disconnector trap, which 
receives sinkwater and excreta from closets ; and various other 
descriptions are given on the same principle, and in conclusion 
adds:—It is believed that the best method of constructing 
house drains has now been clearly indicated, and if the prin- 
ciples pointed out be faithfully adhered to, Adelaide will 
rejoice in the reputation of being the only city in Australia, 
and one of the few cities of the world, which possesses a perfect 
system of house drainage.” 

In the system adopted by these regulations they are, in my 
opinion, trapped once too much, causing unnecessary outlay on 
the part of householders, and I venture to assert will not be 
effective in their results as a sanitary scheme. Small-bore 
pipes are all very well in calculation; they will dispose of so 
much sewage according to their inclinations, but in practice 
they very soon lose their diameter by furring or corrosion, 
thereby becoming too small to perform their office, however 
carefully they may have been laid. The cases of stoppage at 
the first diseconnector from the sewer have been numerous, and 
there is always liability for such to occur by the very con- 
struction of the trap. It is also designed to prevent the passage 
towards the dwelling of any gas from the sewer, consequently 
we have this noxious sewer gas thrown back into the main 
sewer, and delivered at the street level. 


Il].—Tue System As SUGGESTED BY THE AUTHOR. 


From the various complaints which have been made by the 
citizens, we are aware that sewer gas is generated on the line 
of our sewers, which is felt in the summer to be most objection- 
able, though we are at once met with the statement that this 
will not occur when the system is complete. Even when the 
present system is complete, in my opinion smells will always 
arise at the surface, either in centre of streets or the more 
objectionable part at our boundaries. The ventilation of the 
sewers is undoubtedly insufficient. It is now settled beyond 
doubt that sewer gas will pass water seals in every kind of 
trap, therefore the sewer gas which cannot get away will ina 
few hours normally break the seal at the first disconnector 
trap, and find its way inside the boundary line upwards, par- 
ticularly when the position of the outlet of these traps stands 
higher than the crown of the road. 


59 


Though I may be in advance of professional practice, I 
cannot see why such an obstruction as the boundary trap un- 
doubtedly is should be employed, because the main thing is to 
have no stoppages; the reason being the conveyance of excreta 
and sewage should be immediate, every particle committed to 
the entire ramification of the passages being kept in ceaseless 
motion until it #rrives at the final outlet at the farm. Even 
considering the natural course of ventilation for the sewers, 
these traps are objectionable, as they do not allow that freedom 
of air which is absolutely essential for perfect safety. My 
objections to traps in this position are the uncertainty of their 
being changed by the flush used at one deposit, and the danger 
of their simply becoming small cesspools between the house 
and the sewers. The awkwardness and expense incurred when 
a stoppage occurs must not be overlooked, as the traps are 
fixed at from three to ten feet below the ground level, and also, 
as I have already mentioned, are lable to derangement and 
overflow. 

It is obviously necessary to discharge the sewer gas as far as 
possible out of the respired atmosphere, consequently it is 
wrong in principle to ventilate the sewers into the streets 
alone; therefore I would do away with the first disconnector 
trap, and form a disconnecting chamber between the house and 
the sewers ventilated by a pipe rising above the eaves of build- 
ings, so that the noxious gases may mingle freely with the 
higher strata of the atmosphere and become oxidised by the 
stratified zones of heat and consequent currents that traverse 
and intersect it. The ventilating pipes to house connections 
wouid have to be fully considered in laying out the drainage 
in districts, and not indiscriminately carried six feet above the 
buildings they chanced to be against. The gratings in the 
streets would then perform their true functions—that of being 
the inlet of fresh air, and by a free course being provided to 
the outlet there would not be any foul gases left in the sewers. 
Under some conditions of the temperature the action will be 
reversed, and whichever way the air flows we get nearer to 
uniformity, and consequently arrive at natural laws. No ven- 
tilating pipes from the drain to surface of ground should be 
allowed within the boundary of property, as the varying dis- 
tribution of heat in the system of sewers and the relative 
temperature of the external atmosphere will inevitably cause 
an escape of sewer gas. For the same reason no ventilating 
pipe should be allowed to deliver at the surface in confined 
rights-of-way or narrow streets. In the former case the ver- 
tical ventilating pipe from the chamber would be sufficient to 
prevent their becoming foul, assisted by the ventilating pipe in 
connection with the pan, and in the latter cases efficient means 
should be taken at the head of the pipes for ventilation. 


60 


The excreta from soil pipes in connection with water-closets 
should be delivered by easy bends into the house drains leading 
to this disconnecting chamber. The top part of these pipes 
should be carried up to the highest point of roofs for additional 
ventilation, each watercloset basin having its own trap, which 
ought in all cases to be provided with an air pipe to prevent 
syphonage. Then there would be no danger of undue pressure, 
as the means of its escape is already otherwise provided for in 
the main ventilator. 

The waste-pipes from baths, lavatories, sinks, &c., should be 
delivered on to a small syphon or other approved trap—the 
outlets being free to the air above the surface of ground. No 
sewer gas can then penetrate in their direction. All traps 
should be of the simplest character, and on no account should 
one be used which is not self-cleansing with a good flush of 
water. All house drains should be brought to the disconnecting 
chamber, and the soil pipes kept distinct from slop-water pipes 
up to this point. 

I would point out that however good the general sewerage 
may be, unless the drainage proper of the houses and their 
connections with the sewers are carefully planned, well 
executed, and maintained in proper order, there is danger of 
typhoid fever and other diseases. No trade is so important to 
the public health as that of the plumber. The more thoroughly 
householders will study and look into the sanitary arrange- 
ments of their houses the more obligation will be laid upon 
architects to see that sanitary work is well provided for in the 
buildings they design, and display as much care in seeing to 
the drains as to the more ornate parts of the structure. Badly 
constructed houses will be a burden to their owners, and as the 
house is an important factor in the longevity of its inhabitants, 
it becomes a matter of the utmost consideration to every one 
what sort of a house they hve in. Therefore, no time or ex- 
pense is wasted that is fairly expended in examining into 
every minute detail connected with its sanitary condition. 
People do not realise, even if they have read or have been told, 
that the laws which bring sewer gas into houses when certain 
physical conditions are fulfilled are inevitable, unless such 
precautions are adopted to secure immunity from their presence. 
The public do not yet realise that the presence of sewer gas 
in the air they breathe, especially in that of summer nights, 
when the powers of the body to resist noxious influences are 
at a low ebb, is certain to produce illness. In other countries 
this subject is receiving all the attention the most scientific 
minds can give to it, with a view of arriving at the most 
perfect system, and I do not see why South Australia may not 
take its place in the van of progress. 


61 


APPENDIX. 


ComMpaRISon OF CLIMATE AT GREENWICH AND ADELAIDE. 


GREENWICH, 1880. 


-| Mean : Mean 

Months, 1880. temper- eee Pitt daily 

rature. johns 4 Riaek aha range. 
° ° ° ° 
January. e-| 33°3 54:1 17:2 9°6 
February . w [pp Bed 54°9 23°0 11:4 
March oo| 44:2 61:4 27°4 16:2 
April er We: Fa 66°9 34:8 16:0 
May ays F 52°6 87°5 S175 21°8 
June ‘ . 57°5 80:2 37°5 18°6 
July aa . 61°6 194 475 1971 
August 5 a 62°8 80°9 46-4 yg 
September .. oe eas LIST 87°2 43-2 17°5 
October .. .. 46°4 66°3 29-2 13:1 
November .. .| 42:8 57°5 25°0 11-9 
December .. tts ghey al ee 26°7 98 
Year 1880 .. 49°5 87°5 17°2 15:2 
| 
ADELAIDE, 1880. 
O° ° Oo ° 

January sf. (o'O 114°5 51:0 27:0 
February yult  eeee. AOE 53°0 24:0 
March ars fini (1s (or ek! 5705, 50°5 18°9 
April --| 63°5 82-0 47:0 15°7 
May welts 80°0 72°0 42-0 15:2 
June --| 53°8 65:0 41°6 LES 
July : 50°7 63:2 35:0 14:7 
August td : 55°3 71:5 41:0 1671 
September .. F 56°6 76°5 38°9 16-1 
October : ’ 59°8 82°5 43:0 19°3 
November .. = 64:1 91:0 44-2 21°7 
December .. 71:4 108-0 48-0 25°9 
Year 1880 .. 63°3 | 1145 35°0 18°9 


Hum- | Rainfall 
idity. in 


°/. | inches. 


— | 


86 0-261 
88 2°357 
82 0-595 
80 2°205 
70 0-497 
81 2°257 
80 3°812 
83 0-978 
85 4-002 
90 7°653 
85 2-060 
89 3°005 
83 29°682 
37 0-760 
44 0°635 
55 2°645 
63 3°190 
71 1613 
78 3°078 
76 2°197 
66 2°916 
68 2°158 
60 2-060 
55 0-807 
43 0:420 
57 22°479 


62 


Discussion. 


The PresIpENT, in asking the Fellows to express their views 
of the subject on which the paper had just been read, said 
there could be no more important question than that of drain- 
age. The works at present being carried on in Adelaide were . 
very extensive, and it would be very disappointing if they were 
not a success. He thought that the smells from the street- 
gratings were often very disagreeable, and he had noticed that 
they were worse in summer than in winter. He accounted for 
this by the greater difference of temperature that existed in 
the hot weather ; this would cause a suction action out of the 
drain in proportion as the street air became more rarified by 
the heat. He thought the law of the diffusion of gases would 
also exert a considerable influence. 


Hon. AttaAn CampBELL remarked that by the plan carried 
out in the formation of the deep drains in Adelaide there could 
be no storage of sewage anywhere in the system, and conse- 
quently no sewer gas could be formed. He thought that there 
was a good deal of misapprehension on the part of the public 
as to the nature of sewer gas and of sewer air. The former 
could only result from decomposing sewage; the latter was 
simply stagnant or foul air, such as would be noticed in any 
space that had been shut up for any length of time. In the 
system of deep drainage they were now considering the only 
outlet for the sewer air was at the street gratings. The chief 
factor in causing motion or a current in air was, in his opinion, 
variations of temperature. He thought that there was a 
greater stagnation in the air of the drains in summer than in 
winter owing to the temperature of the outside air being then 
higher, and therefore lighter, than the sewer air, and hence 
there would be no tendency for the formation of a current of 
air into the sewer through the street grating. In winter, on 
the contrary, the street air being colder, and therefore heavier 
than the sewer air, there would be a greater tendency for air to 
enter the drain. The first important point in any system of 
drainage was to isolate the interior of the houses from any 
chance of becoming contaminated by the sewer air. He thought 
that the plan adopted by the South Australian Government 
was a very effectual method of trapping, and ought to secure 
the end desired. The second great desideratum was to have a 
free outlet for the escape of the sewer air at some elevation. 
This alone would not always ensure a proper ventilation of 
the drain; and to effect this it might be necessary to place 
cowls on the ventilating pipes to overcome the stagnation. 
The tendency to stagnation would not always be equally great, 
as, for instance, in winter. In reply to an opinion that a high 


63 


temperature of the outside air would be sufficient to cause a 
current of air from street gratings, he said that it seemed 
to him quite clear that the summer air being so much 
lighter could not fail to replace the cooler or heavier sewer 
air, whilst n winter the case would be reversed, for the sewer 
air would then be the warmer. There was no doubt that the 
tendency for gases to mix and become diffused was an impor- 
tant consideration, but he thought that in such a ease as ven- 
tilating a large system of drains its action would be too slow 
to be of much practical utility, something much prompter and 
more effectual being required. 

Mr. Parker, C.E., thought that the deep drainage system 
in Adelaide was at present illusory, because so few of the 
closets were connected with it. To make it of any use, con- 
nections should be made complete. He condemned the 
plan suggested by Mr. Haslam of bringing the sewer air 
nearer to the house. The great danger in all cases was the 
sewer emanations entering the house. With respect to the 
proposal to take the sewer air by ventilating pipes to the 
eaves of the houses, or even five or six feet above them, 
was, he thought, also very objectionable, for there would bea 
fear of its falling and entering by the bedroom windows, &e. 
He thought that the present plan of allowing the air to escape 
at the-street gratings was much safer, as there was a greater 
chance of its becoming diffused. Before, however, the matter 
could be fully discussed it would be necessary to collect more 
data. The size of the sewer pipes was said to be small. To- 
wards evening they would be nearly full of sewage. This 
would cause a displacement of the air, and serve as a means of 
ventilating or removing the sewer air daily. It would be 
necessary to ascertain the relative differences of temperature 
inside and outside of the sewers, and also as to the direction 
of the currents of air at the outlets at the street gratings, 
before the question as to the best method of ventilating the 
sewers could be profitably discussed. 

Mr. Rurr, C.E., pointed out that all the outlets at the street 
sratings were not at the same level, hence this would cause a 
current of air to pass sometimes from an upper level to a lower 
and vice versa. It would be necessary to place cowls on the 
ventilating pipes if they were to produce any effect in causing 
a ventilation of the drains. 

Mr. Portirzer, C.E., advocated strongly the plan of flushing 
drains. He thought that the climatic conditions in Adelaide 
were highly favourable to the successful carrying out of a 
system of drainage such as he advocated. It would not only 
carry off all the refuse, but also sweep out all the sewer air. 
He said that the system of flushing had been found eminently 


64 


satisfactory, whereas as regards the disconnected trap system 
there is no experience to warrant its utility. He thought the 
pneumatic suction method was also a very satisfactory one. 
He would recommend that both be tried. 

Mr. Brack, C.E., agreed with Mr. Rutt as to the effect of 
the difference between the different street levels. He pointed 
out that Mr. Haslam’s plan necessitated two ventilating pipes. 
The objection to the disconnected traps was that they collected 
refuse. He thought smells were often very useful in drawing 
attention to defects or accumulations of sewage, and that they 
were not in themselves necessarily injurious. 

Mr. Macarey, M.B., thought that the hot weather was not 
the most unhealthy period of the year, notwithstanding that it 
might interfere with the ventilation of the sewers. It is 
impossible to say yet what effect the deep drainage will have 
on the public health, owing to the very imperfect system exist- 
ing of allowing it to be optional whether a house should be 
connected or not. To make the drainage system of any use, 
connection should be compulsory. At present typhoid fever 
was quite as prevalent in the suburbs as in the city, and it 
seemed to be worse as one got nearer the hills. In fact, it was 
all over the country. He thought that there was a great deal 
of unnecessary alarm in the public mind respecting the deep 
drainage and the public health. 

Hon. Annan Camppett differed from Mr. Magarey. He 
thought that the first cases of typhoid fever were in January. 
He suggested that Mr. Magarey should give the Society a 
paper on the origin of typhoid fever. He agreed with Mr. 
Parker as to the desirability of having more accurate data at 
command; but he could not see how they would affect the 
action of a natural law, such as that a heavier stratum of air 
could not le above a lighter one, without there being a ten- 
dency for a mutual displacement taking place. With respect 
to the sewer air falling down from the ventilating pipe, he 
thought the chances were quite as great of its rising to the 
bed-room windows from the street-gratings. He would insist 
again upon the absolute necessity for there being a proper 
system of thorough ventilation in the drains ; there should he 
no smells, and decomposition should be impossible. 

Hon. G. W. Corron asked if there were sufficient data for 
ascertaining in what direction sewer air would go. This should 
be ascertained before more money was spent. 

Mr. Hastam, in making a few remarks in reply, said that 
the great thing was to have a free circulation of air in the 
drains. He expressed his willingness to confer with the others 
on the subject at any future time. 


65 


BoTANICAL NOTES RELATING TO SOUTH 
AUSTRALIA. 


By J. G. O. Tepper, F.L.S., Corr. Member. 


1. New Locaniries oF RaRE PHANEROGAMOUS PLANTS. 
[Read February 6, 1883.) 


Ixiolena supina, /v. WM. Granite Island, Encounter Bay. 

Eriostemon sediflorus, #. v. MZ. Murray Scrub, near Swanport. 

Acacia rhigiophylla, Fv. M@ Murray Scrub. ‘By me dis- 
covered and named in 1848, but since then not again ob- 
tained,” F. v. M., zn litteris. 

Bertya Mitchelli, J. Mueller. Port Victor, Encounter Bay. 

Dodonea hexandra, F. v. WM. Murray Scrub and Port Victor. 

Microtis atrata, Lindley. Square Waterhole. 

Selaginella Preissiana. Near Clarendon. 

Cladium Radula, 2. Br. Among heathy or scrubby vegetation 
near the watershed on the ranges between the Meadows 
and Macclesfield. It is here only twelve to sixteen inches 
high, growing in numerous small tufts. 

Alopecurus geniculatus, Zinn. Rare in a moist gully between 
Clarendon and Kangarilla. 

Mitrasaeme distylis, Mv. WZ. Collected in October, 1882, on 
the scrubby flat at the foot of Mount Saddlebags, near 
Kangarilla, in moist spots sheltered by shrubs. 

2, List or Atnce anp LicuEens CoLuEctep at NEw 
Locanities 1n SourH AUSTRALIA. 


(Read March 6, 1883.] 


The specimens which have served for specific identification 
were transmitted to Baron Sir F. von Mueller, and by him to 
the following specialists :—The Alge, to Professor J. Agardh ; 
and the Lichens, to Prof... Mueller, from whom the subjoined 
names have been received through the same channel :-— 


ALGH. 

Zonaria variegata, Mart. Encounter Bay. 
Sphacelaria paniculata, Igb. Hallett’ 8 Cove, St. V incent’ s Gulf. 
Cystophora spartioides, J. Ag. 
Halophlegma Preissu, Sond. “k 
Thamnoclonium codioides, J. Aq. iu ee 
Erythroclonium Sonderi, Harvey. “ = 

E 


66 


Areschougia Laurencia, Hook. and Harv. Hallett’s Cove, St. 
Vincent’s Gulf. 

le ag divaricata, J. Ag. THallett’s Cove, St. Vincent’s 
Gulf. 

Plocamium nidificum, Harv. Hallett’s Cove, St. Vincent’s Gulf. 
Mertensii, Grev. . a 
angustum, J. Ag. 5 ss 

Phacelocarpus sessilis, Harv. Encounter Bay. 

Nitophyllum Curdieanum, Harv. - 

Galaxaura marginata, Lamour. Hallett’s Cove. 

Gelidium corneum, Grev. + 


Soliera chordalis, J. Ag. i 
Rhabdonia dendroides, Harv. * 
Laurencia Forsteri, Grev. a: 
Asparagopsis Sandfordiana, Harv. i 
Pollexfenia ciliaris, J. Ag., n. sp. ‘ 
Dasya Gunniana, Harv. Hallett’s Cove. 
eallithamnion, Harv. 3 
Wrangelioides, Harv. 7 


ce 


Caulerpa hypnoides, &. Brown. 
Letterstedtia australis 
Fauchea, sp. 


c¢ 


cé 


LIcHENS. 


Heterodea Muelleri, Nylander; Lichina confinis, dgardh; and 
Cladonia verticillata, Floerke. Clarendon. 


8 AppriTIons TO THE List oF AUSTRALIAN AND SOUTH 
AUSTRALIAN FUNGI. 


[Read May 1, 1883.] 


The species herein enumerated were collected by me in the 
neighbourhood of Clarendon mostly during the latter part of 
last year, and, accompanied by pencil sketches from fresh 
plants, were sent to Baron Sir Ferd. v. Mueller, who has now 
forwarded the list of such as have been identified by European 
specialists, requesting me to report the novelties to this Society. 
To ascertain them, I compared those in my hsts with the 
census of Australian fungi, published in 1889 by Dr. M. C. 
Cooke under the title ‘ Fungi Australiani,” which, with some 
addenda issued in 1881, is, 1 believe, the latest work on the 
subject. Accordingly, the terms “ New for South Australia” 
mean that the respective fungi are not so recorded in the pub- 
lications mentioned. There are eighteen species to be men- 
tioned, eight of which are unrecorded for Australia, though 
occurring elsewhere, and ten have hitherto not been known to 
occur in this province. 


10. 
iam 


12. 


67 


HYMENOMYCETES. 


. AGARICUS (PSATYRELLA) squamosus, Fries. Species not 


recorded for Australia. Locality—Clarendon, 24-9-’82, 
on moist, moss-covered ground; moderately large, being 
3 inches high, and the diameter of pileus, 1} inch. 


. Potyporvus (Mesopus) opnecrans, Berkeley. Species not 


recorded for South Australia. Locality—Scott’s Creek, 
near Clarendon; on moist, black soil; resembling a 
mushroom somewhat in form. 15-10-’82. 


. Potyporus (RESUPINARIA) VULGARIS, Fries. Species new 


for South Australia. Locality—Jupiter Creek; on 
charred, wet logs of Eucalyptus obliqua. 7-8-’82. 


. Ponyrorus (?) conrrauus, Fries. Species not recorded for 


Australia. Locality—Hills west of Clarendon ; in thin 
sheet-like patches on the sawn surface of a dry log of 
Eucalyptus leucorylon. 12-’82. 


. STEREUM ELEGANS, Fries. Species recorded from all Aus- 


tralian colonies except South Australia. Locality— 
Jupiter Creek, 7-8-’82; on much decayed wet bark of 
Eucalyptus obliqua. 


. STEREUM sPADICEUM, Fires. Species new for South Aus- 


tralia, but recorded from the same localities as the pre- 
ceding ones. Locality—Clarendon; on small dead and 
decayed branches of Hucalyptus leucoxylon. 9-9-'82. 


. STEREUM sULFURATUM, Fries. Species not recorded for 


Australia. Locality—Mount Bold, 18-8-’82; on decay- 
ing trunk of Hucalyptus obliqua. 


. TREMELLA ALBIDA, Hudson. New for South Australia. 


Locality—Clarendon. 


. TREMELLA CINNABRINA, Berkeley. Species not recorded for 


Australia. Locality — Kangarilla, 29-7-’82 ; growing 
from fissures of recently-felled timber of Eucalyptus 
rostrata. 

DacroMYcEs sreLLaTus, Wees. Species not recorded for 
Australia. | 

Inxgopicryon, sp. The genus with one species, I. gracile, 
is recorded for all Australian colonies except South Aus- 
tralia and Queensland. Locality—Among moss, banks 
of River Onkaparinga, near Clarendon, 10-9-’82; it is a 
small, delicate, branching fungus, of fleshy-grey colour, 
about 14 inch high. 

Secorium, sp. The genus new for South Australia, and 
only recorded with two species from West Australia. 
Loeality, Jupiter Creek, in moist, black soil. A stem- 
less, ovate body, buried almost entirely in the ground; 
hard, solid, covered with profuse slimy mucilage, and 


13. 


14. 


18. 


68 


orange-yellow colour. Only one specimen was seen. 
7-8-’82. 

Furieo vartans, Rastof. Genus and species only recorded 
for Tasmania. Locality, ridge of hills north of and near 
Almanda Mine, Scott’s Creek, in a hollow cut by the axe 
in a living tree of Eucalyptus obliqua. A white, soft, 
spongy fungus of indeterminate form, producing a great 
number of black spores. Only one specimen noticed. 
18-2-’82. 

ToRULA PrrvopHIna, Fries. The genus with a different 

-species, 7. herbarum, recorded for Queensland only ; 
thus the genus appears new for South Australia, and the 
species for Australia. Locality, the seaward incline of 
the hills west of Clarendon, on the bark of living, 
dwarfed trees of Hucalyptus odorata, 9-9-’82 ; colour in- 
tensely black, in small patches of indefinite shape. 

RHINOTRICHIUM RAMOSISSIMUM, Berk. and Cooke. The 
genus appears new for South Australia, and the species 
for Australia. Locality, bank of River Onkaparinga, 
near Mount Bold, 20-9-’82, among shrubs. Form com- 
pressed, spherical, regular, 25 x 13 inches, colour 
brownish-grey, with numerous depressed labyrinthine 
reticulations over the whole surface. 


. PEZIZA BADIOBERBIS, Berkeley. Species not recorded for 


Australia. Locality, hillsides Mount Bold, 20-9-’82, on 
the ground, forming small, shallow, scarlet-coloured 
cups. 


. XYBARIA, sp. Genus not recorded for South Australia. 


Locality, Clarendon, 21-10-’82, on the broken surface of 
the stump of decaying fencing, sheltered by tall, thick 
grass. Branching, woody, 13-inch high; rare. 

Poronta puncTAvTA, Fries. Locality, hillsides Clarendon, 
6-8-’82, on horse droppings. Small, hard, whitish fungus, 
with a few black pores scattered over the surface. 


69 


NOTES ON SOME RARE BIRDS COLLECTED IN 
THE NEIGHBOURHOOD OF MOUNTS COMPASS 
AND JAGGED. 


By F. W. Anprews, Corr. Member. 
[Read October 2, 1883.] 


An albino variety of the common and well-known Honey- 
bird (Meliornis Nove-Hollandie). 

The belts of Banksias growing in this district are the 
favourite retreats of the Honey-bird, which is also called the 
“ Whisker-bird,” and here they are always to be found. They 
also live and breed in the gardens and outlying country about 
Burnside, and are well-known visitors in gardens. Their food 
consists of honey and occasionally small insects, especially 
aphides, and may often be seen flying in the air chasing a small 
moth or butterfly. They make a very compact cup-shaped nest 
of bark or other suitable material, lining it with the velvety 
covering of the honeysuckle-cone when this is dry and ripe. 
They usually lay four eggs of a pinkish-white colour, blotched 
with pinkish-brown spots, but the colours and markings vary 
considerably. From authentic information I received, it ap- 
peared that three albinos were hatched in one nest. They kept 
together for a long time, when one of them got chased and 
killed by some young men who were road making. The second 
I shot about one mile south from the Square Water Hole on 
the road to Mount Jagged. The third made off after losing its 
mate, und was not afterwards seen. One peculiarity of this 
specimen is that its eyes are white, like the ordinary Honey- 
bird, and not pink as in most albinos. I found it much 
wilder than the common ones, and followed this one from bush 
to bush for a long time; it always concealed itself in the 
thickest part of the foliage, but kept up a continual chattering, 
which was a good guide as to its whereabouts. At last it flew 
some distance away into a thick clump of low mallee bushes 
situated in the middle of a small plain. On arriving at the 
spot and going down on one knee, I waited a short time to re- 
cover my breath, and then commenced chirruping with my fore 
finger and lips. I shortly saw it rising from branch to 
branch, until at last it alighted on the topmost twig. Being 
all ready, I shot it at once, before it had time to satisfy its 
curiosity respecting the chirping. When flying about in the 
scrub it presented a most attractive appearance, and on a care- 


70 


ful examination of the body after skinning it I found it to be 
a full-grown adult male. It was in this district that I shot an 
albino emu-wren some years ago. 


Lichmera Nove-Hollandie. 


I wish to introduce to your notice a bird that at first sight 
in the bush much resembles the Meliornis, but is much scarcer, 
and frequents higher timber for its food, which consists of 
honey and insects. This pretty bird is the “Butterfly-bird” of 
the boys in the district where it is found, and is so-called from 
the horseshoe-like markings on its breast, giving the front of 
the bird the appearance of a butterfly. 

I have always found it very local in its habitat, its principal 
haunt being Mount Compass and the deep rocky, thickly-timbered 
cullies running into the neighbouring ranges. It has a loud bold 
song, consisting in the male bird of a variety of up and down calls, 
then a low plaintive song, and then its challenge-lke whistle 
again. The bird may easily be heard a mile off on a fine still 
day. The female is seldom seen except about the pairing time, 
and specimens of it are difficult to procure. But when the 
breeding season approaches, the hen bird secretes herself in 
some low bush and warbles out such a lovely song, so long and 
varied in its melodious tones, that the idea of there being no 
song birds in Australia is at once dispelled. Popular impres- 
sions are often far from the truth, and in regard to this matter 
especially so. I could enumerate several birds having a most 
pleasing song; I may instance the Redthroat (Pyrrhalemus 
brunneus), a small bird found at the Gawler Ranges, Cooper’s 
Creek and other outlying places. This little bird has a sweet 
little song much hke a linnet’s. Another curious and interest- 
ing songster to be heard on a warm evening about swampy 
country, such as the Square Waterhole, is the Ground Parrot 
(Pezoporus formosus). I say zs to be heard, but I may almost 
say was, for the domesticated cats, that have become wild and ~ 
are now very numerous, have, as it appears, nearly exterminated 
them in their old retreats. The song of this parrot consists of 
a perfect octave, given out in very beautiful sweet notes. I 
was a long time before I could find out what bird it was, and 
had to shoot one singing in the twilight to be sure of its 
identity. 

Petroica phoenicea. 


The flame-breasted Robin is a yearly visitor to the Square 
Waterhole district. Being a very wet season this year they 
arrived early, and were first seen on the 25th of April, or about a 
month before their usual time. The South-East and the swampy 
parts of South Australia are their principal habitats. In New 
South Wales they are not so numerous. After their arrival, 


71 


wnich occurs in a flock, they commence to pair and make a 
cup-shaped nest in a hole in a tree, rock or other similar 
situation. The nest is made of bark lined with wool, &c. They 
lay four greenish-white eggs freckled with purple and chesnut- 
brown, but no two eggs are quite alike. The male bird soon 
gets very shy and difficult to obtain, hiding himself in the 
swampy places, where, standing on a clod or stick, he presents 
a handsome picture—the female the while sitting close about 
the collector and singing a pretty twittering song. The 
common Robin may be said to be quite arboreal in its habits, 
but the bird under notice is quite the reverse, and delights in 
wet flats with plenty of dead timber on which to perch and 
show himself off. The peculiar feature in the habits of these 
birds is that when they have reared their young, say in six or 
eight weeks after their arrival, they make off again and are 
seen no more until the following season. Whither do they 
go? 


A CATALOGUE OF SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MINERALS. 


By T. C. Croup, Assoc. Roy. Sch. of Mines, F.C.S., F.LC., 
Corr. Member. 


[Read September 4, 1833.]} 


In contributing the following catalogue of South Australian 
minerals I have thought it desirable to offer the ensuing re- 
marks in order that a just estimate may be formed of the 
trustworthiness of the determinations and of the accuracy of 
the list of localities given. 

When not otherwise mentioned the determinations have been 
made by myself after a proper physical and chemical examina- 
tion of the specimens. The correctness of the localities of 
such minerals as have been determined by myself rests for the 
most part merely upon the testimony of those who have kindly 
furnished the specimens, but I have every reason to believe 
this testimony to be substantially reliable. 

The determinations of competent observers have been em- 
bodied in this catalogue, and in this connection I would desire 
to acknowledge my indebtedness to Professor Tate, and to the 
various papers by Messrs. A. R. C. Selwyn and Geo. H. F. 
Ulrich, bearing upon the geology and mineralogy of the colony. 
T am also largely indebted to a little work published in 1846, 
entitled “Remarks on the Geology and Mineralogy of South 
Australia,” by Thomas Burr, Esq., Deputy Surveyor-General, 
wherein a considerable number of species and localities are 
mentioned; and although a few of the species named in the 
appendix require confirmation, | have deemed it advisable to 
mention them—if for no other object than that of calling the 
attention of those interested in the matter to the necessity of 
seeking in the localities indicated for these species, with the 
view of having them authoritatively re-determined. 

With regard to the order in which the species are placed in 
this catalogue, I have not thought it desirable to adopt a 
strictly scientific arrangement, as I consider this list of 
minerals to form merely a preliminary attempt at cataloguing 
the species which occur in the colony. At present whole 
families are unrepresented ; further research, however, will 
doubtless result in the addition of at least some members to 
these divisions, and a more strictly scientific arrangement will 
then be practicable. 


73 


In the meantime I have thought it sufficient to arrange them 
under two general heads, as (A) the so-called non-metallic, and 
(B) the metallic minerals; the former (a) being sub-divided 
into carbon, salts of the alkalies, alkaline earths, and alumina, 
and the anhydrous and hydrous silicates; and the latter (B) 
into divisions corresponding with their chief metallic con- 
stituent. It is hoped that this list of minerals will serve as a 
starting point, and that contributions in the forms of fresh 
determinations and new localities may form a not unimportant 
item in the future transactions of the Society, in which 
interesting work I trust to be able to personally participate. 
The nomenclature employed is that adopted by Dana in his 
“Descriptive Mineralogy.”’ 


NON-METALLIC MINERALS. 
CARBON. 


DIAMOND. 


As far as J am aware the only locality in which this gem has 
been found is Echunga. The largest example, the property of 
the South Australian Government, is of a sherry-yellow colour, 
and weighed before cutting 5} carats, its present weight being 
227 carats. It is cut in the form of a brilliant. A second 
specimen (also the property of the Government), somewhat 
lighter in colour than the foregoing, weighed before cutting 
dy carats, the cutting reducing its weight to 143 carats. Two 
very good specimens, illustrating the crystalline form of the 
diamond, are to be noted—one weighing 1} carats, and ex- 
hibiting the planes of the hexakis-octahedron, and the other 
weighing +3 carats, and presenting the form of the triakis- 
octahedron. 


GRAPHITE. 


This mineral occurs at Warrow, County Flinders, and at one 
or two localities on the west coast of Spencer Gulf. It has 
also been found at Mount Charles (G. Francis) and Mount 
Torrens (C. Thomas). Burr mentions it as occurring in the 
Belvidere Range, and about 23 miles north-east of Adelaide. 


SULPHUR. 


This mineral occurs in a specimen of pyrite associated with 
quartz from Echunga (the specimen is in the collection of the 
South Australian Institute). Burr mentions its occurrence 
near the Montacute copper mine, enclosed in veins of quartz 
with pyrite. A deposit formed round the mound-springs at 
Strangways Springs has frequently been reported to be 
sulphur. It is, however, chiefly salt coloured yellow by a basic 
salt of iron. 


74 


SALTS OF THE ALKALIES, ALKALINE EARTHS, AND ALUMINA. 
Harrre (Common Salt). 


This mineral occurs in beds near and on the shores of the 
various salt lakes of the colony, and Tate reports it in the form 
of an efflorescence on the faces of the cliffs of the River 
Murray. 

Barite (Barytes—Heavy Spar) 


Occurs at the Wheal Coglin Mine, Rapid Bay; at Apoinga; 
also at the Burra Burra, Great Gladstone, and Rhondda Mines. 
Selwyn reports its occurrence at the Emu Flat Copper Mine, 
and Ulrich at the Blinman Mine. 


CELESTITE (Celestine). 


I have met with this mineral in the form of radiated erystal- 
line nodules in a bed of clay, Hundred of Wallaroo. 


GYPSUM. 


The crystallised variety of this mineral (Selenite) is fre- 
quently met with in the form of isolated lenticular-shaped 
erystals imbedded in the mud of the salt lakes, notably those 
of Southern Yorke Peninsula. It is also found massive in the 
salt lakes. Gypsum also occurs in the following localities :— 
Wallaroo Mine, Hummocks Range, Kanyaka, Kapunda; near 
Point Riley, Yorke Peninsula; on the Wirryalpa Run, 
Central Australia; and fine specimens of the fibrous variety 
(Satin Spar) occur in the Stuart Range, Central Australia. 
Professor Tate reports its occurrence at the Lady Alice Mine 
and cliffs of the River Murray, and with red ochre near the 
springs at the Peake, Central Australia; also in a curious rock- 
form composed of slightly coherent grains on the north-eastern 
shore of Lake Alexandrina. Ulrich noticed it in the form of 
veins at the Beltana Mine, and Burr mentions it as occurring 
at Brighton. 


CALCITE. 


This mineral, in one or other of its numerous rock forms, is of 
very common occurrence in the colony, although good crystallised 
specimens are not as frequent as might be expected. Finely 
crystallised specimens have, however, been obtained from the 
Wallaroo Mines. The most noticeable of these are in the 
form of six-sided prismatic crystals, formed by a very acute 
rhombohedron, terminated by an obtuse rhombohedron of the 
opposite sign; another form, which is almost unique, being a 
triangular prism with a rhombohedral termination. A very flat 
lenticular form is also found. It also occurs coarsely crystal- 
line and milk-white with the copper ore in the above-men- 
tioned and neighbouring mines. 


75 


The Iceland spar variety occurs at Angaston, as do also 
various coloured marbles. Ordinary marble at Kapunda, and 
in thin veins in the metamorphic rocks near Franklin Harbour. 
Calcite also occurs at the Yudanamutana Mine. Ulrich re- 
ports white calcite, generally imperfectly crystallised, at the 
Blinman Mine. Tate reports it between Mounts Parry and 
Playfair, Central Australia; in the stalactitic form at Cape 
Jervis ; massive and in scalenohedrons at New Mecklenburg, 
near Lyndoch; and also states that it occurs in the quartz 
veins in the metamorphic rocks in the neighbourhood of the 
Peak, and as a cellular calcareous tufa forming the top crust 
of the Mound Springs of the same neighbourhood. Calcite 
also occurs at the following localities :—Mount Crawford, Ard- 
rossan, Rapid Bay, Mount Gambier, Point Curtis, Macclesfield, 
and at Mattawarrangala, in largely crystalline masses. 

Tate has described a nearly black, largely crystalline calcite 
(the colour due to finely divided carbonaceous matter) occupy- 
ing a vein in a dark-coloured slate at Whyte-Yarcowie. 

Burr mentions these additional localities for this species :— 
Barossa, Flinders, and Mount Lofty Ranges; in the form of 
calcareous tufa at Flinders and Barossa Ranges, Depét Creek, 
near Mount Arden; at Rapid Bay, Crystal Brook, and Rivoli 
Bay; also on the plains near Mount Hawdon. 


ARAGONITE 


Occurs associated with native copper and chalcocite at the 
Wallaroo Mines; in the form of. long prismatic crystals at 
Armagh, near Clare; and, according to Ulrich, at the Blinman 
and Oratunga Mines. 


DoLoMiTE. 


Selwyn mentions this species as occurring at Victoria Creek, 
Wilhamstown, (the variety is not stated), and J. E. T. Woods 
has noticed it in the limestones of Mount Gambier. Burr 
mentions the following localities:—Belvidere Range, Barossa 
Range, Rapid Bay, and near Mount Barker. Pearl spar at 
Rapid Bay and north-east of Adelaide. I have found it as a 
pseudomorph in a specimen from Central Australia. 


Fruorire (fluor Spar). 

This mineral was found massive in considerable quantity at 
the Paramatta Mine, Yorke Peninsula—the colour varying 
from colourless to sea-green. The purple-coloured mineral 
occurs in small quantity at the Moonta Mine. Professor Tate 
mentions it as follows:—In silicious limestone of the Pre- 
Silurian age, at Field River, between Reynella and the coast, 
and in Lower Silurian limestone at Parara, near Ardrossan, 
Yorke Peninsula—the blue variety having been discovered in 


76 


both eases. Burr alludes to its occurrence in the form of 
cubical crystals at the Kapunda Mine. 


APATITE. 


This mineral occurs at the Wallaroo Mine, where it was 
mistaken for fluorite, and I have also met with it amongst the 
copper ore from the Kurilla Mine. A specimen obtained from 
the Wallaroo Mine (about one inch in diameter) was of the 
characteristic sea-green colour, and exhibited the planes of the 
hexagonal prism ; the greater portion of the pyramidal planes 
were, however, destroyed. Specimens from the Kurilla Mine 
were in the form of isolated crystals embedded in yellow 
copper ore; the crystals were of a greenish-grey colour, 
exhibiting the planes of the hexagonal prism and pyraraid, 
together with the terminal plane of the former. These crystals 
were about a quarter of an inch long. The chemical, blowpipe 
and physical characters are those of the mineral apatite. 


MAGNESITE 

Occurs in the Flinders Range near Port Pirie, in more or less 
weathered masses. It is also found scattered about in medium- 
sized reniform masses on hills of crystalline limestone in the 
northern part of the Hundred of Cunningham, and it occurs in 
a large vein on the banks of the Oolabidnie Creek, Hundred of 
Playford, and in botryoidal masses at Blinman. Burr mentions 
carbonate of magnesia as occurring in the Mount Lofty and 
Barossa Ranges. 


SILICA. 
QUARTZ. 

Stock crystal occurs in various parts of the colony, among 
which the following may be named:—The mining district of 
Yorke Peninsula (at the Wallaroo Mine crystals with two 
perfect terminal pyramids are obtainable), Angaston, Green’s 
Plains, Stanley Mine, Highbury, Barossa Range, Emu Flat 
near Clare, Lyndoch Valley and Coonatto, while rolled 
pebbles, frequently mistaken for rolled topaz, are common in 
several localities in Central Australia—notably near Lake 
Hope and Charlotte Waters. Tate states this variety occurs 
at Wilhamstown, Morialta, Tanunda Creek and Pekina. Burr 
also reports the following localities for this variety :—En- 
counter Bay, Montacute Mine, Flaxman Valley, Mount 
Barker, and the Belvidere Range. 

Amethystine quartz occurs at the Wallaroo Mine, and in 
small veins on the beach north of Point Riley, Yorke 
Peninsula. 

Rose quartz occurs in the Hundred of Cunningham, and Burr 
mentions its occurrence near the Montacute Mine. 


77 


Smoky quartz.—Fine specimens are obtainable at the Wal- 
laroo Mine, and it occurs at Angaston and Mount Crawford. 
Burr also notes it at the Belvidere Range. 

Milky quartz occurs at the Wallaroo Mine, and Tate reports 
it at the springs at the Peake, Central Australia. 

Bronze-coloured crystals (the colour due to a thin coating of 
ferric oxide) occur at the Stanley Mine, and also at Emu Flat, 
near Clare. 

Chalcedony occurs at Redruth, Wallaroo Mine, Angaston, 
and at North Para near Gawler. ‘Tate reports it at the Peake, 
Central Australia; in the Miocene cliffs at the mouth of the 
Onkaparinga; and as fossil casts at Ardrossan. Burr names 
it as occurring at Flaxman Valley, Mount Barker, Barossa 
Range, and near the Kapunda Mine. 

Carnelian is reported by Tate at Stuart Creek, Central 
Australia. 

Heliotrope is reported by Tate at Stuart Creek. 

Agate pebbles are to be found at Stuart Creek, near the 
Charlotte Waters; and at various other places in Central 
Australia; near the Katherine Telegraph Station. Also, ac- 
cording to Burr, at Flaxman Valley. 

Silicious sinter occurs at Angaston, and, according to Burr, 
at the Barossa Range and Mount Barker. 

Flint.—Tate reports this variety in the older Tertiary rocks 
of Mount Gambier, MacDonnell Bay and Bunda Chiffs. Burr 
also mentions it as occurring in the form of nodules on the 
beach at Rivoli Bay. 

Hornstone cecurs at the Crinnis Mine, and Burr indicates 
the following localities for this variety :—Barossa Range, 
Flaxman Valley, and 25 miles north-east of Adelaide. 

Jasper occurs at Stuart Range, at Greenock, Ardrossan, 
and Burra Range. Tate also reports it at Angaston, and near 
the Peak, Central Australia, and Burr in the Barossa and 
Belvidere Ranges. 


OPAL. 


Var. Precious Opal.—There is good reason for believing that 
this variety exists in the colony. IJtis found in Queensland 
near the South Australian border, and I have seen specimens 
which were said to have been discovered just within the border, 
the locality doubtless being that given by Tate, viz. :—Inna- 
mincka, Cooper’s Creek. 

Girasol.—l have met with a specimen of this variety from 
near Arkaba, Far North. 

Common opal occurs at Angaston and at Mount Crawford in 
all varieties of colours—notably milk-white, green, yellow, 
blue, resin-opal and honey-opal. It also occurs at Nuriootpa 


78 


in cellular masses, and at Yudanamutana enclosing ferric 
oxide (See also under Malachite). Tate reports it at Kelly’s 
Well, 30 miles south of Tennant Creek and in the vicinity 
of the Peake. Burr mentions the occurrence of common opal 
of various colours at Flaxman Valley, and of jasp-opal at the 
Belvidere Range. 

Hyalite—This variety has been noted by Prof. Tate as 
occurring in the Munno Para hills near Smithfield. 


SILICATES (Anhydrous). 


PYROXENE. 


The occurrence of this mineral is reported at Mount Schank 
by Tate, and by Burr at Mount Gambier, under the name of 
Augite. The var. Coccolite is also noted by Burr at Mount 
Gambier. 

AmPHIBOLE (Hornblende), 

This species occurs at various localities on Yorke Peninsula, 
notably at the Wallaroo and Moonta Mines; also at Tanunda 
Creek, Angaston, in the district about Franklin Harbour and 
at Tungkillo (Tate). 

Tar. Asbestus is found at New Mecklenburg, Tungk:zllo and 
Angaston; at the Lobethal Mine (Tate) and near Menge 
Town (Selwyn). Burr mentions the following additional 
loealities:—Mount Barker (with chalcedony and silicious tufa) 
and the Belvidere Range. 

Actinolite occurs at Wallaroo Bay, at Yudanamutana Mine 
(Ulrich), and, according to Burr, at Lyndoch Valley, Flax- 
man Valley and near Strathalbyn. 

Tremolite at Victoria Creek, Williamstown (Selwyn), and 
Flaxman Valley and Barossa Range (Burr). 


CrocipoLitE (Blue Asbestus). 
Ulrich states that this species occurs at the Wirrawilka. 


BERYL. 

This mineral occurs of various colours—red, blue, green, Xe. 
—at Mount Crawford. The bluish-green variety known as 
Aquamarine occurs there also. The Emerald is said to have 
been discovered by Menge (probably at or near Mount Craw- 
ford), but so far as I am aware none of the specimens of this 
mineral which have been found up to the present time are of 
sufficient brilliancy and purity of colour to entitle them to rank 
as valuable gems. Burr mentions Barossa Range for this 
species. 

CHRYSOLITE. 

The common variety of this mineral—Olivine—occurs, accord- 

ing to J. E. T. Woods, at Mount Schank and extensively in 


79 


the volcanic lavas of Mount Gambier. The variety Hyalosiderite 


-is also mentioned by Woods as occurring in the basalt of 
Mount Schank. 


GARNET. 


Red crystals of this mineral in white tale are to be found at 
Kanmantoo. Black garnet occurs at Bundaleer ; and garnet- 
rock—z.e., garnet forming a more or less compact rocky mass— 
occurs at Monarto. Crystals of iron-garnet occur in the granite 
rocks at Yadmana in the Hundred of Hawker. Burr mentions 
the following localities :—Red garnet, Belvidere Range and in 
the neighbourhood of Mount Barker ; black garnet, about 20 
miles north-east of Adelaide ; and cinnamon stone, Belvidere 
Range. 

EPIDOTE. 


The two following localities are named for the occurrence of 
this mineral :—Barossa Range (Burr) and the Yudanamutana 
Mine (Ulrich). 

Brorire (Mica.) 

This mineral is of frequent occurrence in the copper mines 
of Yorke Peninsula, the most characteristic specimen being 
obtainable at the Yelta Mine, near Moonta. 


The following is the result of an analysis of a specimen ob- 
tained from the Yelta Mine :— 


Silica... hia) AS OS 
Magnesia... a SMES 
Alumina fae Lae ee aie! ol ars 
Ferric oxide... Fie el Ae 
Ferrous oxide We 5c. .L'GS 
Manganous oxide ... Sch AOU 
Lime AS ae cst daty hee 
Potash me <2 Ay, eee 
Soda ... iy ast Jee A 
Water ne mi: paper ie 
Fluorine a Le LOU trace 
99°12 


The specific gravity of this specimen was 2'9. The colour was 
a dark greenish-black; that of thin lamine brownish-green. 
The occurrence of this species is reported at Williamstown 
by Selwyn. i 
Muscovire (Common Mica). 

This species forms a common constituent of our granite 
rocks. ‘The following localities may be more especially noted: 
—Mount Pleasant, Williamstown, Barossa Ranges and 
Mount Crawford. ‘Tate reports its occurrence in large trans- 


80 


parent plates at the MacDonnell Ranges; and Burr gives for 
it (under the name of Mica) these additional localites :—River . 
Gawler, Valley of the Nixon and Yankalilla. 


LAPIS-LAZULI. 


I have met with a specimen of this mineral (in the form of 
veins in white granite), which was said to have been obtained 
in the Murray Scrub—most probably from near Monarto. 


ALBITE. 


This species occurs in veins in the metamorphic rocks exposed 
in the Oolabidnie Creek near Franklin Harbour. It forms the 
chief felspathic constituent of the granites of that district. 


ORTHOCLASE. 


Well crystallized specimens occur at Angaston, and near 
the Wallaroo Mine; massive and crystalline at Angaston, 
Ardrossan and Wallaroo. Burr names the following localities : 
—Barossa Range and east of Mount Barker. 


TOURMALINE 


Occurs at the Moonta and Paramatta Mines, at Mount Craw- 
ford, Ardrossan and Angaston ; and Tate reports it at Mount 
Boothby (90 miles north of Alice Springs), where it is said to 
be abundant; also at Barrow’s Creek and in the neighbour- 
hood of the Peake, Central Australia. Burr enumerates these 
additional localities:—Valley of the Nixon, Barossa Range, 
Encounter Bay and Rapid Bay; and the variety Ruwbellite also 
in the valley of the Nixon. 


CYANITE. 

This mineral is to be found at Nuriootpa in quartz. Burr 
mentions it as occurring in the colony, but does not give the 
locality. Selwyn states that it occurs near Menge Town and 
Mount Crawford. 

Topaz. 

In this colony the white Topaz appears to be the most com- 
monly occurring variety of this species. It is found near 
Blanchewater and elsewhere near Lake Eyre, Central Aus- 
tralia. 


SILICATES (Hydrous). 
ALLOPHANE 
Occurs in the form of a blue deposit in the Miocene rocks of 
the South-East (J. E. T. Woods). 
Taxe. 


Tate reports the occurrence of this species on the flanks of 
the Kaiserstuhl, and the var. Steatite at New Mecklenburg 


81 


Selwyn names (for crystallised Talc) near Menge Town, Mount 
Crawford. A. bronze-coloured Tale occurs on Yorke Peninsula, 
and white Tale at the Barossa Range and Kanmantoo. Burr 
mentions the following additional localities :—Belvidere Range, 
River Hutt and Lyndoch Valley. 


GLAUCONITE. 
Professor Tate has noted the occurrence of this mineral in 
the limestone rocks of the Aldinga cliffs, and the Bunda cliffs 
of the Great Australian Bight. 


KAOLINITE. 


All varieties of this mineral are to be found in this colony, 
while ordinary clays consisting of Kaolinite more or less inti- 
mately mixed with impurities are abundant. The following are 
a few of the many localities for the pure white Kaolin :-— 
Wallaroo mining district, Tanunda, Ardrossan, near Charlotte 
Waters, Hummocks Range and Teatree Gully. 

The following are the results of the analysis of two specimens 
of pure white Kaolin dried at 100° C.—A being obtained from 
near Point Riley, Hundred of Wallaroo, and B from Teatree 
Gully, the former comprising an aggregation of pearly scales 
easily seen under the microscope with a low power :— 


A B 
Alumina nas Aes ae 36°18 Es 
Silica ... et i i 47°53 22°67 
Magnesia We uh ae ‘50 “72 
Geme -),.. ae ae eet Trace £39 
Ferric oxide ... iS ss 2°18 Pot 
Titanic acid f ies sap 1°63 
Alkalies A 17 1°48 


Loss on 1gmition (chiefly water) 13°31 9°95 
100°87 10046 


In A, the alkalies, being chiefly soda, are calculated as such ; 
in B, they were principally potass and are so calculated. 

Tate reports its occurrence at Port Vincent, and of a hard 
Kaolin clay eight miles west of Charlotte Waters; while Burr 
mentions white clay on the Gawler Plains at the source of the 
Angus, Flaxman Valley and River Gawler. 


PENNINITE. 


A specimen of the massive variety of this species has 
reached me from near Beltana, the colour being a fine apple- 
green. A chemical examination proved the presence of chromium. 


F 


82 


METALLIC MINERALS. 
TITANIUM. 
Rvtive. 


This mineral occurs in the form of fair-sized crystals at 
Lyndoch, Collingrove, Tanunda Creek, Mount Crawford and 
near Encounter Bay ; also (with quartz sand) near Balhannah. 


TIN. 
CASSITERITE. 


Although the finding of this mineral has been frequently re- 
ported, it is doubtful whether any authentic specimens have 
been discovered in the southern part of this province. I have 
a specimen of stream tin in the form of fine grains, which is 
stated to have been found in the Port Lincoln district ; but as 
the party who is supposed to have found it there failed to ob- 
tain a further supply from the same spot, I am compelled to 
look upon this discovery as very dubious. Rutile in the form 
of sand and erystals has been frequently mistaken for tin ore. 
Cassiterite occurs in the Northern Territory at the McKinlay 
River, Mount Wells &c. 

MOLYBDENUM. 
MoLyYBDENITE 


Is of frequent occurrence at the Yelta Mine, and in smaller 
quantities at the Moonta, Wallaroo, Kurilla and other mines 
in the same district. Tate also reports it as being found in 
eneiss near Franklin Harbour. 


BISMUTH. 
Native BrsmMvura. 
This mineral oceurs at the Balhannah Mine and the Mur- 
ninnie Mine, about 20 miles north of Franklin Harbour. 


BISMUTHINITE 

Occurs at the Balhannah Mine. 
BIsMUTITE 
Occurs at the Balhannah Mine, associated with native gold and 
chalcopyrite (copper pyrites). Ulrich reports its occurrence 
at the Stanley Mine. 
IRON. 

Native Iron. 

The only specimen* of Native Iron which has been found, or 
at any rate scientifically made known, up to the present time 
is in the form of a mass of meteoric iron obtained in the 
Gawler Range in November, 1875. As no particulars of this 
meteorite have hitherto been published, the following informa- 


* Now in the South Australian Museum. 


83 


tion may be of interest :—The form is bounded by a series of 
more or less concave and irregularly-shaped planes. The 
surface is, for the most part, coated with a somewhat shining 
and dark-brown oxide of iron. This meteorite consists of 
metallic iron and contains a small proportion of nickel. It 
weighs 3,268°7 grm., or 7 lbs. 3} 0zs. As originally found it 
was a trifle heavier, a small piece having been broken off by the 
finder ; and the long chisel mark to the right hand on the top 
shows where an attempt was made to cut off a larger piece. 
The locality and circumstances attending the discovery of the 
meteorite are thus described by Mr. James Martlew :—‘I 
found the stone on the flat in a mallee scrub about half a mile 
from the northern foot of the range, being distant four miles 
south of Yardea Station. It was about 15 inches under the 
surface, and was surrounded for about three feet by limestone 
broken into small pieces. All round this there was from four 
to eight inches of soil covering the limestone.” 


MAGNETITE. 

This species occurs near Mount Jagged, and Burr states that 
the crystallised and massive varieties are of very genera! occur- 
rence from Cape Jervis to Black Rock Hill. Tate reports it in 
the vicinity of the Peake, Central Australia, and in the Hun- 
dred of Cunningham. The following analysis of a sample of 
ore from Mount Lofty, by Wallace of Glasgow, may be of in- 
terest :— 


Ferric oxide... obi lee ay i AA es 
Ferrous oxide bh GG iron Sie ee 
Manganic oxide _... _ ‘20 
Sulphur r oh ae ‘20 
Iron, combined with sulphur ‘18 
Phosphoric acid... Pe ‘O5 
Alumina, &e. a. oon W cee 
Magnesia ... $3 eek coe 
Silica... a ae ay "92 

100°00 

HeMAtire. 


Var. Micaceous Hematite occurs at numerous localities in this 
province, among which may be mentioned the following :— 
Angaston, Port Lincoln, near Inglewood, at the Yudanamutana 
Copper Mine and the Paramatta Mine, Yorke Peninsula. 
It occurs in the quartz veins running through the metamorphic 
rocks in the neighbourhood of the Peake and at Tennant 
Creek, Central Australia (Tate). Also in druses in close 
proximity to the copper deposits at the Blinman Mine (Ulrich) 


84 


and in the Gawler Range, Barossa Range and Mount Lofty 
Range (Burr). 

Compact Columnar (Red Hematite) occurs near Port Lincoln, 
at the Wallaroo Mine, Barossa Range, Angaston and at 
numerous other places; while Professor Tate notes it at 
Eudunda, Tennant Creek and in the neighbourhood of the 
Peake, Central Australia. 

Red Ochre occurs at Parachilna, and Tate reports it in the 
vicinity of the Peake, Central Australia. 


_ Marrrre—(sub-species) 
Occurs in the form of octahedral crystals imbedded in mica- 
ceous hematite, at Carey’s Gully, Mount Lofty. 


Limonite (Brown Hematite). 


This mineral occurs at numerous localities in the province, 
among which the following are perhaps the most deserving of 
mention, viz., Angaston, Waukaringa, in and near the Bliinman 
Mine, Munjibbie, Yorke Peninsula, Sixth Creek, near Ingle- 
wood, Macclesfield and Hindmarsh Valley. 

Limonite pseudomorph after pyrite occurs in the form of 
isolated and grouped cubical crystals in various parts of Cen- 
tral Australia; and near Lake Eyre, is very plentiful on the 
surface. Tate also notes it in the vicinity of Eudunda and 
in most of the auriferous quartz veins in the Mount Pleasant 
district. It occurs, in the form of pentagonal dodecahedral 
crystals pseudomorph after pyrite, near Mount Lyndhurst. 
The following is the result of an analysis of a specimen from 
Hindmarsh Valley, by Wallace of Glasgow :— 


Ferric oxide... ..  76°71=Iron, 53°7 per cent. 
Manganic oxide fuel. “btace 
Magnesia ies Pe 0°30 
lime ... off ay 0°45 
Phosphoric acid uF. 1:20 
Sulphurie acid... A 0°42 
Alumina Py eee 3°05 
Silica... Yk ty 5°88 
Water (combined) .... 10°91 
Moisture ; ase 1°08 
100°00 


Burr mentions the following localities for this species :—Near 
the Montacute Copper Mine, Rapid Ray and Mount Barker. 


MENACCANITE. 
Var. Ilmenite occursat Victoria Creek, Williamstown (Selwyn). 


SIDERITE. 
Selwyn mentions the occurrence of this species at the 


85 


Crinnis Mine, Ulrich at the Oratunga Mine, Tate at Eudunda 
and Burr reports it at Rapid Bay, Barossa Range, Mount Lofty 
Range and various other places. It also occurs at the Kar- 
kulto Mine, whence a specimen has been obtained for examina- 
tion. It was in the form of a largely crystalline mass of a 
brownish-grey colour. Hardness, 3°5; and specific gravity, 3°9. 

The analysis of this specimen yielded the following results 
(1). No. 11, introduced for the sake of comparison, is the 
composition of a specimen from Mitterberg, Tyrol, quoted from 
Dana :— 


ef Er, 
Ferrous oxide ... en ip Ok £O 51:15 
Manganous oxide... ~=—1°56 1°62 
Magnesia be ast hee: 7°72 
Carbonic acid ... SOO LOO BE 


—_—_——_——— 


100:00 = 100°00 
The composition of the mineral as given above is represented 
by the formula 4 FeCO, + MgCO,. From the composition 
of this specimen and from that of others, which have from time 
to time passed through my hands, it would appear that the 
siderite of this colony is chiefly of the magnesian variety. 


PISTOMESITE. 

This mineral occurs in large quantities at the Balhannah 
Mine, the waste tip being for the most part formed of it. 
When first obtained this mineral is of a yellowish-grey colour, 
but on exposure it assumes a bronze-coloured coating. 

A preliminary examination showed that the mineral consisted 
of magnesic, ferrous and manganous carbonates, and at first 
I was inclined to think that it was Breunnerite, a ferriferous 
variety of Magnesite. A complete quantitative analysis showed, 
however, that the mineral had the composition of Pistomesite, 
with which it also agrees in its physical properties. The 
specimen for examination was selected from the centre of a 
large mass, and was free from the incrustation referred to 
above. The result of the analysis was as follows (4), No. 1 
being the analysis of a specimen from Thurnburg quoted by 
Dana :— 


i II. 
Ferrous oxide... 64 OE 33°92 
Magnesia f ce 2066 21°72 
Manganous oxide... 349 — 
Carbonie acid ... ... 48°52 43°62 
99:98 99°26 


*Obtained by difference. 


86 


The hardness of the Balhannah specimen is 3'5. Its specific 
gravity is 3'5, while that of the Thurnburg specimen is given 
at 3'4. This speciesis also reported by Tate as occurring at 
Nuccaleena. 

Pyrite (Lron pyrites). 

This species is to be found in most of the lodes of the 
Yorke Peninsula mining district. Finely crystallised speci- 
mens exhibiting the form of the pentagonal dodecahedron have 
been obtained from both the Wallaroo and Paramatta Mines. 
This form is reported by Burr as occurring at the Montacute 
Mine and the district in its neighbourhood, and also at Rapid 
and Encounter Bays. Other localities for this mineral are 
Talisker Mine and Bundaleer, and it is very general in the 
various ranges in limestone, quartz, hornstone, slate, and as- 
sociated with other metalliferous minerals (Burr). A stalac- 
titic form occurs at the Wallaroo Mine. 


ARSENOPRYITE (Mispickel) 7 
Occurs at the Glen Bar Mine, near Strathalbyn, at the Talisker 
Mine, and between Victor Harbour and Encounter Bay. 
VIVIANITE. 

The massive form of this species occurs at Angaston, and 
Burr states that the earthy form occurs near Mount Rufus and 
near Strathalbyn. | 

MANGANESE. 
PYROLUSITE. 

This species occurs near the Wallaroo Mines both massive 
and stalactitic; also at Wonna Pandappa Dam and at Wauka- 
ringa (Tate)—the specimen from the latter place beg an 
impure variety. 

MANGANITE. 

This species is mined for shipment to Europe in the neigh- 
borhood of Gordon, between Quorn and Hawker. 

Oxides of Manganese of varying composition occur in the 
Port Lincoln district, at Wonna Pandappa Dam and at various 
localities in the Far North. Burr reports manganese ores at 
Rapid Bay, Myponga, Noarlunga, River Light, Barossa Range 
and Mount Bryan. 

ZINC. 
SPAHLERITE (Zine blende). 

This mineral occurs at the Wallaroo Mine, and on the west 
coast of Yorke Peninsula, between Point Pearce and Corney 
Point. Tate reports it at North Rhine, and L. Seeger at the 
Wheal Ellen Mine. 


87 
LEAD. 


CERUSITE 
Occurs massive at the Glen Osmond stone quarries. I have 
found it crystallised with phosgenite in a specimen from the 
western side of Spencer Gulf, and Ulrich reports it as lining 
druses at the Beltana Mine, while L. Seeger states that he has 
met with finely crystallised specimens at the Strathalbyn Mine. 


ANGLESITE. 


This species occurs both massive and in the form of small 
ervatals at the Wilvena Pound. 


ErratuM.—Page 87, line 5 from bottom, fc 
ere: or Moockr 
read Mount Lyndhurst. ; ckra Tower 


specimen Ouse LLU VIG, Wen, Cuan or SP ee > ~~ 
exact locality being unknown; and Burr mentions it as ocur- 
ring at the Glen Osmond lead mines. 


PYROMORPHITE. 


I have met with massive specimens of this mineral, varying 
in colour from green to greyish-brown, obtained from the west 
coast of Spencer Gulf (Iam uncertain as to the exact locality), 
J. E. T. Woods, in a private communication, mentions that he 
has found phosphate of lead at the Strathalbyn Mine. 


NICKEL. 


ULLMANNITE. 

This mineral (a double sulphide of antimony and nickel) 
occurs near Moockra Tower, from whence very characteristic 
specimens have been obtained. 

COBALT. 
Eryrurite (Cobalt Bloom). 
This species has been found at the Glen Bar Mine. 


88 


CopattTiItE (Cobalt Glanz). 


L. Seeger reports having found this species at the Glen Bar 
Mine associated with mispickel. 


COPPER. 


Native Copper. 


This mineral species is represented in a great variety of 
forms in the upper parts of the lodes of the Wallaroo and 
Moonta mining districts of Yorke Peninsula. Some speci- 
mens exhibit well-defined, though distorted crystals; while 
some very fine examples of the arborescent form have also been 
produced. In more or less rounded masses it may be said to be 
common to the lodes of the district. At the Sliding Rock 
Mine it occurs disseminated in various sized grains. It is also 
found at Angaston, and to greater or less extent in several of 
the other copper-bearing lodes of the colony. 


CUPRITE. 


This mineral is of very general occurrence in the upper por- 
tions of the copper lodes of this colony, most frequently in the 
massive form, but finely crystallised specimens are also to be 
noted. Of these latter, the Moonta Mine has produced some 
very good examples in which the planes of the octahedron are 
most fully developed; while the Spring Creek Mine was at one 
time celebrated for crystals exhibiting the planes of the cube in 
avery marked degree. The crystals from the Moonta Mine 
are characterised by an unusually strong metallic lustre. 
Cuprite is also found in isolated octahedral crystals at the 
Moonta and Burra Burra Mines; while hopper-shaped octahe- 
dral crystals have been met with at the Kapunda Mine. 

Crystals have been occasionally obtained from the Burra 
Burra Mine which were more or less converted into malachite, 
and in a locality near the Rhondda Mine, north of Port 
Augusta, they have been found converted into atacamite. 


Var. Chalcotrichite.—I have met with this variety of cuprite 
in a specimen from this colony—the precise locality is un- 
known. It occurs in groups of small acicular crystals with 
native copper. 


Cuaucocire (Redruthite). 


As far as I am aware, this mineral has not been met with 
erystallized in the colony. The massive variety is of frequent 
occurrence in the copper mines of Yorke Peninsula—fine 
specimens being obtainable more especially from the Moonta 
Mines. Burr mentions it as occurring at the Kapunda, Monta- 
cute, and Burra Burra Mines, and also at Mount Barker. 


89 


CovELLITE (Indigo Copper Ore.) 

Very fine specimens of this mineral, in the massive form, 
have been obtained from the mines on Yorke Peninsula, the 
most characteristic being chiefly taken from the southern end 
of the district. A more or less impure variety, black in colour, 
occurs not unfrequently, more especially in the northern part 
of the district. 

The mineral which generally passes under the name of 
Melaconite in the Yorke Peninsula mining district is actually 
Covellite. 

Burr mentions “black sulphuret of copper” as occurring at 
the Kapunda Mine. 


BornitE (Purple Copper Ore). 

This mineral occurs at several of the copper mines in the 
colony, generally associated with chalcopyrite (copper pyrites). 
The most notable locality is the Moonta Mine. The analysis 
of a specimen of massive Bornite from the Moonta Mine 
yielded the following result :— 


I. Le: III. 
Copper: 's. ot ... 59°84 62:00 61.87 
Iron... 2 yeh a NS Br 12°15 12°13 
sulphur; 2 ous wee 24°95 25°85 26°00 
Insoluble silicious residue 4°03 — — 


10055 1€0:00  100°00 
Column 11. shows the composition of the specimen after deduct- 
ing the insoluble residue, and column 111. is the percentage 
composition calculated from the formula 9 Cu,S, 2 Fe,S,. 

Bornite occurs at the Lady Alice Mine, the Barossa Mine, 
the Burra Burra Mine and the Try Again Mine. 

Tate reports its occurrence in the quartz veins in the meta- 
morphic rocks in the neighbourhood of the Peake, Central 
Australia, and Burr at the Kapunda Mine. 

As far as the writer is aware, the mineral has only been found 
massive. 

CHALCOPYRITE (Copper pyrites). 

This mineral is of pretty general occurrence in the lower 
parts of the copper lodes of the province. It has been found 
erystallised at the Wallaroo Mine. Some of the crystals in 
my collection obtained from thence measure from half an inch 
to three quarters of an inch in diameter. 

Although this mineral forms the chief copper ore of the 
Yorke Peninsula mining district, it only occurs pure in any 
considerable quantity at the Moonta Mine. In the other parts 
of the district it is more or less intimately mixed with pyrite, 
covellite, bornite, &e. 


90 


Fine typical specimens of the ordinary variety and that 
known as “peacock ore” (from the iridescent tarnish exhi- 
bited by some of the fractured surfaces) are obtainable at 
the Moonta Mine. The analyses of both varieties prove the 
identity of composition, viz., that represented by the formula 
Cu,8, FeS,, FeS. 

The results of the analysis of specimens of this ore from the 
Moonta Mine are given below. (No. 1. is the analysis of the 
untarnished variety, and No. 11. that of the peacock ore. No. 
111. shows the theoretical composition of pyrite deduced from 
the formula given above. 


i. II. III. 
Copper _... iy ww. B421 34°04: 34°57 
Iron oe Boks wk DOWD 31°14 30°53 
Solphar 6 2 gH, LO 34°34 3490 
Insoluble silicious residue 0°50 0°63 — 


———— 


100°52 10015 100.00 

Copper pyrites is reported by Tate as occurring in quartz 
veins in the metamorphic rock in the neighbourhood of the 
Peake, Central Australia, while it is noted by Burr as occurr- 
ing (generally variegated) as follows:—At the Montacute 
Mine and all the lodes in its vicinity, Rapid Bay, Flaxman 
Valley, Hutt River &c. 


Azurite (Blue Carbonate of Copper). 

This mineral occurs pretty generally in the copper lodes of 
the colony, with the exception of those on Yorke Peninsula, 
where it is rarely met with. The Burra Burra Mine and 
Kapunda Mine were at one time noted for the quantity of this 
mineral which they produced. It has also been found at the 
Blinman Mine, Yudanamutana Mine, &c. &c., and near 
Franklin Harbour and other places on the west coast of 
Spencer Gulf. 


MALACHITE 


Occurs crystallised in ascicular crystals at the Rhondda Mine, 
and in brown iron ore at the Wallaroo Mine; also in the same 
form in the so-called “red jasper rock” at the Yudanamutana 
Mine. This red jasper is opal, enclosing red oxide of iron, 
and from an examination of thin sections under the microscope 
I am inclined to think that we have had here a spongy mass of 
oxide of iron (probably the cap of a lode) into which silica in 
the form of opal has infiltered and thus enclosed the oxide of 
iron). Ulrich mentions the occurrence of this mineral in 
acicular crystals at the Oratunga Mine. 

Nodular and lenticular-shaped masses, with a radiated 


91 


crystalline structure, are not uncommon in the copper-bearing 
country north of Port Augusta. The ordinary massive mala- 
chite occurs at several localities—most notably at the Burra ; 
and Burr mentions the following places (without, however, 
indicating the form—whether massive or crystallized) :—Mount 
Barker, Montacute Mine, Rapid Bay, Wakefield, near the 
Horseshoe on the Onkaparinga. It formed the chief ore at 
the Kapunda and Burra Mines. 

Tate states that it occurs in the quartz veins in the meta- 
phoric rocks in the neighbourhood of the Peake, Central Aus- 
tralia. It occurs in perfectly round nodules about three- 
quarters of an inch in diameter on and near the surface of the 
country round about Beltana. 

It is worthy of note that true malachite does not occur in 
the Yorke Peninsula mining district. It has there been met 
with only as atacamite altered more or lessinto green carbonate 
of copper by contact with the calcareous rocks. 

Sub-species Mysorin.—I have found this mineral of a dark- 
brown colour occurring with crystallized malachite in red opal 
rock from the Yudanamutana Mine. 


DIOPTASE. 


This form of silicate of copper occurs at the Appialina Mine 
(Selwyn). 


CHRYSOCOLLA. 


Very good specimens of this mineral, enamel-like in texture, 
have been found at the Burra Burra Mine, associated with 
Azurite and Malachite. I have met with characteristic speci- 
mens from the Wallaroo and Kurilla Mines, Yorke Penin- 
sula; and Ulrich reports it as occurring at the Nuccaleena, 
Yudanamutana and Mount Lyndhurst Mines. 

Burr mentions its occurrence at the Mount Barker Mine. 


ATACAMITE. 


This mineral is known to occur in three distinct states of 
hydration, the varieties so formed containing in round numbers 
about 12, 17, and 20 per cent. of water. I incline to the 
opinion that two, if not all of these varieties occur in this 
colony ; but up to the present time I have only had the oppor- 
tunity of chemically examining one specimen belonging to the 
first variety. This mineral is found in every copper mine on 
Yorke Peninsula, and was at one time represented by most 
magnificent specimens at the New Cornwall Mine. Perfect 
crystals nine inches long were found there, and groups of 
crystals varying from an inch to two or three inches could be 
obtained in considerable quantity. 

The specimen employed for analysis was from the Wallaroo 


92 


Mine, the crystals (which were about one quarter-inch long) 
being carefully separated from the matrix. The analysis of this 
specimen yielded the following result (1.). For the sake of 
comparison I subjoin the analysis of a specimen from Chili 
(a1.) quoted by Dana— 


ze iL. 
Wopper’-.... a ae ee ae 14°54 
Chlorine ... Mat Joe, Oe 16°33 
Cupric oxide Vy ast oe 55'94 
Water. 4° a. ae ... 13°51 (by diff.) 12°96 
Insoluble silicious residue 1°47 ‘08 (quartz ?) 
100-00 99°85 


It occurs also at the Yudanamutana, Daly and Rhondda 
Mines. From the latter—situated near Moockra Tower—Il 
have obtained pseudomorphs after cuprite. 


SILVER. 

Although silver occurs in considerable quantity in some of 
the lead ores of the colony, so far as I am aware no isolated 
species containing this metal as an essential constituent has 
yet been discovered. 


GOLD. 

“The geological distribution of gold in South Australia is 
restricted to the Pre-Silurian, certain gravels of the Miocene 
period, and to drifts of later age. In the first it occurs dis- 
seminated in veins of quartz; in the second and third cases as 
alluvial gold.” (Tate). 

Among the numerous localities in which gold has been found, 
in one or other of the conditions mentioned above, the follow- 
ing may be named :-—In the sand of the Onkaparinga, South 
Para and Torrens Rivers; in the Bremer and Barossa Ranges ; 
at Nairne, Woodside, Strathalbyn, Mount Barker, Clarendon, 
Noarlunga, Currency Creek, Mount Pleasant, Jupiter Creek and 
Echunga in the Adelaide District; Ulooloo and Waukaringa, 
North of Burra. At Bigg’s Flat near Echunga a few nuggets of 
an ounce in weight have been obtained. 

At the Balhannah Mine gold occurs associated with native 
bismuth and bismuthinite ; at the Lady Alice Mine it has been 
found in some abundance, associated with bornite ; and at the 
Moonta Mine it also occurs in small quantity associated with 
the latter mineral. 

In the Northern Territory gold is widely distributed over 
that portion of Arnheim Land occupied by metamorphic rocks. 
The gold-fields extend from the River Stapleton to the Driffield, 
a distance of about a hundred miles. The chief centres of 


93 


gold-reefiing are the Howley, Twelve-Mile, McKinlay, the 
Union and Pine Creek. (Prof. Tate’s Report on the Northern 
Territory.) 


APPENDIX. 
NITRE. ic 

Burr states that efflorescent nitrate of potass occurs on the 
cliffs of the River Murray, but does not specify the exact 
locality. 

Mrrasinite (Glauber Salt) 
Is stated by Burr to occur in the form of efflorescent crystals 
at Crystal Brook. 

Katinite (Potass Alum). 

Burr states that this species occurs mammillated and efflor- 
escent in the gorge of the River Torrens and in the ranges 
near Mount Barker. 

WAVELLITE. 
Burr states that this species occurs at the River Gawler. 


- Frero.ire. 
According to Burr this mineral has been noticed in the 
Barossa Range. 
MeELaconitEe (Black Oxide of Copper). 


I have not hitherto personally met with a specimen of this 
mineral, although Burr reports it as occurring both mammil- 
lated and earthy at the Kapunda and Montacute Mines. 


94 


LIsT OF PLANTS UNRECORDED FOR SOUTHERN 
EYRE PENINSULA. 


By Proressor Rateu Tate, F.G.8., F.LS., &e. 
{Read October 2, 1883.] 


This enumeration is chiefly based upon collections made by 
our Corresponding Member, Mrs. A. Richards (4.2.), while 
journeying from Port Lincoln to Streaky Bay during October, 
1882, and by Mr. Samuel Dixon (8.D.) during a recent tour in 
the country around Port Lincoln. 

The asterisk prefixed to a name indicates that the geo- 
graphical range of the species has been extended to the west- 
ward ; in the case of Pteris arguta the western limit has been 
shifted 400 miles from Penola, where I gathered it in November 
of last year. With regard to the other additions, they serve 
to lessen the width of the wide gap in the longitudinal range 
of the species, extending in many instances from the mid- 
southern parts of the province to beyond the frontier of West 
Australia. The occurrence of Grevillea parviflora, Quinetia 
Urvillet and Calocephalus Drummondii are noteworthy. 

*Papaver aculeatum, Colton, Venus Bay, A.#&. Drosera 
elanduligera, S.D.; *D. peltata, S.D.; D. Menzsiesii, 4.2. and 
S.D. Comesperma scoparium and Poranthera ericoides, SD. 
Pelargonium australe, at Colton, 4.R. *Eriostemon pungens, 
at Colton, A.R.; S.D. Claytonia corrigioloides, §.D. Daviesia 
brevifolia and *Pultenza canaliculata, S.D. Goodia medica- 
ginea and *Kennedya monophylla, at Colton, 4.R. *Acacia 
rupicola, near Port Lincoln, 4.R. Acacia myrtifolia, Marble 
Range, J. H. Brown. Haloragis teucrioides, 4.h. *Melaleuca 
pustulata, at Denial Bay, &. Tate. *Eucalyptus cosmophylla, 
Marble Range, J. #. Brown. Spyridium eriocephalum, S.D. ; 
S. vexilliferum and *S. leucophractum, 4.R. and SD. *Gre- 
villea parviflora—halmaturina, *Conospermum patens and 
Hydrocotyle callicarpa, $.D. Didiscus eriocarpus, 4.#., and 
D. cyanopetalus, 8.D. Galium umbrosum, S.D. *Opercularia 
scabrida, 4A.R. Calocephalus Drummondii, Rutidosis Pumilo, 
Quinetia Urvillei and Myriocephalus rhizocephalus, SD. 
*Helichrysum Baxteri, A.#. Microseris Forsteri, at Lake 
Hamilton, A.R. Candollea despecta, Leewenhoekia dubia, 
Sebea ovata and Mitrasacme paradoxa, S.D. *Styphelia 
strigosa, 4A.R.; also at base of Marble Range, J. HL. Brown. 
Microtis porrifolia and Caladenia latifolia, at Colton, 4.2. 


95 


Caladenia Patersoni, at Colton, A.R.; near Marble Range, 
J. E. Brown. C. deformis, near Marble Range, J. #. Brown. 
Thysanotus Patersoni, Neurachne alopecuroides and Stipa 
scabra, at Lake Hamilton, 4.#. Centrolepis aristata, 
C. strigosa and C. polygyna, S.D. *Pteris arguta, limestone- 
wells five miles back from Streaky Bay, 4.2. 


A LIsT OF UNRECORDED PLANTS AND OF NEW 
LOCALITIES FOR RARE PLANTS IN THE SOUTH= 
EAST PART OF THIS COLONY. 


By Proressor Ratpex Tarts, F.G.S8., F.LS., &e. 


(Read October 2, 1883.] 


During the latter half of November, 1882, I made a long 
and extensive botanical tour over region E. of the inter- 
provincial divisions into which I had divided extra-tropical 
South Australia*, with the special object of tracing out its 
western limit. Briefly, the region, small as it is, must be con- 
siderably reduced in area, but in the present communication I 
will deal with it as at first delineated. In the course of my 
explorations I found several species hitherto unrecorded for 
the region, and discovered not a few rare species at new locali- 
ties. The chief novelties have already been indicated in m 
“Additions to the Flora of South Australia,” published in the 
Society's Transactions for this year and last. 


Hibbertia stricta Nangwarry; Mount McIntyre; Yallum 
(Miss Allen !). 

Cassytha melantha. Lake George; Cave Range. 

Cardamine tenuifolia. Considered by F.v. M. a state of C. 
laciniata; marsh lands about Mount Burr Range, and 
Mount Julian near Penola. 

Stenopetalum lineare. Sandhills, Beachport. 

Drosera auriculata. Marsh lands, Mount Graham. 

Conesperma calymega. Mount Burr Range; Nangwarry ; 
Mount Julian; Cave Range and Narracoorte. 

Elatine Americana. Swamps, Mount Graham. 


* Trans. Roy. Soc., 8. Aust., vol. iii., p. 48, 1880. 


96 


Pelargonium Rodneyanum. Almost restricted to sandy 

Shalt Mount Graham; Cave Range; Narracoorte ; 
tewart Range; Reedy Creek. 

Boronia pinnata. Mount McIntyre; Nangwarry; near Penola. 

Didymotheca thesioides. Rivoli Bay. 

Saponaria tubulosa. Cave Range and Narracoorte. 

Sagina apetala. Marshes and sandhills, Rivoli Bay; Mosquito 
Creek. 

Lepigonum marinum. Lacepede Bay. 

Scleranthus pungens. Cave Range and Narracoorte. 

Polyenemon pentandrum. lLacepede Bay and Lake George. 

Ptilotus spathulatus. Cave Range and Narracoorte. 

Rhagodia Biliardieri. Coast Range! and Mount Gambier! 
(Rev. J. LE. T. Woods.) 

Rumex Brown. Beachport; Mount Gambier; Yallum Cave 
near Penola. 

Rumex bidens. Cape Northumberland; Lake Leake. 

Polygonum prostratum. Mount Graham. 

Muhlenbeckia Cunningkamii. Subsaline plains, Narracoorte. 

Spherolobium vimineum. Sphagnum bog, Mount McIntyre. 

Pultenza humilis. Riddoch Bay and Cape Northumberland. 

Pultenza involucrata. Near Yallum (Miss Allen!). 

Eutaxia empetrifolia. Heathy ground near Lake George. 

Acacia pycnantha. Towards the Punt, Glenelg River; near 
MacDonnell Bay and Beachport. 

Acena ovina. Kingston; Mount Gambier; Cape Northumber- 
land; Cave Range; Narracoorte; Reedy Creek. 

Tillea verticillaris. Beachport; Mount Gambier; Mosquito 
Creek; Narracoorte. 

Tillea purpurata. Mosquito Creek. 

Tillea recurva. Cape Northumberland; Mount Graham; _ 
Lake Edward ; Mosquito Creek. 

Haloragis ceratophylla. On limestone soil, Beachport. 

Haloragis micrantha. Mount Graham swamps. 

Epilobium pallidiflorum. Mount Graham swamps. 

Lhotzkya genetylloides. Nangwarry ; Stewart Range. 

Thryptomene ciliata. Near Yallum, Penola; Stewart Range. 

Leptospermum myrsinoides. Cape Northumberland, Nang- 
warry and Penola. 

Callistemon coccineus. Heath near Yallum Cave, Penola. 

Melaleuca uncinata. Stewart Range. 

Melaleuca pustulata. Salt swamps, Rivoli Bay; Yallum 
Heath ; Stewart Range. 

Stackhousia linarifolia. Lake George; Cape Northumberland; 
Riddoch Bay; Nangwarry. 

Pomaderris racemosa. Sandhills, Rivoli Bay. 

Pimelea serpyllifolia. Beachport. 


97 


Pimelea humilis. Millicent flats to Tarpeena; Nangwarry ; 
Narracoorte and Cave Range. 

Pimelea octophylla. Mount Graham; Nangwarry; Penola. 

Pimelea phylicoides. Mount Julian, near Penola. 

Conospermum patens. Mount McIntyre; Nangwarry; Mount 
Julian ; Stewart Range. 

Hakea rugosa. Mount Graham; Yallum; Cave Range. 

Hydrocotyle callicarpa. Mount Graham. 

Opercularia ovata. Lake George. 

Galium australe. Beachport. 

Aster floribundus. River Glenelg; The Springs near Mount 
Graham ; Yallum (Miss Allen!). 

Aster aff. glandulosus. With slender wiry stems and short 
scattered leaves; achenes densely silky. Yallum (Miss 
Allen!). 

Lagenophora Huegelii. Fern brakes, Mount Graham. 

Brachycome Mueller. Lake George; Cave Range; Narra- 
coorte ; Mosquito Creek ; Reedy Creek. 

Siegesbeckia orientalis. Mount Gambier cone; Glencoe Cave. 

Eclipta platyglossa. Narracoorte Creek. 

Cotula filifolia. Coast swamps Kingston to the River Glenelg ; 
Mount Graham; Yallum (Mss Allen!) ; Mosquito Creek ; 


Narracoorte. 

Centipeda Cunninghami. Mount Graham; Penola; Narra- 
coorte. 

Myriocephalus rhizocephalus. Nangwarry; Penola to Narra- 
coorte. 


Angianthus tomentosus. Narracoorte plain. 

Ixodia achilleoides. Yallum (Miss Allen!). 

Rutidosis Pumilo. Mount Graham; Mount Julian. 

Podotheca angustifolia. Sandhills, Rivoli Bay; Mount Gam- 
bier. 

Leptorrhynchos squamatus. Rivoli Bay ; Mount McIntyre; 
Cave Range ; Narracoorte. 

Leptorrhynchos tenuifolius. Yallum (Miss Allen!). 

Helipterum dimorpholepis. Narracoorte Creek. 

Erechtites picridioides. Mosquito Plains (Rev. J. E. T. 
Woods) ; Mosquito Creek. 

Erechtites quadridentata. Mount Gambier cone. 

Erechtites hispidula. Cape Northumberland. 

Cymbonotus Lawsonianus. Benara near Mount Gambier. 

Candollea (Stylidium) perpusilla. Yallum (Miss Allen!). 

Goodenia pinnatifida. Narracoorte Plains 

Limosella aquatica. Mount Graham Swamps. 

Wilsonia rotundifolia. Subsaline plain, Narracoorte. 

Wilsonia Backhousii. Lake George. 

Polypompholyx tenella. Yallum (Miss Allen’). 


G 


98 


Eritrichium australasicum. Mount Graham. 

Cynoglossum suaveolens. Mounts Gambier and Graham ; 
Cape Northumberland ; Yallum Cave; Narracoorte Caves. 

Verbena officinalis. The Springs, Mount Graham. 

Styphelia virgata. Mount McIntyre; Nangwarry; Yallum 
(Miss Allen!) 

Brachyloma ciliata. Beachport, Rivoli Bay. 

Thelymitra antennifera. Mount McIntyre; Yallum (Miss 
Allen!). 

Microtis porrifoha. Mount Burr Range and Mount Graham ; 
Riddoch Bay ; Cape Northumberland ; Tarpeena. 

Pterostylis furcata. Included by Baron Sir F. von Mueller 
under P. cucullata. Lake Edward; Mount Graham. 

Diuris palustris. Yallum (MMss Allen!). 

Caladenia latifolia. Yallum (A&ss Allen!). 

Eriochilus autumnalis. Yallum, near Penola (Miss Allen!) 

Burchardia umbellata. Tintanulla; Benara; Yallum (MMfss 
Allen!). 

Thysanotus tuberosus. Lake George; Mount Graham; Tar- 
peena; Mount Julian; Cave Range. 

Chameescilla corymbosa. Mount Graham. 

Bartlingia sessiliflora. Nangwarry; Narracoorte; Yallum 
(Miss Allen!). 

Lemna trisulea. Mount Gambier, Valley Lake. 

Xanthorrhea semiplana. Beachport; Mount Graham; Nang- 
warry to Narracoorte and Stewart Range. 

Xanthorrhea quadrangulata. Sandy ground, Mount Burr; 
Stewart Range. 

Liuzula campestris. Beachport; Benara and Mount Gambier. 

Juncus cespititius. 

Juncus paucifiorus. Glenelg River; Lake Leake; Mount 
Graham; Mosquito Creek. 

Aphelia gracilis. Mount Graham. 

Centrolepis aristata. Mounts Graham and Julian; Narra- 
coorte Creek. 

Centrolepis fascicularis. Mount Julian. 

Centrolepis strigosa. Mount Graham; Cave Range. 

Lepidosperma viscidum. Beachport. 

Lepidosperma laterale. Margining swamps, Mount Graham ;. 
Tarpeena; Mount Julian. 

Lepidosperma carphoides. Heathy ground, Yallum; Nang- 
warry ; Cave Range. 

Heleocharis sphacelata. Lake Leake. 

Heleocharis acuta. Glenelg River; Riddoch Bay; Mount 
Gambier; Mosquito Creek ; Narracoorte. 

Heleocharis multicaulis. Marshy ground, Lake George. 

Scirpus cartilagineus. Lake George; Mount Gambier. 


99 


Scirpus pungens. Lake George. 

Scirpus lacustris. Mount Graham; Lake Leake; Mount 
Gambier. 

Schcenus nitens. Lake George; Mount Graham; Narracoorte 
Plains. 

Cladium Mariscus. Mosquito Creek. 

Cladium articulatum. Mosquito Creek. 
Cladium filum. Glenelg River; Riddoch Bay; Lake Bonney; 
Mosquito Creek ; Lake George; Yallum; Narracoorte. 
Carex Gunniana. Glenelg River; Cape Northumberland ; 
Mount Graham. 

Carex pseudo-cyperus. Mount Graham and towards Mount 
McIntyre. 

Carex breviculmis. Mount Graham. 

Agrostis quadriseta. Mount Burr. : | 

Echinopogon ovatus. Cape Northumberland; Glencoe Cave. 

Eragrostis Brown. WNarracoorte. 

Poa syrtica. Kingston. 

Bromus arenarius. Cave Range. 

Danthonia nervosa. Sphagnum bog near Mount McIntyre. 

Neurachne alopecuroides. Cave Range. 

Lepturus incurvatus. Lacepede Bay; subsaline plain, Narra- 
coorte. 

Ophioglossum vulgatum. Mount Graham. 

Pteris arguta. Cave four miles west from Yallum, Penola. 


100 


LIST OF SOME PLANTS INHABITING THE NORTH= 
EASTERN PART OF THE LAKE TORRENS BASIN. 


By Proressor Ratpu Tate, F.G.S., F.LS. 


[Read October 1, 1883.] 


The region, which I examined botanically during two weeks 
in each of the months of June and September of this year, em- 
braces the southern half of the Aroona Range and the plain 
extending therefrom to the shore of Lake Torrens. The Lake 
Torrens Plain is here bounded at the distance of about 25 miles 
from the lake by a range of hills, commencing in the latitude 
of Beltana and following a north-west course through Mount 
Deception, Mount Scott, Aroona Mountain, Mount Parry, 
Termination Hill and Mount Nor’-West. This elevated 
region, which I name the Aroona Range, is west of and diver- 
gent from the Flinders Range ; its western flank is constituted. 
of clay slates, quartzites and quartzose sandstones, dipping 
easterly ; to the eastward limestones are intercalated, and the 
whole finally concealed by the drifts which occupy the synclinal 
valley of Leigh Creek. 

The plain of Lake Torrens is at its margin chiefly composed 
of loams and gravels shed from the adjacent slopes, or trans- 
ported from the far distant Flinders Range by the torrential 
streams, which debouch upon the plain; further out, these 
drifts are concealed by low, more or less parallel, sandhills 
separated from one another by loamy flats or claypans. 

The flora of the basin of Lake Torrens is chiefly known from 
collections made by Babbage, Lattorf and others at its wes- 
tern and north-western parts; whilst little or nothing is 
known of the region under review. It belongs to that type of 
vegetation proper to the “salt-bush’’ country, such as prevails 
throughout the dry zone of Central Australia. 

The majority of the plants are common to the plain and 
hills, though the sandhills, after a sufficient rainfall, bloom with 
a great variety of annuals not met with on the stony ranges. 

In the accompanying list, I have given the names of the 
plants which have not been recorded from the Far North, 
except those of a few which call for special remarks. 

The most noteworthy fact is the presence in this area of 
many species hitherto not known in South Austraha except on 
the confines of this province towards New South Wales and 


101 


Queensland, and at the MacDonnell Ranges on the verge of 
the tropics. They have thus been moved, as it were, well 
within our territorial limits. Of these the following may be 
especially mentioned: — Abutilon halophilum, Zygophyllum 
Howittii, Ptilotus incanus, Kuxolus Mitchelli, Rhynchosia 
minima, Loranthus Quandang, Santalum lanceolatum, Oldenlandia 
tilleacea, Millotia Kempet, Panicum helopus, Eriochloa annulata 
and Chloris truncata; whilst a few species have been added to 
our provincial flora, including at least four species new to 
science. Some critical species, particularly of the genera 
Bassia, Kochia and Atriplex, remain to be identified. 


Myosurus minimus. Claypan near Termination Hill. 

Ranunculus parviflorus. Water channels on the slope of 
Aroona Mountain. 

Ranunculus parviflorus var. Lake Weatherstone and claypans 
near Termination Hill. The same state grows abundantly 
around the “ billibongs” of the River Murray. 

Sisymbrium filifolium.. Rocky gullies, Mount Parry. 

Sisymbrium procumbens, n. sp. Claypans near Termination 
Hill. 

Sisymbrium trisectum, with yellow flowers. Claypan near 
Termination Hill. 

Erysimum Blennodia. Lake Torrens Plain. 

Capsella cochlearina. Lake Torrens Plain and at Hookina. 

Lepidium leptopetalum. Rocky gullies, Mount Parry. 

Plagianthus glomeratus. On limestone soil between Mounts 
Parry and Playfair. 

Sida (corrugata var.?) pedunculata, Cunningham. Dry water 
course of Mount Parry Creek. 

Sida virgata. By Lake Torrens on sandy soil. 

Abutilon halophilum. Depot Creek and Mount Parry Gap. 

Hibiscus Krichauffi. By Lake Torrens. 

Euphorbia erythrantha. Mount Parry and Lake Torrens 
Plain. 

Phyllanthus rigens. An intricate shrub usually about two but 
attaining to three feet high, in arid ground with spinescent 
branches ; capsules globular or ovoid, attaining to three 
lines broad and five lines long ; seeds smooth; leaves and 
young branches with short stiff pellucid hairs. Rocky 
ground, Mount Parry. 

Phyllanthus rhytidospermus? Wet ground at Yadlacena, on 
Lake Torrens Plain near Mount Parry. 

Phyllanthus Fuernrohrii. Sandhills at Ediacara, Lake Torrens 
Plain. 

Parietaria debilis. Among rocks in shady situations, Aroona 
Range. 


102 


Zygophyllum Howittii. Sandhills, Lake Torrens Plain, chiefly 
under shelter of shrubs; widely dispersed. Plant pros- 
trate, spreading to one foot or more; radicular leaves, 
three very large; flowers very small, solitary, axillary 
and pedunculate ; sepals and petals four-merous; sepals 
ovate, acute; petals yellow, barely exceeding the sepals, 
obovate, one line long, attenuated into a claw; stamens 
eight, included; filaments subulate, slightly dilated at the 
base, but not winged; ripe capsules, indehiscent, red 
fading to yellow in colour, five lines diameter and six lines 
long. 

Frankenia levis. Lake Torrens Plain; and stony ground, 
Aroona Range. 

Saponaria tubulosa. By water courses on Lake Torrens Plain; 
stony hill slopes, Mount Parry. 

Spergularia rubra. Lake Torrens Plain. 

Portulaca oleracea. Sandy beds of creeks and Lake Torrens 
Plain. 

Claytonia Balonnensis. Sandhills, Lake Torrens Plain, under 
shade of shrubs. 

Claytonia polyandra. With the last. 

Ptilotus incanus. Lake Torrens Plain and by Lake Weather- 
stone. 

Ptilotus exaltatus. Mount Parry Gap. 

Euxolus Mitchelli. Dry channels of Mount Parry and Depot 
Creeks. 

Alternanthera triandra. Wet margins of Depot Creek. 

Rhagodia spinescens. Dry beds of creeks. 

Rhagodia parabolica. With the last. 

Rhagodia nutans. Mount Parry Creek. 

Chenopodium nitrariaceum. On the dry slopes of the Aroona 
Range, this species has the form of a low intricate bush 
with very small leaves and spinescent branches. Around 
Lake Weatherstone, it is a bush about five feet high, with 
the flowering branches very long, lateral, declinous and 
spinescent. 

Atriplex nummularium. Lake Weatherstone. 

Atriplex velutinellum. Lake Weatherstone. 

Atriplex Muelleri. Depot Creek. 

Atriplex sp. Lake Weatherstone. 

Atriplex leptocarpum. Mount Parry Gap. 

Atriplex holocarpum. Kanyaka, Wonoka and northward. 

Bassia Dallachyana. Mount Parry. 

Bassia tricornis. Mount Parry. 

Bassia uniflora. Lake Torrens and Mount Parry. 

Bassia lanicuspis. Mount Parry. 

Bassia biflora. Stony ground, Termination Hill. 


103 


Bassia paradoxa. Mount Parry. 

Bassia quinquecuspis. Stony ground, Mount Parry. 

Babbagia dipterocarpa. Sandy ground, Lake Torrens Plain. 

Babbagia pentaptera. Stony ground, west flank of Mount 
Parry. 

Pee cceiiens Mount Parry Gap to Lake Torrens. 

Kochia lanosa. Lake Weatherstone. 

Kochia fimbriolata. Lake Weatherstone. 

Kochia pyramidata. Rocky gullies, Mount Parry. 

Kochia eriantha. Lake Weatherstone. 

Kochia ciliata. Lake Weatherstone. 

Kochia pentatropis, n. sp., aff. A. triptera. Limestone soil 
between Mounts Parry and Playfair. 

Aizoon quadrifidum. Sandhills, Lake Torrens Plain. 

Aizoon zygophylloides. A prostrate annual, leaves thick, 
fleshy. On calcareous loam between Mounts Parry and 
Playfair. 

Trianthema crystallina. Stony ground, Mount Parry. 

Boerhaavia repanda. About bases of red gum-trees, dry bed of 
Mount Parry Creek. 

Crotalaria dissitiflora var. eremea. Lake Torrens Plain on 
sandy ground. 

Lotus australis var. Behrianus. Lake Torrens Plain. 

Trigonella suavissima. Lake Weatherstone. 

Psoralea eriantha. Sandhills at Idyaka by Termination Hill. 

Swainsonia phacoides. Lake Torrens Plain. 

Rhynchosia minima. Aroona Creek. 

Cassia Sophera. Stony ground, Mount Parry. 

Cassia desolata. Aroona Range. 

Melaleuca glomerata. Beds of creeks in the Aroona Range ; 
Leigh Creek. 

Melaleuca parviflora. Aroona Mountain. 

Eucalyptus oleosa. Eastern slope of Aroona Range. 

Melothria Maderaspatana. Creek beds in the Aroona Range. 

Pimelea microcephala. Creeks in the Aroona Range and by 
watercourses Lake Torrens Plain. 

Hakea sp., with foliage of H. purpurea, but with a different 
inflorescence and fruit. Aroona Mountain and Mount 
Parry. 

Loranthus Exocarpi. Berry orange, turning to red and purple. 
Aroona Creek. 

Loranthus linearifolius. Berry white. Aroona and Mount 
Parry Creeks. 

Loranthus Murrayi. On Acacia aneura; sandy ground by 
Termination Hill. 

Loranthus Quandang. Berry green, with thick epicarp. On 
Acacia aneura, Lake Torrens Plain. 


104: 


Santalum lanceolatum. Berries black. Mount Parry Gap and 
to Lake Torrens. 

Santalum acuminatum. Margin of creeks and wet ground, 
Lake Torrens Plain. Pericarp red, succulent. 

Santalum persicarium. Stony ground, Aroona Range. Peri- 
carp yellow, rarely red, thin, bitter. 

Oldenlandia tilleacea. Wet sandy ground, Lake Torrens 
Plain. 

Minuria denticulata. About all claypans, Lake Torrens Plain. 

Minuria integerrima. Idyaka claypan, near Termination Hill— 
the only known station in the district. 

Pterocaulon sphacelatus. Mount Parry and Leigh Creek. 

Calotis plumulifera. Lake Torrens Plain and west slopes of 
Mount Parry. 

Pterigeron liatroides. Gullies, Mount Parry. 

Epaltes Cunninghamiul. Lake Weatherstone. 

Centipeda thespidioides. Claypans, Lake Torrens Plain. 

Myriocephalus Stuartii. Lake Torrens Plain. 

Dimorphocoma minutula. West slopes of Mount Parry and 
plain adjoining. 

Calocephalus platycephalus. Lake Torrens Plain. 

Cassinia levis. Aroona Mountain. 

Millotia Greevesii. Margins of drainage channels, Lake 
Torrens Plain. 

Millotia Kempei. Idyaka sandhills by Termination Hill. 

Helichrysum podolepideum. Limestone soil between Mounts 
Parry and Playfair. 

Helipterum polygalifolium. Hookina. 

Helipterum microglossum. Mount Parry slopes and Lake 
Torrens Plain. 

Senecio Gregorii. Lake Torrens Plain. 

Goodenia cycloptera. Sandhills, Lake Torrens Plain. 

Goodenia glauca. Mount Parry. 

Scevola spinescens. Mount Parry Gap. Leaves ¢ to 1 inch 
long, peduncles nearly twice as long; drupe purple- 
black. 

Scevola humilis. Lake Torrens Plain. 

Sarcostemma australe. Lake Torrens Plain. An erect shrub 
3 to 4 feet high ; never twining. 

Marsdenia Leichhardtiana. Twining to a considerable height, 
chiefly on Casuarina glauca. Aroona Range. 

Solanum ferocissimum. Shady places, Mount Parry Gap and 
Depot Creek. Fruit small, globular, changing with age 
from green to red and black. 

Lycium australe. Mount Parry. 

Datura Leichhardtii. Beds of creeks, Aroona Range. 

Limosella Curdieana. Idyaka claypan by Termination Hill. 


105 


Justicia procumbens. Beds of creeks, Aroona Range. Peren- 
nial and erect. 

Heliotropium Curassavicum. Around waterholes, Aroona 
Creek. 

Echinospermum concavum. Creeks, Aroona Range and Lake 
Torrens Plain. 

Teucrium racemosum. Mount Parry Gap. 

Myoporum montanum. Mount Parry Gap. 

Eremophila oppositifolia. Flowers white or pale violet, 
withering reddish-brown. Mount Parry and Aroona Creek. 

Eremophila MacDonelli. A diffuse branching shrub of about 
one foot high. Lake Torrens Plain. 

Eremophila longifolia. Flowers red. Aroona Creek and by 
watercourses Lake Torrens Plain. 

Eremophila Freelingii. Flowers lavender. Aroona Ranges. 

Eremophila Elderi. Mount Parry. 

Eremophila Duttoniu. Flowers maroon. Mount Parry, Aroona 
Creek. 

Eremophila Latrobei. Mount Parry. 

Eremophila maculata. Idyaka claypan, by Termination Hill. 

Eremophila latifolia. Flowers green. Mount Parry and 
Aroona Creek. 

Wurmbea dioica. Perianth green or yellow. Lake Torrens 
Plain. 

Triglochin centrocarpa. Wet ground, Lake Torrens Plain. 

Centrolepis aristata, var. pygmea. Idyaka, by Termination 
Hill. 

Cyperus exaltatus. Idyaka claypan. 

Cyperus vaginatus. Aroona water. 

Heleocharis acuta. Idyaka claypan. 

Fimbristylis communis. Idyaka claypan. 

Panicum reversum. Depot Creek. 

Panicum decompositum. Depot Creek. 

Panicum helopus. Depot Creek. 

Eriochloa annulata. Wet ground, Lake Torrens Plain. 

Setaria viridis. Depot Creek. 

Lappago racemosus. Lake Torrens Plain and Depot Creek. 

Spinifex paradoxus. Sandhills, Lake Torrens Plain. 

Aristida stipoides. Mount Parry Gap. 

Aristida arenaria. Lake Torrens Plain. 

Aristida ramosa. Stony bed of Mount Parry Creek. 

Aristida calycina. Stony hill slopes, Aroona Range. 

Alopecurus geniculatus. Idyaka claypan. 

Stipa scabra. Creeks and rocky places, Aroona Range. 

Astrebla pectinata. Mount Parry Gap. 

Trirhaphis mollis. Beds of creeks, Aroona Range. 

Chloris acicularis. Beds of creeks, Aroona Range. 


106 


Chloris truncata. Mount Parry Gap. 

Eleusine cruciata. Lake Torrens Plain. 

Eragrostis leptocarpa. Lake Weatherstone, Depot Creek. 

Eragrostis laniflora. Mount Parry Gap. 

Eragrostis Brownii. Mount Parry Gap and Depot Creek. 

Poa ramigera. Lake Weatherstone; claypans, Lake Torrens 
Plain. 

Festuca litoralis. Aroona Mountain. 

Diplachne loliiformis. Wet depressions between sandhills of 
Lake Torrens Plain and on slopes of Mount Parry. 

Ophioglossum vulgatum. Lake Torrens Plain and by Lake 
Weatherstone. 

Grammitis rutefolia. Mount Parry and Aroona Mountain. 

Cheilanthes vellea. Mount Parry and Aroona Mountain. 


107 


DIAGNOSES OF SOME NEW PLANTS FROM SOUTH 
AUSTRALIA, 


By Baron Srr F. von Muveuier, M.D., F.BS. &. and 
Proressor Ratew Tate, F.G.S., F.LS. &e. 


[Read August 7, 1883.] 


Dimorphocoma. 


Flower-head nearly bell-shaped. Bracts forming the in- 
volucre nine or ten, herbaceous, in two rows, narrow-lanceolate. 
Receptacle without special bracts. Flowers few. Corolla of 
the outer flowers radiating with short and narrow ligules; 
stamens none; style enclosed; stigmas exceedingly thin, 
rather acute. Innermost flowers bisexual, very few in 
number ; corolla tubular, with five short tooth-like lobes ; 
anthers very short, rounded at the base; stigmas very thin, 
papillular. Achenes of the anantherous flowers fertile, 
obconic-oblong, densely silky; their pappus consisting of 
numerous capillary bristles in several rows unequal in length, 
and of five or six linear-lanceolate inner scales. Achenes of 
the bisexual flowers exceedingly slender, glabrous ; their pappus 
formed by a few very short bristles. 

A minute annual of Central Australia, having much the 
aspect of Vittadinia australis, with short hairs, with oblong- or 
narrow-lanceolar leaves at the base and along the stem, with 
terminal solitary small flower-heads almost sessile or on short 
peduncles, and with whitish rays of the outer flowers. 

The genus, thus defined, differs chiefly from Hlachanthus and 
Isoetopsis in its anantherous flowers being ligulate, and in 
having the pappus of the fertile fruits provided not only with 
scales, but also with bristles ; from Isoetopsis it is furthermore 
distinct in habit; from Minuria it is separated by its fewer 
and broader involucral bracts, and by its anantherous flowers 
producing a scaly as well as bristly pappus. 

Dimorphocoma minutula. 

On barren stony ground, forming the western slope of 
Mount Parry, in the Aroona-Range, towards Lake Torrens. 
R. Tate. 

The specimens vary from one and a-half inch to four inches 
high, beset with septate hairs. Stems one or two or few, erect 
or ascending. Root very thin, attaining a length of three and 


108 


a half inches, producing scattered capillary fibres. Leaves flat, 
a half to one inch long; the radical leaves somewhat shorter 
and broader than the others, the uppermost narrower than the 
rest. Flower-heads about one-fourth of an inch Jong. In- 
volucral bracts nine or ten, the inner not much longer than the 
outer. Anandrous flowers eight or nine; their ligular portion 
white, hardly exceeding one line in length, undivided and acute. 
Bisexual flowers three or four; their corolla yellow, only about 
one-eighth of an inch long, gradually widening upwards. Fer- 
tile achenes nearly one and a half line long, truncated at the 
summit; their scales whitish and equal in length to the longer 
bristles, which measure about one and a half line. Sterile 
achenes with bristles of hardly one-fourth of their length. 

In flower during the early part of June, but continuing to 
September. 


[Read October 2, 1883.] 
Babbagia pentaptera. 

A small undershrub, with diffuse procumbent branches and 
numerous ascending branchlets ; leaves short, club-shaped or 
linear semi-cylindrical, glabrous and succulent; flowering 
calyces somewhat downy ; style very short ; stigmastwo; fruits 
streaked along their exceedingly short tube, only slightly 
excavated at the base, angular from five very spreading stiff 
prominences, and provided with five deltoid wedge-shaped 
vertical imperfectly denticulated wing-like membranes, yel- 
lowish, tinged with pink; seeds very depressed. 

On barren stony ground, on the western slope of Mount 
Parry, in the Aroona Range. &. Tate. 

This new Babbagia differs from its congener chiefly in 
its fruit, the base of which is very much less protracted cylin- 
drically, and the wing-like appendages being five in number, 
almost dimidiated and at least slightly toothed. Through this 
new plant a close connection is established between Babbagia 
and Kochia, more particularly so, as K. dichoptera has besides 
its horizontal fruit-membrane also five vertically-ascending 
appendages. To some extent Babbagia approaches also Bassia 
through B. salsuginosa, although the fruits are less hard and 
five-winged. 

Babbagia acroptera. 

Leaves oblong-semicylindrical ; fruit-calyx above the tubular 
base turgid, thence produced into two oblique-roundish or 
broad-cuneate completely terminal and conspicuously stipitated 
membranous appendages. 

On loamy soils, from the slopes of the Aroona-Range to 
Lake Torrens. R. Tate. Near Mount Murchison, Dr. Beckler ; 
between Stokes Range and Cooper’s Creek, Howitt. 


109 


This plant seems specifically distinct from B. dipterocarpa 
in the characteristics of its fruit, as the hollow base of the 
aged calyx is not so wide, as the appendages are neither renate 
nor half-ascending, stronger stipitated and gradually narrowed 
at their lower portion; one of the two appendages is usually 
not so well developed as the other. The peculiarities of this 
new form, as here pointed out, do not depend on an imperfect 
ripening of the fruit, as the seeds may be seen well matured. 

In Sir Joseph Hooker’s “ Icones Plantarum,”’ xi. 62, pl. 1,078, 
fruits of both species are illustrated, figure 5 representing that 
of B. acroptera and figure 6 that of B. dipterocarpa. Both 
plants occur in the vicinity of Mount Parry, though the latter 
is somewhat local ; but what we have from the Finke River and 
from Eyre Creek is solely B. dipterocarpa. An approach is 
offered by B. acroptera to the section Osteoearpum of Bassia. 


Loranthus Murrayi. 


Glabrous; leaves alternate, semiterete, slender, veinless, not 
exceeding two inches in length, somewhat attenuated at the 
base ; flowers mostly solitary, sometimes in pairs, on flattened, 
shortly winged pedicels of about half an inch long, without a 
common peduncle; bract unequally bilobed, conspicuous, 
decurrent on the pedicel; calyx-tube prominent, glaucous, its 
border truncate and obscurely toothed; petals usually six, 
about ten lines long, united to about the two-thirds of their 
length into a slightly dilated tube; corolla-tube pale yellow ; 
segments linear-lanceolate, yellow below, pale rose above; 
stigma capitate; style and filaments brown, anthers adnate, 
broadly linear; unripe fruit globular, glaucous. 

Parasitic on Acacia aneura, on sandy ground at Idyaka, near 
Termination Hill. MW. Murray and &. Tate. 

This species was first brought to notice by Malcolm Murray, 
Esq., whose kind hospitality and active promotion of the field 
labours of one of us have been the means of introducing to 
botanical science several new species; it is, therefore, with 
very great pleasure that we dedicate to him this new 
Loranthus. 

L. Murrayi is closely related to L. lineartfolius differing, 
however, in several minor particulars, and is separable from it 
and from its congeners by the peculiarity of the pedicel. 


CoRRIGENDUM. 
Vol. v., pp. 80 and 87, for Trymalium Waye read Wayit. 


110 


ADDITIONS TO THE FLORA OF SOUTH 
AUSTRALIA. 


By Proressor Raten Tarte, F.G.S., F.L.S., &. 


[Read October 2, 1883.] 


The publication of Baron Sir F. von Mueller’s “Systematic 
Census of Australian Plants, Part I., Vasculares,” has 
brought to notice the occurrence of several plants hitherto 
unrecorded for South Australia; for these Baron Mueller has 
obligingly furnished localities. A few species included in the 
subjoined catalogue had been omitted from my “Census of 
South Australian Plants” because their claims to rank as 
indigenous coustituents or as species, respectively, were at 
that time not conclusively established. The rest of the 
enumerated species are more recent accessions to the provincial 
list, and their identifications have been made or approved by 
Baron Mueller. The nomenclature herein used is adopted 
from the “Systematic Census ;” from that work and manu- 
script data supplied by Baron Mueller I have compiled the 
following tables of comparative statistics :— 


TasLe showing total number indigenous in Australia and in 
each colony. 
Dicotyledons. Monocotyledons. Acotyledons. Totals. 
228 


Australia .. ms 6,916 1,524 8,668 
West Australia .. 2,847 537 17 3,401 
South Australia .. 1,401 382 36 1,819 
Tasmania ae 691 268 66 1,025 
Victoria .. es 1,286 417 79 1,782 
N. 8. Wales 4p 2,301 652 138 3,091 
Queensland ey. 2,382 715 178 3,275 
N. Australia $3 1,390 394 32 1,816 


Total species restricted to each colony. 
Dicotyledons. Monocotyledons. Acotyledons. Totals. 


West Australia .. 2,203 345 0 2,548 
South Australia .. 134 13 1 148 
Tasmania sits 144 22 6 172 
Victoria .. a3 44 6 0 50 
N.S. Wales te 362 74 15 451 
Queensland € 728 155 62 945 
N. Australia at 590 113 3 706 


The ratio of the Monocotyledons to the Dicotyledons is for 
the whole flora 1 : 4°53, and is considerably greater than that 
for these classes of the world’s vegetation ; this is attributable 


111 


to the high ratio for West Australia, which is 1:53. The 
relative proportions of the species of the two classes is for 
South Australia 1 : 3°7, for New New South Wales and North 
Australia 1 : 35, and for Queensland 1: 3°3; falling to 1:3 
for Victoria and 1 : 2°6 for Tasmania. 


The Pepconaaes of peculiar species for each colony are :— 


West Australia >t 74r SG 
North Australia FOS ts te 
Queensland _... ... 28°78 
Tasmania peeemi 5 te 
New South Wales x LESE 
South Australia Piast hie ee 
Victoria in sad ent An. 


The schematic form of the ‘‘ Systematic Census”’ affords at 
a glance the regional distribution of the species; and it will 
not escape notice of the analytical reader that the initial 
letters S.A. are wanting to bridge over a hiatus in the longi- 
tudinal range of a few species. Thus there are 21 which are 
common to extratropical parts of West Australia and corres- 
ponding regions on the east side of continent, but are absent 
from South Australia Of these, which are not maritime 
species of intratropical origin, the following may be expected 
to occur within the boundaries of our province :— 

1. Species unrecorded for South Australia, though probably 
inhabiting the more humid parts of the province :—Ranunculus 
hirtus, Bossiea cordigera, Calocephalus angianthoides, Stypandra 
glauca, Scirpus arenarius, Chorizandra eymbaria, Lsoetes Drum- 
mondi and Phylloglossum Drummondit. 

2. Species unrecorded for South Australia, though probably 
inhabiting the arid regions of this province, towards the Tropic 
of Capricorn :—Cassytha racemosa, Dodoneaadenophora, Psoralea 
cinerea, Canavalia obtusifolia, Acacia ixiophylla, Xanthosia Atkin- 
soniana, Lambertia formosa, Conospermum stechadis, Cucumis 
trigonus, Lindernia (Vandellia) alsinoides, Lippia nodiflora, 
Andr opogon contortus and A. Halepensis. 

_ The following species recorded for South Australia in the 
Systematic Census of Australian Plants are omitted, for the 
present, by the advice of Baron Sir F. von Mueller, as their 
occurrence within South Australian boundaries wants confirma- 
tion :—Stenopetalum robustum, Hibiscus Huegelii, Securinega 
Leucopyrus. 


Hibbertia hirsuta, Bentham in Fl. Aust. I., 26. Sandy ground 
by margin of alluvial flats in the valley of Meadows 
Creek. ” Tepper and Tate. 

Capparis lasiantha, R. Brown; I., 94. Cooper’s Creek. 
Gregory. 


112 


Bergia perennis, F. v. M.; I., 181. Near the River Finke, 
Central Australia. Rev. H. Kempe. 

Beyeria uncinata, F. vy. M.; VI., 65. Murray Scrub near the 
Great Bend. F. v. Mueller. 

Phyllanthus rigens, J. Mueller; VI., 99. Aroona Range, Far 
North. &. Tate. 

Phyllanthus australis, J. Hooker; VI.,108. Kangaroo Island. 
R. Tate. 

Babbagia pentaptera, F. v. M. and Tate. Mount Parry, 
Aroona Range. #. Jute. 

Babbagia acroptera, F.v. M. and Tate. Lake Torrens Plain, 
by Aroona Range. 

Rhagodia Preissii, Moquin; V.,155. About the head of the 
‘Great Australian Bight. ‘Eucla, Richards; between 
Ooldea and Ooldabinna, Young ;” Mundayarra sand-patch, 
east from Wilson Bluff. #. Tate. ‘“ Yorke Peninsula. 
Salmon.” See Frag. Phyt. xii., 15. 

Emex australis, Steinheil; V., 262. Near Adelaide and Hold- 
fast Bay. #. v. M. in Fl. Austral. 

Herniaria incana, Lamarck. Moist sandy ground ty the 
Murray River, near Blanchetown, and at Aroona Water, 
Far North. R. Tate. 

This species “has, as an indigenous plant, a wide range 
through the countries around the Mediterranean area, 
and has found its way also to South Africa. If it was 
a native with you, I should think we must have traced 
it like Cressa cretica, and some other Mediterranean 
plants, across from N.W. Australia. Nothing would be 
easier than the introduction of such a weed by emballage.” 
—F. von Mueller zn litteris. The genus is unrepresented 
in the Australian Flora, and to me it is difficult, in view 
of its environments and stations, to account for its in- 
troduction. 

Aischymomene indica, Linné; II., 27. Charlotte Waters, 
Central Australia. C. Giles. 

Tephrosia spherospora, F. v. M. in “‘ Southern Science Record,” 
May, 1888. Near the River Finke, Central Australia. 
Rev. H. Kempe. 

Acacia Peuce, F. v. M.; II.,323. N. of Wills Creek. Howitt’s 
Exped. in F1. Austral. 

Acacia cochlearis, Wendland; II,, 324. Port Lincoln. Fide 
Ff, o. MM. 

Acacia aspera, Lindley; II., 347. Murray River. Fide 
mA 

Acacia pyrifolia, DeCandolle; II., 376. Finke River. Rev. 
H. Kempe. 


113 


Acacia pravifolia, F. v. M.; Frag. Phyt.,I.,4. Crystal Brook, 
Flinders and Elder Ranges. FF. v. M. 

Acacia trineura, F. v. M.; II, 381. Murray River. Fide 
Ws MM. 

Acacia cyclops, Cunningham ; II., 388. Near Eucla. Oliver. 

Acacia doratoxylon, Cunningham; II., 403. Near Cooper’s 
Creek. Fide F. v. WM. 

Eucalyptus amygdalina, Labillardiere; TII., 202. Nangwarry 
Forest and Tarpeena. J. #. Brown and R. Tate. 

Hydrocotyle tripartita, R. Brown; III., 341. Kangaroo 
Island. &. Tate. 

Loranthus Murrayi, F. v. M. and R. Tate; Trans. Roy. Soc., 8. 
Aust., vol. vi. Idyaka near Termination Hill in the 
Aroona Range. J. Murray and BR. Tate. 

Brachycome melanocarpa, Sonder and F. v. M.; III., 511. 
River Murray. Ff v. i. 

Aster exiguifolius, F. v. M.; III., 478. Bunda Cliffs, Great 
Australian Bight, R. Tate, 2--79; Fowler’s Bay; Mrs. 
Annie Richards, 10-’80. 

Epaltes Tatei, F. v. M., Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 1883. Hast 
side of Lake Alexandrina, &. Tate; vicinity of Spencer 
Gulf, F. von Mueller. 

Eriochlamys Knappi, F. v. M.; ‘‘ Melbourne Chemist,” May, 
1888. Near the River Finke, Central Australia. ev. 
H. Kempe. 

Calocephalus Drummondii, Bentham; III., 574. Port Lincoln. 
S. Dixon. The Gnephosis skirrophora in the geographic 
columns ¢ and d in Census of S. Aust. Plants belongs 
here—Ardrossan. Tepper. Scrub-lands at Inkermann, 
Munno Parra, and at Highbury; stony hill slopes, Fifth 
Creek, near Adelaide; and scrub-lands at east side of 
Lake Alexandrina. WR. Tute. 

Achnophora Tatei, F. v. M.; Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 1883. 
Kangaroo Island. 2. Tate. 

Dimorphocoma minutula, F. v. M. and Tate; Trans. Roy. Soc. 
S. Aust., 1888. Mount Parry, Aroona Range. A&. Tate. 

Senecio spathulatus, A. Richard ; IIT.,665. MacDonnell Bay. 
Ero. 

Senecio australis, A. Richard; III., 668. Near the Glenelg 
River, Ff. v. i. 

Lobelia platyealyx, F. v. M.; IV., 133. Kangaroo Island. #&. 
Tate. 

Goodenia elongata, Labillardiere ; IV., 74. Near the Glenelg 
River. F. v. i. 

Samolus platyphyllus, F. v. M., in “Systematic Census,” p. 91. 
Finke River. Rev. H. Kempe. 

H 


‘114 


Mitrasacme pilosa, Labillardiere; IV., 353. Mount Burr 
Range. &. Tate. 

Mitrasacme distylis, F. v. M.; IV.,359. Clarendon. O. Tepper. 

Solanum nigrum, Linné; IV., 446. Mount Lofty, # v. IL; 
Kangaroo Island, Waterhouse, Tate; cultivated grounds 
in the South-East, Rev. J. EL. T. Woods; waste places about 
Adelaide, Mannum and other stations on the River 
Murray; Ediowie, Far North, R. Tate; Ardrossan, Tepper. 

Thelymitra Mackibbinii, F.v. M.; “Melbourne Chemist,” 1881. 
T. rubra, Fitzgerald, in “ Gardeners’ Chonicle,” 1882, which 
was instituted on South Australian specimens, is referred 
to the above by Baron F. von Mueller (vide “Southern 
Science Record,” June, 1882). Sandy scrub-lands at 
Highbury near Adelaide, and Tintaro, Maclaren Vale; 
stony ground on the higher parts of the Mount Lofty 
Range. R. Tate. Yallum, near Penola (Miss Allen!). 

Diuris punctata, Smith; VI., 326. Near the Glenelg River. 

Prasophyllum australe, R. Brown; VI., 337. Near the Glenelg 
River. fF. vo. 

Damasonium australe, Salisbury; VII., 186. Near Strath- 
albyn. iv. I, 4-48. Marshes by River Murray at 
Mannum. Af. Tate. 

Juncus homalocaulis, F. v. M.; VII., 128. Near the Glenelg 
River. F. v. M. (1857). 

Restio complanatus, R. Brown; VI., 228. Near the Glenelg 
River. Fv. i. 

Kyllinga intermedia, R. Brown; VII., 251. River Torrens. 
F. v. M., in 1848. 

Heleocharis acicularis, R. Brown; VII., 297. River Murray. 
FP. v. M. 

Fimbristylis ferruginea, Vahl; VII, 312. River Finke, 
Central Australia. Rev. H. Kempe. 

Fimbristylis Neilsoni, F. v. M.; VII., 320. Near the Darling 
River. Teste & v. AL. 

Scheenus aphyllus, Boeckler; VII., 8361. River Murray near 
the Great Bend. FF. v. I. 

Schenus deformis, Poiret; VII., 364. Memory Cove, Port 
Lincoln. &. Brown, in Fl. Austral. 

Schenus capillaris, F.v. M.; VIL, 377. Near the Glenelg 
River. Fv. DL. 

Schenus spherocephalus, Poiret; VII., 380. Mount Burr 
Range. &. Tate. 

Lepidosperma exaltatum, R. Brown; VII., 389. Near the 

~ Glenelg River. Robertson and F. v. I. 

Lepidosperma longitudinale, Labill.; VII., 389. Near the 

Glenelg River. F vo. I. 


115 


Lepidosperma globosum, Labill.; VII., 394. Near the Glenelg 
River. F. v. W. 

Cladium Radula, R. Brown; VII., 417. Mount Burr Range. 
R. Tate. 

Panicum Crus-Galli, Linné ; VII., 479. Near Hahndorf (pro- 
bably mtroduced). #. v. WZ. Reedbeds near Adelaide. 
ti. Tate. -. 

Panicum Mitchelli, Bentham; VII., 489. Cooper’s Creek. 
Howitt’s Exped. (F 1. Austral.) 

Andropogon exaltatus, R. Brown; VII., 532. R. Torrens, 
Crystal Brook, Flinders Range, F. v. I.; and Lake Eyre, 
Andrews (Fl. Austral.). Aroona Range and Lake Torrens 
Blam. #. Tate: 

Stipa teretifolia, Steudel ; VII., 567. On rocks at high water- 
mark, north coast of Dudley Peninsula, Kangaroo Island. - 
R. Tate. 

Alopecurus geniculatus, Linné; VII., 555. Spencer and St. 
Vincent Gulfs to the River Murray, F. v. IZ, in FI. 
Austral. Near Penola, Rev. T. Woods. Claypans on Lake 
Torrens Plain, by Aroona Range, R. Tate. 

Poa Billardieri, Steudel; VII., 651. Near the Glenelg River. 
2 a a) 

Festuca duriuscula, Linné; VII., 663. Flinders and Barossa 
Ranges. F. v. ., in Fl. Austral. 

Eragrostis eriopoda, Bentham; VII., 648. Towards the 
Darling River. Teste F. v. IL 

Lycopodium Carolinianum, Linné; VII., 675. Bogs about 
Mounts Compass and Jagged. 2. Tate. 

Botrychium ternatum, Swartz; VII., 690. Kangarilla near 
Clarendon. O. Tepper. 

Pteris arguta, Aiton (P. tremula, R. Br.) ; VIL, 731. Rocky 
waterhole five miles back from Streaky Bay. fs. A. 
Richards. Limestone cave about eight miles from Penola 
on the road to Millicent and near Glencoe. R&R. Tate. 


116 


THE BOTANY OF KANGAROO ISLAND, 


Prefaced by a Historical Sketch of its Discovery and Settlement, 
and by Notes on its Geology, 


By Proressor Ratpu Tare, F.G-.S., F.L.8. &e. 
[Read August 7, and September 4, 1883.] 


INTRODUCTION. 


The large size of Kangaroo Island suggests the question, 
has it that amount of geographical independence which suffices 
to produce a flora and fauna different from those of the main- 
land? In other words, are its floral and faunal constituents 
distinct from the inhabitants of the adjacent continent ? With 
the exception of the flora little has been done to elucidate the 
natural history of the island, though some of its animal 
species are diagnostically known, yet [ am not aware if any 
other than a few conspicuous species have been recorded from 
the mainland; at any rate, no systematic comparison has been 
undertaken. In respect to its flora the case is different, as 
also that of the continent; botanical records have been more 
systematic, and in consequence the botanical geography of 
Australia is very far in advance of its zoological geography. 
Formerly, authors were content to speak of animal objects as 
coming from New Holland or Australia; and even now when 
localities are given, it not infrequently happens that they are 
widely inaccurate, so that it is, at the present time, hardly 
possible to elaborate zoological provinces, or to bring into 
co-ordination animal colonies with well-defined climatological 
and botanical features. 

Iam sorry to say that no help can be obtained from the 
South Australian Museum in working out the question, has 
Kangaroo Island any peculiar species of animals? And the 
Herbarium of our Phytologic Museum is similarly valueless as 
concerns botanical information. 

It may be mentioned incidentally, that there does not exist 
any connected account of the zoology of the island as resulting 
from the observations or collections made by Mr. Waterhouse, 
who spent there some months of the year 1861, in making col- 
lections by command of the South Australian Government. 
Some longicorn beetles would seem, however, to have fallen 


117 


into the hands of Mr. Pascoe*, who described two species. 
Peron} made large collections during a month’s stay at the 
island, and has given us a general view of its animal inhabitants, 
both of sea and land. A few of the insects are described by 
Boisduval; some reptiles by Gray and Dumeril; and the marine 
shells by Lamarck in his “‘ Animaux sans Vertebrés.”’ 


Historica SKETCH OF THE DISCOVERY AND OF THE PROGRESS 
OF OccCUPATION OF THE ISLAND. 


Kangaroo Island was discovered by Flinderst during his 
survey of the southern shores of the continent. Coming from 
the westward, he sighted the north coast of the island on 
March 21, 1802; made for the most northern promontory, 
which he named Port Marsden, and anchored off Kangaroo 
Head. The next day a party of the ship’s company landed to 
procure a supply of fresh meat, which was abundantly furnished 
by numerous kangaroos, and “in gratitude for so seasonable a 
supply, I named this southern land Kanguroo (sie) Island.’’ The 
ship remained at its anchorage until March 24, but returned 
April 1. On this second visit a party explored Pelican Lagoon, 
and traversed the narrow isthmus which connects Dudley 
Peninsula with the main mass of the island. Flinders says very 
little about the natural features, but references will be made 
in their proper connection. A final leave was taken on April 
6, and on the 8th of the same month Flinders met his rival, 
Captain Baudin, commanding the French corvette Le Geo- 
graphe, in Lacépéde: Bay, and communicated to him, among 
other discoveries, that of Kangaroo Island. 

The island, which was sighted by Baudin on April 9, was 
named by him Decrés Island. On this voyage, it would appear, 
that he only skirted the north coast, on his way through In- 
vestigator’s Straits to the Great Australian Bight; as the 
author§ of the narrative of the expedition writes :—“ The 
geography of Decrés Island was not complete—gulfs not ex- 
plored. A second campaign to this region was then still indis- 
pensable”’ (loe. cit., I., p. 332). 

On January 2, 1803, Baudin commenced the circumnaviga- 
tion of the island, starting from Cape Willoughby, its eastern 
extremity, by the south coast, naming the capes and bays— 
most of which are still known by their original names—and on 
January 6 anchored in Nepean Bay, off Kingscote. Here a 


* “ Journal of Entomology,” II., 1863. 
T ‘* Voyage de Decouvertes aux Terres Australes,” vol. ii., pp. 76-83. 
{ “A Voyage to Terra Australis,” 1814. 


§ F. Peron, ‘‘ Voyage de Decouvertes aux Terres Australes, sur les Cor- 
vettes le Geographe et la Naturaliste, 1800-4.” Vol. i., 1807; vol. ii., 1816. 


118 


portion of the expedition remained nearly a month, and the 
members of the scientific staff occupied themselves in investi- 
gating the natural productions, though it is evident that no 
attempt was made to penetrate beyond the immediate vicinity 
of the shore line, else Cygnet River would most certainly have 
been discovered. Peron remarks, that this island appeared 
almost entirely wanting in fresh water, and it was only near 
to the close of the cireumnavigation that water was obtained 
by digging wells at the east side of Hog Bay, which circum- 
stance 1s recorded on the surface of a slab of mica slate, which 
also marks the site of a well. The inscription was imperfectly 
legible when I saw it in 1878. 

Peron’s account of the natural history and physical features 
of the island is not only graphic, but rich in details, and occu- 
pies many pages of his second volume. It remains to this day 
the only published general description of the island. 

Flinders and Peron have each remarked on the absence of 
any trace of man’s sojourn on the island. 

After Baudin, the next visitor to the island was. Captain 
Sutherland, who published in 1819 “glowing and exaggerated 
accounts of it.” So writes John Stephens (“ History of the 
Rise and Progress of South Australia,” p. 26; 1839). 

The first extensive settlement was by the South Australian 
Company, who had selected 300 acres for their establishment, 
and by virtue of which they leased 5,120 acres of pasturage. 
The Company contemplated the salting and curing of beef and 
pork, and the pursuit of whale, seal, and other fisheries. They 
fixed a station at Kingscote for the re-victualling and re-fitting 
of their ships, and worked a farm on the Cygnet River, nine 
miles off. During 1836 and 1837 several ships discharged the 
Company’s servants and emigrants at Kingscote; but the great 
bulk of the emigrants shortly afterwards proceeded to Adelaide, 
leaving some of the Company’s people to retain a settlement 
on the island. (Abridged from Stephens’s “History of South 
Australia,’ 1839.) . 

Settlement on a small scale had, however, taken place many 
years before by sealers and runaway sailors, who cultivated a 
little wheat, potatoes, turnips &c., but subsisted largely by 
sealing and kangaroo hunting—the skins being sold or ex- 
changed to whalers. One settler on the Cygnet River had 
been there since 1824; a party had settled at Western River 
‘ about 1827, and resided there several years; and another at 
American River prior to 1836.. These primitive settlers had 
living with them a few aboriginals, whom they had induced to 
follow them from the main. 

According to the testimony of Inspector Tolmer (see his 
“ Reminiscences,” &c., 1882), Kangaroo Island, in the year 


119 


1844, was an asylum for the offscourings of Australian society, 
including escaped convicts and deserters, with whom were 
aboriginal women from Tasmania, Port Lincoln and Cape 
Jervis, earning a precarious livelihood by hunting and a little 
cultivation. From the same author we gather that in 1844 
there were residents at Hog Bay, Point Morrison and Ante- 
chamber Bay, in addition to those previously mentioned. 

The first pastoral leases were granted in 1851, and comprised 
twelve square miles at Cygnet River and six at Smith’s Bay. 
Since this date nearly the whole island has gradually been 
brought into use for sheepfarming ona small scale; but it was 
not till 1882-3 that any large importation of sheep took place, 
when Messrs. Taylor & Co. stocked their runs in the south- 
western parts of the island with sheep brought from the Mount 
Gambier district. 

The first land sales were made 15 years after the foundation 
of the settlement at Kingscote, and purchases of small blocks 
averaging 100 acres continued io be made for the next 20 

ears. 
: At and near Kingscote 468 acres were purchased during 
the years 1851-8; at Cygnet River, 1,087 acres during 1851-71; 
at Shoal Point, 127 acres during 1855-58; about Hog Bay, 
1,068 acres during 1857 to 1863. 

By proclamation 13th August, 1874, the Hundred of Dudley, 
comprising 21,975 acres, was offered for selection, and the first 
selection was taken out September 19, 1876. On April 11, 
1878, the Hundred of Menzies was proclaimed, and 37,302 
acres offered for selection, and the first sales were made 
January 24, 1882. On May 10, 1883, the Hundred of Haines, 
embracing the south shore of Nepean Bay, was proclaimed, 
but the land has not yet been offered for sale. 


SURFACE FEATURES. 


‘Of all islands belonging to the Australian system, Kangaroo 
Island is the second in point of size; it is of an oblong 
shape, attenuated in its eastern third into the Peninsula of 
Dudley ; the longer diameter, which is nearly due east and 
west, is 90 miles; the breadth of the main mass is about 25 
miles, and of the peninsular portion ten miles; and its cir- 
cumference is not less than 300 miles. Its area is about 1,500 
square miles. 

Kangaroo Island bridles the deep indentation of the main 
known as St. Vincent Gulf, and is separated from the Cape 
Jervis Promontory by Backstairs Passage, which is eight miles 
wide at its narrowest part; the other entrance to St. Vincent 
Gulf is Investigator’s Straits, which is 28 miles broad at the 
narrowest part between Cape Spencer, on Yorke Peninsula.. 


120 


The whole of the south side is exposed without protection to 
the impetuous waves of the vast Southern Ocean. 

In regard to the surface features the only author who has 
occupied himself with them is Peron, and as his observations in 
relation to the littoral tracts are the most extensive, I reproduce 
them here. He says Kangaroo Island “does not present, despite 
its great extent, any form of mountains properly so-called ; the 
entire framework of the country is composed of hills more or 
less elevated, but of which the summits are nearly everywhere 
regular and uniform. All the length of the south coast its 
cliffs are developed upon a single plan from 200 to 300 feet 
high, sloping inland, but presenting to the sea a perpendicular 
front surrounding it as a rampart. Their colours are sombre, 
and vary from grey to brown, or even blackish; where least so 
they are of a yellowish ochre or more or less dirty. From Cape 
Bedout to the Ravine des Casoars the rocks present the same 
appearance as those on the south coast, but are higher; and 
though they are deprived of all kinds of trees, yet the interior 
cliffs are seen to be wooded. The north coast is arid and 
naked as that of the south, and exhibits everywhere a similar 
constitution. The shores of Bougainville [Nepean] Bay are 
formed of low cliffs, but the verdure which covers them and the 
forests which grow on the heights give to this part a more 
pleasing and agreeable aspect. Such appears to the eyes of 
the circumnavigator the greatest island of New Holland; 
however, the view pictured with rigorous exactitude for its 
shores might have doubtlessly become more interesting and 
more varied had it been possible to penetrate into the interior 
of the country.” 

The picture drawn by Peron is not at all exaggerated, and 
the interior is alike marked by uniformity of a rather cheerless 
type. The country is undulating, not at all rangy; the 
northern half is elevated, rising from the coast in bold cliffs; 
the southern half gradually sinks to near sea level, but is 
margined by hills of consolidated sand-dunes, which rise to 
considerable elevation—Mount Bloomfield and Mount Mary, 
at Vivonne Bay, are respectively 272 and 224 feet. 

The chief watershed is nearly longitudinal and supra-medial 
—commencing near Cape Borda, and with a slight southerly 
curve, changing to north, to terminate in the sea cliffs from 
Point Morrison to American River. It is continued into 
Dudley Peninsula, which it traverses in a medial direction. 
The aspect of this elevated ground is of the most modest type, 
and is apparently of about the same altitude throughout, pro- 
bably nowhere exceeding a thousand feet. 

To the north of the main watershed there is a minor one, 
which follows the trend of the coast from Kingscote to Cape 


121 


Borda. Part of it, called the Freestone Range, is by contrast 
with the rest of the island bold and picturesque, and is clothed 
with timber. Mount McDonnell‘is 984 feet elevation ; from 
this point the general elevation falls to the westward, though 
the heights by the sea coast still maintain considerable altitude, 
such as between Middle and Western Rivers at 658, Cape 
Forbin 560, Cape Borda 506. Between the two watersheds 
there intervenes the valley of the Cygnet River, which, after a 
course of 40 miles, enters Nepean Bay. It has its source in 
several large lagoons. Excepting the Stun’sail-boom and rivers 
to the westward of it, none of the watercourses on Kangaroo 
Island are perennial. 


; GEOLOGY. 
From personal observation, I classify the rocks as indicated 
by the subjoined table :-— 
TERTIARY. 
. Recent sand-dunes. Lacustrine deposits. 
. Pleistocene. Calciferous sand-rock of the south coast and 
marine beds. 
. Pliocene. Pluvial drifts. 
. Miocene. Bryozoal limestone of Roll’s Point. 
PALZOZOIC. 
. Diorite and intrusive granite. 
. Pre-silurian schists and associated strata. 


Peron had notified the presence of No. 6, No. 4, No. 1 and 
No. 2, about which last he devotes several pages to the con- 
sideration of its origin, and that of the petrified remains 
entombed in it. 

Mr. Brough Smyth, in his Geological Map of Australia, 1875, 
colours Kangaroo Island to represent Tertiary, except the 
eastern half of Dudley Penmsula, which is shown as Silurian. 
I know not whence he derived his information, but, like that 
for much of our province, it is very erroneous. Had Peron been 
consulted, such adverse criticism would have been uncalled for. 

Pre-Sinue1an Scuists.—As correctly observed by Peron, 
Kangaroo Island “is composed essentially of different kinds of 
primitive schists, between which are found some veins of opaque 
quartz. All the eastern part of Bougainville Bay | Nepean 
Bay] is principally composed of a red and very hard ferrugin- 
ous sandstone ; it is to this singular rock that Kangaroo Head, 
Cape Geographe, Red Cape and Vendome Cape owe the reddish 
and sombre tint which distinguishes them from afar. A primi- 
tive sandstone, quartzose and very compact, forms some parts 
of the coast."’ The prevailing rock is a mica schist, which is 
displayed in magnificent sections along the north coast of 


He» Oo Noe 


GO 1 


122 


Dudley Peninsula, about American River, Point Morrison, 
Bay of Shoals, and to the westward along the north coast. 
From Cape Willoughby to Antechamber Bay, it is associated 
with gneiss and [metamorphic? | granite ; and the almost vertical 
stratification is rendered visible at the distance of some miles 
by the alternation of the diversified coloured massive beds. 

The prevailing dip of the strata on the north-west coast of 
Dudley Peninsula is south-east, and the same direction is 
observable in the micaceous beds of the gorge of the Hog Bay 
River. 

At Christmas Cove and extending westward towards Kan- 
garoo Head along the shore-line, there are intercalated bands of 
angular and subangular pebbles, chiefly of quartzite, and in the 
ageregate of many feet in thickness; the pebbles varying in 
size from six inches in diameter to small gravel, and their 
bedding planes are coincident with the plane of foliation. 
These rocks are comparable with those constituting the Cape 
Jervis Promontory, though no crystalline lmestones are here 
developed, and are doubtlessly coeval with them. Mica slate 
constitutes the bold inland cliffs on the Hog Bay River, about 
two miles from its mouth; and it also forms the base of an 
unnamed cape, three miles to the west of the mouth of that river. 
Most of the headlands on the south and west coasts are com- 
posed of, or are based upon, granite, but whether of metamor- 
phic or intrusive origin cannot definitely be ascertained; yet 
the presumptive opinion is that it forms part of the metamor- 
phic series. Such formation constitutes Cape Willoughby, 
Cape Gantheaume, Pelorus Islet, Cape Du Couedic, Cape 
Borda, &c. Inland the exposures of mica slate are not frequent, 
because of the widespread covering of superficial detritus, 
derived from the mica slate and associated micaceous sand- 
stones, more or less in place. However, they are sufficiently 
numerous to place beyond doubt that the greater part of the 
island is constituted of this rock. Among the more extensive 
outcrops may be mentioned those near Birchmore’s and White 
Lagoons, the ridge separating the latter from Murray’s Lagoon, 
and the beds of the Harriet and Stun’sail-boom Rivers. 

Ienrovs Rocxs.—A white granite, apparently intrusive, is 
quarried near Karatta, on the Stun’sail-boom River. A diorite 
seems largely to have determined the direction of the elevated 
ground known as Freestone Hill Range. 

Miocene.—Forming a low mural cliff at Roll’s Point, 
Kingscote, is a bryozoal limestone, similar in structure and of 
the same age as that of the cliffs about Oyster Bay, Yorke 
Peninsula. Among the common fossils, proper to this particular 
formation of this period, Echinolampas Gambierensis is note- 
worthy. The deposit is continued along the shore for about a 


123 


mile south of Roll’s Point, and inland is traceable over a 
limited area by the presence of a white travertine lmestone 
crust, chemically deposited from the underlying organic lime- 
stone. Both these formations are evidently referred to by 
Peron in the following passage:—“ At many points of Bougain- 
ville Bay there occur two kinds of calcareous rocks; the one 
harder in the grain, of a more homogenous nature, approaching 
in nature some sandstones; the other more like chalk. These 
calcareous stones are ordinarily superposed upon the schistose 
rocks, as well as upon the primitive sandstone; they may be 
seen at 50 or 60 feet above sea level, and at this elevation con- 
tain a great quantity of detritus and debris of petrified shells.” 

PriocENE Drirr.—In the small bight on the west side of 
Roll’s Point, Kingscote, there may be seen resting against, and 
partially overlying the Miocene limestone, red loams and _ 
mottied clays, which have been shed from the metamorphic 
rocks constituting the elevated ground which terminates sea- 
ward at Kingscote Point. Similar beds are exposed on the 
western flank of the same ridge, along the east shore of the 
Bay of Shoals. But the most extensive section is that pre- 
sented by the sea-cliffs, called ‘‘Red-banks” from the prevail- 
ing colour of the formation, which has a depth above sea level 
of about 100 feet. At this place we have evidently the remnant 
of an extensive plain constituted of the residuum of disinte- 
grated rocks and of the diluvium brought down by surface 
drainage from the rocks forming the high lands to the east and 
south. Similarly the valley of the lower part of the Cygnet 
River is composed of loams, varying from clayey to sandy, as 
is shown in the deep banks confining the river and by the cha- 
racter of the soil. This formation is destined to play an im- 
portant part in the réle of the future agricultural history of 
the island, as it has done already in a slight measure. It 
affords the only soil of value, and I am sorry to have to say 
that its superficial area is comparatively small. On the map 
are indicated the chief Pliocene basins. One other claims 
special reference, it is that resting on the north flank of the 
Freestone Range, which owes its more argillaceous character to 
the disintegration of the diorite which forms the axis of that 
elevated track. The Pliocene Drift of Kangaroo Island is 
judged, by its mode of occurrence and by its lithological cha- 
racter, to be of pluvial origin—certainly not aerial as is the 
“loess” of some parts of this colony; and the absence of 
organic remains favours this assumption. Excepting in this 
last particular, it so much resembles the “drift” of the Ade- 
laide Plain, and of others similarly constituted, that it may be 
relegated to the same period of time. 

PLEISTOCcENE.—Much of the littoral tracts about Western 


124 


Cove, Nepean Bay, are covered with recent marine deposits in 
the form of a succession of shell-banks, the most inland being 
about one mile from the present shore, and not less than about 
twenty feet above sea level. Around the head of the Bay of 
Shoals and about Pelican Lagoon the same phenomena are ob- 
servable. The whole of the southern coast-line is encumbered 
with cliffs of calcareous sand-rock and recent sand-dunes, and 
in these respects is similar to other parts of South Australian 
shores washed by the Southern Ocean, as I have described 
with some detail in “Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust.,”’ vol. IL., pp. 
67 and 113. The cliffs of calciferous sandrock attain to 
elevations of 100 to 150 feet or more, and are not infrequently 
crowned by blown sand. Mounts Mary and Bloomfield, 
Vivonne Bay, are of this character, and are respectively 272 
and 224 feet high. By chemical metamorphism, the upper 
layers of the sandrock are more firmly consolidated, and by 
natural fracture—probably through failure of support—become 
broken up into rectangular masses, usually of large dimen- 
sions, which prove most serious obstacles to horse-travel. From 
Mount Prospect to Cape Willoughby, nearly the whole way is 
encumbered by this kind of material. Peron investigated 
closely the nature and origin of this calciferous sandstone, and 
fully recognised its relationship to the sand of the dunes. I 
will, therefore, reproduce his most pertinent remarks :—‘ The 
sand of the shore is very fine, of a quartzose nature, mixed 
with about one-fifth part of finely comminuted calcareous 
matter. It is driven from the sea margin by the winds upon a 
great part of the shore into dunes 60 to 80 feet high.” 
“Tt is in the midst of this caleareous sandstone that trees 
are entombed, nay, even some entire portions of petrified 
forests. In many places, where the dunes are perpendicular, 
there may be distinguished perfectly the trunks of trees with 
their branches, and on the level surface they appear like 
broad mosaics. If these trunks are carefully examined, the 
several layers of ligneous tissue are discernible.’ Similar 
phenomena are stated by Peron to occur at Josephine Islands 
[Nuyt’s Archipelago] and on the adjacent mainland, at 
Esperance Bay, at Leuwin &c., indeed “ throughout a space of 
25° of latitude and upon as wide extent of longitude the same 
' appearances are reproduced on the south, west, and north-west 
of New Holland.” Flinders describes the same phenomena as 
observed by him at Bald Hill, King George’s Sound, but 
attributed them to coral reefs. And it has usually been con- 
sidered that Darwin was the first to present a true explanation 
of their nature and origin. Nevertheless, in this he was 
anticipated by Peron, who 40 years earlier advanced the same 
explanations, though with less chemical exactitude. He says :— 


125 


“So varied, so imposing as these phenomena are, yet they 
appear to me referrable to the same cause—a cause as simple 
as itis energetic. In effect, the numerous minute shells which 
multiply in these seas, and thrown up by millions upon the 
shore, are subject to the twofold influence of an ardent sun 
and a penetrating humidity. In losing a portion more or less 
of their carbonic acid, they tend to approach to the state of 
lime. This calcareous debris, pulverized by the action of the 
waves, becomes mixed with the sand on the shore, and forms 
with it a veritable calcareo-quartzose cement. This material 
encrusts the various substances which are found on the shore— 
shells, zoophytes, seaweeds, pebbles, all are agglutinated by it. 
Transported by the winds this active matter is deposited upon 
the neighbouring bushes—at first as a thin layer, later as a 
solidified mass embracing the stem; after this, the function of 
nutrition is impaired, the plant languishes, and while still 
living isin process of becoming petrified. On breaking the 
branches of these kinds of lithophytes there is to be seen, if 
the inerustation is recent, the ligneous tissue enveloped in a 
solid case but without any remarkable alteration ; but as the 
calcareous envelope augments, the wood is disorganised, and is 
insensibly changed into a dry and blackish debris; then the 
interior of the tube preserves a diameter nearly equal to that 
of the branch which has served it for a mould; finally the tube 
becomes filled with quartzose and calcareous particles, and 
after the lapse of some years all is converted into a solid mass 
of sandstone. I have frequently referred to those enormous 
sand-dunes, which are raised like ramparts around the isles of 
New Holland, and at various points on the mainland. They 
exceed sometimes in height that of the tallest trees, and are 
composed of a sand like that of the shore, susceptible as it is 
of solidification, often the rock which supports them is of the 
same origin. On the inner slope of these moving hills, there 
grow various species of shrubs; in such a position, sand driven 
by the winds, or washed by the rain, accumulates at the foot of 
the trees and insensibly overwhelms them. Then after long 
periods of years have elapsed, the vegetable tissue in the trunk 
is altered, after the same manner we have seen it destroy the 
branch ; the substance of the ligneous layers, being much more 
solid than that which occupies the intervals, is decomposed 
less rapidly than the Jatter; hence the concentric circles, which 
give to these extraordinary incrustations the appearance of 
true fossils, but on close observation it is easy to convince 
oneself, that these apparently petrified trees are nothing else 
than masses of more or less hard sandstone, which preserves 
only the vegetable form which had served it for a mould.” 

That elevation of the land has taken place during the exist 


126 


ence of living marine forms is incontestable, and the evidences 
are in accord with those furnished by other localities on the south 
coast of this colony (see Trans. Roy. Soc., vol. II., p. lxvii.) 
Dudley Peninsula is at the present time joined to the main 
mass of the island by an isthmus, which at its narrowest is three- 
- fourths of a mile wide. The connecting land is low; on the ocean 
side the pleistocene sand-rock forms a perpendicular cliff of 
about 40 feet high; from the summit of the cliff the surface of 
the ground slopes gradually inland till the shell-banks at a 
few hundred yards from the shore at the Head of American 
River are reached. These shell-banks have an elevation of 
from ten to fifteen feet above sea level. It has been alleged 
that the coast about American River is rising, but I am not 
satisfied on this point. From personal observation, I have 
no doubt that Pelican Lagoon is fast silting up, and it is highly 
probable that the appearances consequent thereon have given 
rise to the supposition that elevatory action has taken place 
within the last quarter of a century. The fact that Dudley 
Peninsula has recently been joined to the other part of Kan- 
garoo Island may have some significance when we come to con- 
sider the origin of the flora and fauna of the island as it now is. 


SUPERFICIAL ACCUMULATIONS AND SOILS. 


On the main portion of the island, excepting the north coast, 
the exposures of the subter rock are rare, as it is concealed by 
superficial debris in the form of sand, or gravelly ironstone, or 
clays. The nature of the superficial detritus depends on the 
nature of the subjacent rock and on relative elevation. Sands 
largely prevail, and seem to have originated, as far as the 
limited exposures will allow of generalization, from quartzose- 
sandstones. Over the micaceous slaty beds ironstone gravels 
occur on the higher ground, sand on the lower slopes, 
whilst the basin-like depressions are levelled up with clay, 
more or less calcareous in proportion to the amount of con- 
tained shelly debris. In most instances the margin of the 
inundated ground is fringed by a sheet of calcareous travertine 
of several inches thick, derived from, and including debris of, 
the shells of living species of Bulinus. Not always is the 
mollusk lving over the same area, inasmuch as through lapse 
of time the waters have acquired a too saline property for its 
existence. The large sheet of water called Murray’s Lagoon 
is in this state ; whilst its former extension and comparative 
freshness of its water are indicated by the considerable area 
above present water level covered by a white chalky clay teem- 
ing with the shells of a species of that freshwater water-snail. 

All the above described surface deposits are of local origin, 
and are, either from their mechanical properties or from abso- 


127 


lute sterility, unfit for agriculture. The very large area covered 

by these deposits has led hasty observers to condemn the whole 
island for agricultural purposes. Opinions on this head have 
been very conflicting. Flinders says:—“ The soil of that part 
of Kanguroo Island [Kahgaroo Head] examined by us was 
judged to be much superior to any before seen, either upon the 
south coast or upon the islands nearit . . . and I thought 
the soil superior to some of the land cultivated at Port Jackson, 
and to much of that in our stony counties in England.” On 
the other hand, Peron characterised the island as monotonous 
and sterile. Sutherland’s accounts were slowing ; whilst the 
early settlers at Kingscote found the character of the soil did 
not hold out any very strong inducement for permanent or 
extensive settlement. 

It is now easy to reconcile these apparently contradictory 
estimates of the character of the soil. The productive areas 
are limited and detached, and, as I have stated previously, are 
restricted to those of the Pliocene drifts. The sources of the 
material have been less local, than in the case of the more 
superficial deposits, and in consequence an intimate mixture 
of diverse mineral matters has resulted. The productiveness 
of this kind of soil is best attested by an appeal to agricultural 
statistics. The neighbourhood of Hog Bay has patches of land 
which carry as high as 50 bushels of barley to the acre ; and at 
the Cygnet River and at Freestone Range the yield of wheat and 
barley ‘last year ranged up to 30 bushels for the former and 50 
to 60 for the latter per acre. 


UsEFuL MINERALS. 


The belief that Kangaroo Island is largely metalliferous and 
possesses coal is widespread, though up to the present time no 
discoveries have been made which justify such prophetic view. 
Nevertheless, the geological structure is not incompatible with 
the existence of metalliferous deposits, though it pr ecludes the 
presence of workable coal. 

Gold.—tThe earliest discovery of this metal is that recorded 
by Mr. Tolmer in his recent work entitled “Reminiscences,” 
1882. He therein states at p. 320 of vol. I. that he found in a 
freshwater creek near Vivonne Bay ‘a quartz specimen, with 
a small portion of yellow metal embedded therein, which I have 
now no doubt was gold.” Mr. T. Willson has obtained gold 
from a quartz reef situate in the northern part of the Hundred 
of Haines, and further informs me that it has been gathered 
from detritus at Pig’s Head Flat, Dudley Peninsula. 

Tin.—Mr. Tolmer writes further that he revisited the spot 
in 1856, and obtained by washing the stuff of the bed of the 
creek about one ounce of black sand, a sample of which was 


128 


tested by Mr. G. W. Goyder, Surveyor-General, and pro- 
nounced by him to be tin. 


Copper.—Ores of this metal most certainly occur, and 
several applications for mineral claims had been granted be- 
tween the years 1861 to 1865, but in all cases the leases were 
forfeited. The sites of these claims were at Hog Bay, Cape 
St. Albans, Cuttlefish Bay, three miles south-west of Kingscote, 
twelve miles west by south of the mouth of the Cygnet River, 
and seven miles westerly from Mount MacDonnell. 


Lead.—I have been shown specimens of galena, stated to 
have come from a large vein situated to the west of Smith’s 
Bay, on the north coast. 


Petrolewm.—F rom a very early period in the history of the 
occupation of Kangaroo Island there had been known and 
used a pitch, which was collected upon the south coast; but it 
is only through the above-mentioned work of Mr. Tolmer that 
any of the observed facts have been committed to writing. He 
says:—‘‘ During my wanderings along the south coast I ob- 
served numerous fragments of a substance resembling pitch, 
which was stated to be plentiful, and to be used in lieu of the 
imported pitch in paying the seams of the vessels and boats 
built and repaired on the island. Some twenty years after, in 
1864, I revisited the island, and was conducted to the spot 
- where the petroleum exudes from the fissures in the rocks” 
(loc. cit. I., p. 820). 

In 1871 coal leases were granted by the Crown Lands De- 
partment of 10,000 acres each at False Cape and Flour-cask 
Bay; and at an earlier period borings were made in the cliff at 
a point about three miles west from the mouth of the Hog Bay 
River and at Vivonue Bay—in all these cases with the 
ostensible object of working the petroleum deposits, which 
were alleged to exist on this part of the coast, an inference 
drawn from the presence of pitch fragments on the beach. 
I have conversed with several islanders as to the place and . 
mode of occurrence of the substance, and have moreover 
inspected the site of one of the above-referred-to bore- 
holes, and the shore line of Flour-cask Bay. The sub- 
stance has been picked up at many points along the south 
coast, chiefly on the western beaches of the bays, and 
Vivonne Bay in particular was an important repository for it. 
The opinion as to the exudation of the substance from the 
rocks on the shore line is most assuredly based on erroneous 
observation, inasmuch as when thrown up beyond high tide and 
subjected to a hot sun it would be softened and insinuate itself 
among the crannies and irregularities of the surface of the 
calciterous sand-rock, and would present to the untrained 


129 


observer the appearance of having flowed from the rock, 
Moreover, the nature and origin of the surface rock preclude 
the probability of its having been contained in it. So also do 
those of the subjacent mica-schist, into which the boring was 
~ made at the spot previously indicated. Indeed, all the circum- 
stances conspire to prove, that the substance is a waif upon 
these shores. Corroborative evidence is afforded by the finding 
of the same substance at Coffin Bay, Eyre Peninsula, resin at 
Fowler Bay, beeswax at the head of the Great Australian Bight 
and gutta-percha at Eucla. Doubtlessly all have formed part of 
the cargo of some wrecked vessel. Mr. G. Dixon informs me 
that he found in 1867 a mineral pitch in the whole littoral 
tract between Cape Arid and Doubtful Island Bay, West 
Australia. Moreover, the substance, locally known as dammar, 
belongs to at least three different chemical bodies. The com- 
monest kind is black, breaking with a lustrous conchoidal frac- 
ture; melts easily and burns with a bright flame, evolving an 
asphaltic odour. On distillation it yields dark-coloured hydro- 
carbon oils and parafin, leaving a copious residue of carbon, 
without ash; it is insoluble in nitric acid, alcohol and turpen- 
tine, but is partly soluble in benzole. It resembles in appear- 
ance and properties a refined asphalt, but is more lustrous 
than that obtained at Trinidad with which it has been critically 
compared. 

Another material similar in most respects, softens under 
the fingers and is soluble in oil of turpentine and nitric acid. 
A third matter, picked up between Hog Bay and Table Cape, 
is resinous-brown with dark stripes and externally yellow, 
brittle ; burning with a bright flame and giving off an aromatic 
odour; on distillation it yields a little parafin and oils, without 
residue. It is insoluble in alcohol and nitric acid, but readily 
soluble in bisulphide of carbon. 


Coal.—In 1879 a reported discovery of good coal at Hog 
Bay raised the hopes of the Adelaide public, that the opinion 
touching the absence of coal within this colony was not to be: 
prophetic. I visited the locality, and certainly found frag-. 
ments of a steam coal in the soil of a barley-field ; but the 
presence of mica slate around the basin of drift deposit was. 
sufficient to satisfy the geologist, that the coal was not derived 
from the immediate neighbourhood. Finally I traced it to a 
discarded smithy, the rubbish of which had got mingled with 
the manure heap, and so carted to the field and worked into 
the soil. Mr. Tolmer’s “‘firm belief that coal will eventually 
be found by boring in the flats and about Hog Bay River’” 
(loc. cit. I., p. 321) must fail to find endorsement at the hands. 
of the veriest tyro in geology. 


I 


130 


CLIMATOLOGY. 


Kangaroo Island has been spoken of as the sanatorium for 
South Australia in the future ; and it well deserves this pros- 
pective reputation. The climate is characterised by a warm 
temperature, without that heat fervency in summer which is so 
familiar to residents on the mainland, by moist winds, a good 
rainfall and the absence of frosts. 


Some meteorological observations were made by Peron 
during his stay at Nepean Bay extending from January 6 to 
February 1, 1803, which I will quote:—‘The mean of our 
thermometric readings at noon were 65'6° Fahr. The 20th, 
25th, 27th, 29th and 30th January were the hottest days; the 
mercury in the shade at 2 p.m. showed on the island 81°5° 
Fahr.; the land breezes—that is to say, those from the N.E., 
N.N.E., and E.N.E.—dominated then, and we were satisfied 
that they partook of the nature of the hot winds, which desolate 
the interior of Australia. The atmosphere over the arid and 
low shores exhibits nearly always a perfect serenity. In the 
space of one month we had only a few slight showers; on 
January 15 a feeble storm which arrived from the west was 
dissipated as soon as, so to say, it had touched the shores of 
the island. The range of the hygrometer was conformable 
with the state of the atmosphere, and was comprised between 
68° and 94°, the mean term being 82°05°. But of all the results 
which were obtained of this kind the most noteworthy was the 
rapid movement of the needle towards dryness at the moment 
when the N.E. winds blew with force after midday of the 29th 
—from 94° it retrograded to 68°.” The figures given by Peron 
should not be examined rigidly ; but they suffice to show the 
relatively low temperature and the absolutely great humidity 
of the air during the second hottest month in the year. They 
are not altogether in accord with the results of -similar obser- 
vations made at Cape Borda under the direction of Mr. Todd, 
and published by him in “ Meteorological Observations for 
1880,” from which I have taken the following results. Cape 
Borda is the most north-west point of land, and the station is 
at an elevation of 506 feet above sea level :—. 


Humidity —The yearly mean— | 
Cape Borda. Adelaide. 


72 57 
The extremes—61 for February 37 for January 


82 for September 78 for June. 


131 


Temperature.— Cape Borda. Adelaide. 
The yearly mean... sh: bse OE 62°4 
Maximum, January 31 .. :..493°0 1145 
Minimum, September 26 ... 40°0 350 
Mean diurnal range for the year, 82 18°9 
Greatest diurnal range ... oo 48°0 

Rainfall—At Cape Borda, average for 12 years, 23°8 inches. 

, American River “ 1 ET” Oar ore 
Kingscote, for year 1880 BS ORE a 


The rainfall on the north coast of Kangaroo Island is about 
equal to that at Adelaide, but the other climatic elements, as 
indicated in the foregoing tables, show in what way the climate 
of Kangaroo Island is superior to that of Adelaide. The south 
coast during the summer months is visited by light and local 
showers, which do not penetrate far inland, but which doubt- 
lessly serve to maintain a perennial flow of water in the many 
channels of the south-western portion of the island. 


BorTaNICAL EXPLORATIONS. 


1. Rozerr Brown, the naturalist to Flinders’s expedition, 
carried the first botanical collection from Kangaroo Island to 
Europe. The number of species was small, but it included 
types of several new species. In the “Flora Australiensis,” 
the locality-name, Kangaroo Island, with the collector’s name, 
k. Brown, annexed, will be found recorded under 29 species 
names. Robert Brown’s opportunities for extended botanical 
work were few, and the period of his visit was unfavourable. 
From the narrative of the voyage I compile the following brief 
diary :—March 22 and 23, 1802, on shore at Kangaroo Head. 
April 2-5, 1802, on shore at Kangaroo Head; boat excursion to 
American River and Pelican Lagoon; ascended Prospect Hill, 
situated on the isthmus connecting Dudley Peninsula with the 
main mass of the island. The collection was derived almost 
entirely from the littoral tracts, and Robert Brown could not 
have seen the characteristic inland flora. 


2. Larour LescHenavtt, one of the botanists to Baudin’s 
expedition, who followed in the next year, sojourned off Kings- 
cote from January 7 to February 1, 1803; and he tells us, that 
“the island is sandy and without rivulets, that the vegetation 
is beautiful, and the plants very varied. I have discovered a 
great number of new species” (‘‘ Peron’s Voyages,” vol. II.,; p. 
366). F. Peron, the zoologist to the expedition, and the author 
of the narrative, writes:—‘‘ At the head of. this grand bay 
[Nepean Bay] there are forests which appear to extend far 
away towards the interior, and which are composed of different 


132 


species of Eucalyptus, Banksia, Phebalium, Acacia, Casuarina, 
Metrosideros, Leptospermum, WStyphelia, Conchium, Diosma, 
Hakea, Embothrium” &c., &c. (op. cit., vol. L., p. 76). From 
the narrative of the expedition it is uncertain, if other oppor- 
tunities were offered for collecting plants than during the long 
stay in Nepean Bay, unless it were at Hog Bay. Leschenault 
botanised at other parts of the Australian coasts, but the col- 
lection as a whole remains unpublished up to the present day, 
Desfontaines made a few selections from the West Australian 
plants gathered on this expedition, but with few exceptions 
not any of thé Kangaroo Island plants were described, though 
doubtless all have been identified. Mr. Bentham examined 
many of the plants of Baudin’s expedition in the Paris her- 
barium for the “Flora Australiensis,’’ but from that collection 
only two species are recorded for Kangaroo Island :—Hucalyptus 
incrassata, erroneously attributed to Labillardiere, who was 
never on the island, and Acacia dodoneifolia. Leschenault 
(loc. cit., vol. IT., p. 8366) cites a few species, which he had ob- 
served on Kangaroo Island. <A species of Micotiana, which 
grows on the sands by the sea shore’ [is certainly W. 
suaveolens]. ‘A Melaleuca, with long filiform leaves’ [is 
doubtlessly J. uncinata], and ‘“‘another with yellow flowers” 
[is probably J. squarrosa|. “Many new species of Hucalyptus.” 
“A very pretty species of Anthericum” [perhaps Arthropodium 


laxum or Bulbine semibarbata|. ‘‘A plant of the order Iridew” 
[this isin all probability Sisyrinchium cyaneum, which grows 
abundantly about Kingscote]. ‘‘A new species of Solanum” 


[ S. semile is the only species excepting the European S. nigrum 
known to occur]. “A very pretty and very singular Convolvulus 
without stem;” on Leschenault’s specimens Choisy founded 
his C. acaulis, which, according to Baron Mueller, is clearly the 
minute state of C. erubescens. To the above there should be 
added Eucalyptus diversifolia, described by Bonpland in 1813 
from specimens grown from seeds gathered at Kangaroo island 
during Baudin’s expedition. The specific name, as only ap- 
plicable to the young state of the plant, has been discarded for 
that of santalcfolia (see F. v. Mueller’s ‘“ Eucalyptographia, 
Decade 8’’). 
_ 8. For nearly half a century from the date of the visit of 
the second of the two memorable expeditions, Kangaroo Island 
was unvisited by any collector or scientific observer. Between 
the years 1849-51, Messrs. E. G. Sealey, Bannier and Henry 
Heuzenroeder went at different times to Kangaroo Island, and 
it was on the special solicitations of Baron Sir (then Dr.) F. 
von Mueller, that they brought back plants. Forty-four 
species, previously unrecorded, were brought to notice by them, 
though in the Flora Australiensis the credit is inadvertently 


133 


given to Baron Mueller, who had never visited the island, but 
by whom the species were transmitted to Mr. Bentham. — 

4. Mr. F. G. Waterhouse was sent in 1861 by the South 
Australian Government to search for insects and other zoological 
objects, and as a result of byework about a hundred species of 
plants were collected, which passed into the hands of Baron F. 
von Mueller, by whom the novelties were specially dealt with 
in vol. iv. of his “ Fragmenta Phytographie.” Five species 
new to science were the chief results of Mr. Waterhouse’s 
labours, and eighty-three species-names added to the list of the 
local flora. Mr. Waterhouse had his head-quarters on the 
Cygnet River, at a few miles from Kingscote, and spent there 
the spring and summer months. His collection of plants was 
gathered chiefly from the wooded banks of the river and the 
heath-ground adjacent thereto. 


The floral statistics at the period of the completion of the 
“Flora Australiensis”’ are as follows :— 


Number of species brought to notice by 


1. Robert Brown _... sh ft ReneS. 
2. Baudin Expedition om ‘ef aes, Mt 
3. Messrs. Sealey, Bannier, and Heuzenroeder... 44 
4. Mr. F. G. Waterhouse _... ee ee tee Cee 

160 


5. This small number of species recorded for so large an 
insular mass as Kangaroo Island remained stationary until 
1881, when largely influenced by the representations of Baron 
Mueller, I visited the island towards the close of December in 
that year, having for a companion Mr. 8. Dixon. [I had 
already in 1879 visited Hog Bay, but at an unfavourable time 
of the year for botanical work.] My explorations extended 
from Kingscote to the Cygnet River, along the south shore of 
Western Cove, to Mr. Buick’s house on the American River ; 
thence a journey was made across sandy heath-country to 
D’Estrées Bay ; from the American River travelled along west 
shore of Pelican Lagoon and Prospect Hill, and by the coast to 
beyond the mouth of Hog Bay River, inland to near the source 
of that river, the return journey following the outward track. 
The number of unrecorded species collected was 111; of these 
the following six were at that time unknown to inhabit any 
part of South Australia :—Cakile maritima, Wilsonta Backhousit, 
Styphelia striata, Ottelia ovalifolia, Caustis pentandra and 
Dichelachne sciurea. 

6. Having failed to secure local help, especially in reference 
to the collecting of vernal plants, I urged my young friend 
and late pupil, Mr. R. 8. Rogers, B.A., to undertake the task ; 


134 


and he accordingly spent from June 24 to July 13, 1882, on 
the island, dividing his stay between Kingscote and Hog Bay. 
He added four unrecorded species, one of which (Pterostylis 
precox) was new to South Australia. 

7. During the latter part of January, 1883, a more extensive 
exploration was undertaken by me than before attempted— 
this time in company with Mr. J. E. Brown, F.L.S., Conservator 
of Forests. Starting from Kingscote, we journeyed by way of 
Bay of Shoals to Freestone Hill, thence crossed the Cygnet 
River near its mouth, proceeding thence to White Lagoon, 
from the latter place following the track via Hawk’s Nest, 
Murray’s Lagoon, Mount Pleasant, to Mount Mary, Vivonne 
Bay ; thence to the Harriet River, and as far as Karatta, on 
the Stun’sail-boom River. The return journey was varied by 
following the shorter track from Mount Pleasant to the Cygnet 
River, striking however that river at four or five miles above 
the previous crossing place. 

The number of additional species collected was 75, bringing 
up the total of species now known to inhabit the island to 350. 
Of these Achnophora Tatei is the type of a new genus, and the 
following are additions to the Flora of South Australia :— 
Phyllanthus australis, Hydrocotyle tripartita and Lobelia platy- 
calya. : 

The total number of species now known to inhabit Kangaroo 
Island is absolutely small, and by reference to the appended 
list of species it may be noticed, that the number of annual 
plants is relatively meagre; and though I doubt, if Kangaroo 

Island be rich in such, yet it is not improbable, that the grassy 
slopes of the Freestone Range and the bare hills on the Dudley 
Peninsula will be found to yield some unrecorded annuals and 
other vernal plants. Its botany is not yet exhausted, and in 
addition to a re-examination of the districts already traversed 
at different periods of the year, there still awaits the explorer 
the comparatively vast region of upland country forming the 
basin of the upper Cygnet River. 

Though extremely anxious, to pursue these investigations 
until some measure of completeness is attained, yet I hesitate 
to face difficulties, which in all likelihood would be greater 
than those experienced on past occasions. Under these circum- 
stances I have thought it best to submit the information, I have 
brought together, touching the botanical productions of this 
island. 

8. [Supplemental Note.|—During the month of October, 
Mr. T. Willson, of Hog Bay, was so kind as to forward me two 
parcels of fresh plants, hurriedly collected in his immediate 
neighbourhood; among these were some ephemerous species 
hitherto unrecorded. Encouraged by this success, I revisited 


135 


Dudley Peninsula, devoting eight days in the middle of Novem- 
ber to a thorough search over its western half, with the result 
of adding 65 species to the insular flora and Stipa teretifolia 
and Schanus sculptus to the provincial flora, and Hydrocotyle 
crasstuscula, new to science. The total number now known is 
415. 


ARTIFICIAL InFLuENCES Mopiryinc VEGETATION. 

Tn the interests of phytogeography it is imperative, that we 
should without loss of time ascertain the precise nature of the 
flora of the island undisturbed by artificial modifications. In 
the lists of Robert Brown and Leschenault we have an enu- 
meration of the feral productions, but as all subsequent 
botanical collectors have for the most part worked within an 
area exposed to man’s disturbing agencies, it becomes difficult 
to eliminate from their gatherings those species, which may be 
suspected to be aliens; for in this connection we have not only 
to deal with exotics, but with immigrants of South Australian 
origin. In respect to the latter, the study of their geographical 
distribution will not always help to discern between the truly 
indigenous and the artificially introduced. The question is an 
embarrassing one to the botanist, and should be kept well in 
view, when recording the habitats and stations for all plants. 
A few species indigenous to Australia may be suspected from 
their environment to be of modern introduction in Kangaroo 
Island. 

That changes in the floral aspect are being brought about by 
man is only too obvious, and though it is not always easy to 
track these migratory plants to their original cradle; yet certain 
parts of the island will continue for a little time to come to be 
free from the disturbing agencies, to which I will now refer. 

The disturbing agencies are :— 

1. Farming and Gardening Operations —In my brief sketch of 
the history of settlement and occupation on the island I have 
indicated the localities and given the dates of settlement, as 
far as the data at my command admitted. These facts may be 
of future use, when the more obvious traces of man’s early oc- 
cupation have disappeared from the sites of some of these 
older settlements, and will explain the origin of some doubt- 
fully indigenous plant. At Duck Lagoon, on the Lower 
Cygnet River, I gathered specimens of a Linaria—evidently a 
garden escape, though all traces of garden and homestead had 
disappeared ; yet on inquiry I learnt, that many years ago a 
hut and enclosure existed on the very spot. 

2. Depasturing of Sheep—Sheep in small flocks have been 
scattered over much of the island for many years; but it is only 
within the last two years, that any importation in large num- 


136 


bers has been attempted by the Messrs. Taylor Brothers, who 
have brought sheep from the South-East to stock their run in 
the south-west portion of the island. Sheep are important 
agents of transport of such plants, whose seeds are readily en- 
tangled in their wool; and it will not be unexpected, if some of 
the south-eastern plants should make their appearance. From 
the stations, at which I found Acena sanguisorbe, I have con- 
cluded, that the dispersion of the plant has been effected by 
sheep, as in almost all instances it occurs about sheep stations 
or watering places. However, the species is truly endemic, as 
Robert Brown collected it in 1802, though I believe it has been 
introduced into many of the localities, at which I met with it. 
The constant cropping of the more edible shrubs and herbs— 
and of these there are few—by sheep must materially disturb 
the balance of plant life, tending towards the extinction of the 
preferred species and the increase of the rejected. 

3. Periodie Burnings of the Scrub.—So scanty is the feed in 
the scrub lands, that it has become the practice of the sheep- 
farmers to burn off the bushy growth and depasture the sheep 
on the herbaceous plants and the tender shoots of the arbo- 
reous species, with which the burnt ground soon becomes scantily 
clothed. Though grass covers much of the coast hills, yet it is 
abandoned by the sheep in favour of the herbage of the burnt 
lands; moreover, sheep are subject to a wasting and fatal 
disease, known as “coast sickness,” 1f pastured continuously on 
these littoral tracts. The burning of the scrub calls into 
being some few species that are rarely or ever seen under 
other conditions ; such are Cassinia spectabilis, Ptilotus Beckert, 
Senecio odoratus, Plagianthus spicatus, Poranthera ericoides, &e. 
In the case of the Cassinia, which appears to be biennial, it~ 
forms dense brakes, often reaching to four or five feet in 
height, and covering some square miles, as I have seen it on 
the south-east coast. Senecio odoratus monopolises for a time 
other areas of burnt ground. The other species mentioned 
occur somewhat sparsely. The firing of the scrub is re- 
peated over the same areas every fourth or fifth year, for it 
takes about that time, to replace the bushes in a state of thick- 
ness sufficient to feed a fire again. The only plant, which 
escapes destruction is the grass-tree. The vegetation is re- 
instated by the germination of the seeds, which have been dor- 
mant in the soil, and remained untouched by the fire, and by 
the development of new branches from the root-stocks of some 
of the larger-growing shrubs. The practice must inevitably 
bring about the extinction of those species, which do not mature 
their seeds before their fourth or fifth year; also many of the 
annuals, whose seeds are not well protected to pass unscathed 
through the fiery ordeal, will be exterminated over the area of 


137 


the conflagration. The passage of a light fire is, however, 
favourable to the dispersion and germination of the seeds of 
Acacia, Hakea, Grevillea, Banksia &c. The scrub is burnt 
usually in March, at a time when the vegetation is dry and 
has disseminated its seeds. If this periodic denudation of the 
scrub by fire be persisted in, disastrous results must indubitably 
follow ; the scrub shields the loose sandy soil from the action 
of the wind and rain; remove this, and these agents will in 
time bring about a transformation in the aspect of the vegeta- 
tion—the sand will be swept from the tops and slopes of the 
rises, laying bare the subjacent rock, and will be drifted on to 
the clayey flats, thus converting the whole into stony wastes 
surrounded by sandy deserts. In an arid country an appreciable 
change would at once be discernible, but as Kangaroo Island 
_ is favoured with a humid atmosphere, the chief disturbing agent 
is not so active. Concurrent with the change in its surface 
conditions there will be one in its vegetation. 


GENERAL BorTaniIcaL FEATURES. 


Kangaroo Island in its botany presents almost a unity, as it 
is only over very limited areas, that there is any marked 
departure from one type of vegetation. The subordinate 
features are more or less referable to the nature of the 
subjacent rock. The prominent groups of vegetation are— 

1. That of the Heathy Scrub-Lands.—In my geological sketch 
I have stated, that the major part of the island is covered by 
sand and fine ironstone-gravel, derived from the waste of 
metamorphic rocks in place. It is upon these soils that the 
most characteristic and varied of the vegetation of Kangaroo 
Island exists. The vegetation is comprised of a dense thicket of 
shrubs and shrubby states of trees, and opposes an almost 
effectual barrier to both man and horse. ‘This scrub varies 
in stature and somewhat in nature, according as the soil is a 
dry or moist sand, or gravel, or a loam. Interspersed are clay- 
flats which are fed by surface flow of water from the 
surrounding higher ground; they are soft and boggy in 
winter, but are level and dry, almost indurated, in summer. 
The soil is for the most part devoid of water, but in a few 
instances, where clay underlies a thin covering of sand; as 
towards D’Estrees Bay and near Karatta, the heathy ground 
yields water by digging for the whole year. Leschenault* 
attributes “the vigour of the vegetation, which is not impaired 
by the sterility of the soil, to the impervious nature of the 
rocks which underlie the sands, and by which the infiltrated 
pluvial waters are arrested and retained.” In general, the 


* Peron’s ‘‘ Voyage aux Terres Australes,” vol. ii., p. 366. 


138 


scrub is constituted of Casuarina distyla, Banksia marginata, 
Hakea flexilis, Melaleuca gibbosa, M. uncinata, Eucalyptus 
capitellata, EH. gracilis, EH. cosmophylla, E. incrassata, Xantho- 
rrhea quadrangulata, Acacia armata. The constituents of the 
more heathy portions are Leptospermum scopariwm, Adenathos, 
spp., Choretrum glomeratum, Prostanthera, spp., Dodonea Bauert, 
Bertya rotundifolia, Calycothrix, Eremophila Browniu, Lhotzkya 
glaberrima, Styphelias, Petrophila multisecta, Ixodia achilleoides, 
Hakea rugosa, H. rostrata, Logania ovata, Spyridiums, Boronia 
jilifolia ; the larger shrubs infested with Cassytha melantha, 
and the smaller with C. pubescens and C. glabella. Whilst the 
chief herbaceous plants are Lepidosperma jfiliforme, Lobelia 
microsperma, Thysanotus dichotomus, Candollea graminifolia, 
Schenus Tepperi, Goodenia geniculata, Trachymene heterophylla, 
Xanthosia dissecta, Loudonia Behrii. The interspersed clay 
flats are chiefly occupied by Lepidosperma viscidum, Juncus pal- ~ 
lidus and Chorisandra enodis, margined with thickets of Calli- 
stemon coccineus and Melaleuca gibbosa. In a few instances 
trees of either Hucalyptus corynocalyx, E. rostratus, EH. leu- 
coxylon, or E. cosmophylla form an open forest, beneath which 
the herbage is more varied. Where the soil is saline, Melaleuca 
pustulata forms a dense woodland growth, though of low 
stature. 

2. The Sylvan Vegetation is confined to the borders of the 
watercourses, and the chief forest tree is Hucalyptus coryno- 
calyx, with which is associated not infrequently E. leucoxylon, 
and occasionally Z. rostrata and L. viminalis. The banks of 
the streams are quite concealed by an impenetrable growth of 
Acacia retinodes, Leptospermwm lanigerum and L. myrsinoides. 
In the shade of these jungle-like growths luxuriate many 
species of herbaceous plants, whilst the forest-glades are rich 
in many shrubby plants, which do not occur on the scrub-lands. 
Such are Grevillea parviflora, Pomaderris racemosa, Bursaria 
spinosa, Acacia rupicola, A. verticillata, Exocarpos cupressiformis. 
Here the grass-trees attain unusual stature, the trunk reaching 
to a maximum height of fourteen feet, and the spike to sixteen 
feet; and in association with loftier plants they lose the weird- 
like appearance, which they present on the open lands, and 
impart quite a tropical aspect to the floral scenery. 

3. The Savanna Vegetation—On the north coast of Dudley 
Peninsula the hill-slopes are more or less grassed, and have 
scattered over them groups of Casuarina quadrivalvis. The 
same appearance is seen at Kingscote. In both areas the meta- 
morphic rocks are almost denuded of soil. But on the north 
slope of the Freestone Range, as about Emu Creek, a fine 
park-like country occurs, dotted here and there with clumps 
of Eucalyptus eneorifolia, the habit and foliage of which have 


139 


none of the sombreness and quaintness, which characterise 
many of its congeners; intermingled are #. incrassata and 
LE. santalifolia. This kind of vegetation merges on the one 
hand into that of the heathy ground at lower elevations, and 
into that of the sugar-gum tree, forests of which crown the crest 
of the range and occupy its ravines. 

4. The Vegetation of the Littoral Tracts—The mud flats 
around the shores of Nepean Bay, Bay of Shoals and Pelican 
Lagoon have the customary assemblage of plants affecting 
such situations—Lepigonum marinum, Salicornias, Sueda, Mesem- 
brianthemum australe, Atriplex paludosum, Polycnemon, Samolus, 
Melaleuca pustulata. Passing into the subsaline plains 
coterminous with these, we meet with an herbage of Sporobolus 
virginicus, amongst which the above-mentioned plants also 
grow; and in addition may be noted Agrostis Solandri, 
Poa cespitosa, Juncus pallidus, Centipeda Cunninghami, Bulbine 
semibarbata, Myoporum insulare, Rhagodia crassifolia and 
Sisyrnichium., The banks of shell sand and blown sand yield a 
number of the species of the scrub-lands; but as almost con- 
fined to these situations may be mentioned Callitris verrucosa, 
Dodonea viscosa, Myoporum viscosum, Mesembrianthemum equi- 
laterale, Clematis microphylla, Scirpus nodosus, Spinifex hirsutus, 
Atriplex cinereum. On the rocky shores and adjacent slopes 
there occur Rhagodia crassifolia, Nitraria Schoeberi, Geijera 
parvifolia, Alyxia buxtfolia, Pittosporum phillyreoides, Enchy- 
lena tomentosa, Muehlenbeckia adpressa. The hills of blown 
sand and calciferous sandstone, which dominate the whole of 
the coastline on the south side of the island, yield a variety of 
plants. On the inner slopes of the sand dunes are dense 
thickets composed of ucalyptus incrassata, E. santalifolia, 
Melaleuca parvifolia, Acacia retinodes and A. armata; here 
occur Veronica distans, Helichrysum leucopsidium, Ixolena supina, 
Mesembrianthemum equilaterale, Lotus australis, Dodonea 
humilis, Kunzea pomifera, Lepidosperma gladiatum, Goodenia 
varia, Scevola crassifolia, Styphelia Richer, 8. ovalifolia, Scirpus 
nodosus. 

The Vegetation of Dudley Peninsula is largely of the sylvan 
and savanna types; over the area occupied by mica-slate, are 
natural pasture-lands interspersed with she-oak, Melaleuca parvi- 
jiora and the narrow-leaf mallee, merging into mallee scrub, 
chiefly constituted of Eucalyptus eneorifolia and LE. inerassata, 
but not dense enough to obstruct the passage of man or horse. 
On the northern water-shed, the slopes are seamed with short 
and steep gullies; but on the opposite side, the stream courses 
are long and bordered by wide flats of drift deposits. The flats 
are covered with natural grasses, chiefly Stipa aristiglumis, Poa 
cespitosa, Hestuca bromoides, Danthonia penicillata and Agrostis 


140 


Solandri, and dotted here and there with groups of blue-gum 
trees. 

The central part of the Peninsula—about the sources of Hog 
Bay River and the tributaries of Deep Creek, is an elevated 
table-land composed of loose sand or ironstone-gravel resting 
on a clay ; here the vegetation is like that of the heathy scrnb- 
lands so characteristic of the main mass of the island, though 
it seems to be much less rich in species. 

Indeed, there appears to be very considerable specific dis- 
parity between the florula of Dudley Peninsula and that of the 
other and larger part of the island, but it is premature to deal 
with the nature and probable causes of the differences. How- 
ever, in the list of species belonging to the island, I have given 
such localities as will be of future use in working out the dis- 
tribution of the species within insular limits. 


CoORELATION OF THE FLORA. 
RESTRICTED SPECIES. 


The total number of flowering plants and vascular crypto- 
gams catalogued in the accompanying list is 415; of which 
404 species are continental, leaving about 11 as restricted to 
the island. 

In the Flora Australiensis, Kangaroo Island is credited with 
the possession of twelve species not known elsewhere ; how- 
ever, extended research has reduced that number to eight, and 
has added three, making a totalof eleven. They are as follows:— 


. Cheiranthera volubilis*, Bentham. 

. Bertya rotundifolia, F. v. M. 

. Lhotzkya glaberrima, F. v. M. 

. Melaleuca cylindrica, R. Brown. 

. Cryptandra Waterhousei, F. v. M. 

. Cryptandra halmaturina, F. v. M. 

. Petrophila multisecta, ¥. v. M. 

. Helichrysum adenophorum, ¥. v. M. 

. Achnophora Tatei, F. v. M. (monotypic genus). 
10. Pultenea viscidula, Tate (inedit). 

11. Hydrocotyle crassiuscula, Tate (inedit). 


OCOnranrwhdkr- 


The following species, which were established on Kangaroo 
Island plants, have since been found in extra-limital parts :— 

1. Chenopodium pumilio, R. Brown, is now merged in C. cart- 
natum, R. Brown, and as such is widely distributed throughout 
Australia, and reaching to New Caledonia and New Zealand. 

2. Atriplex prostratum, R. Brown, now includes A. microcar- 
pum, F. v. M., and A. pumilio, R. Brown, and as an aggregate 


*“ Baron von Mueller includes this under C. linearis. 


141 


species is known from other parts of South Australia and from 
New South Wales. 

3. Thryptomene ericea, ¥. v. M., is, according to the author 
of the “Systematic Census of the Plants of Australia,” an 
inhabitant of Victoria. 

4. Darwinia micropetala, F. v. M., in a varietal form inhabits - 
Central Australia and also in the vicinity of Guichen Bay. 

5. Eucalyptus Baxtert, which was established on Kangaroo 
Island samples obtained by Robert Brown, is antedated by 
E. santalifolia, F.v.M. Eucalyptus diversifolia, Bonpland, 
was founded on specimens obtained during Baudin’s expedition, 
The name has been abandoned in favour of santalifolia. The 
species 1s known from the neighbouring parts of the mainland 
and from West Australia. 

6. Acacia dodoneifolia, Wildenow. One other station for it 
is Port Lincoln. 

7. Convolvulus acaulis, Choisy, which was described from 
Leschenault’s specimens gathered on Kangaroo Island, repre- 
sents merely an individual variation of the widely-spread Con- 
volvulus erubescens. 


Several apparently well-marked varieties have been described 
and considered restricted to the island. With one exception 
these varieties arise from the effects of wind and moist sea air, 
as I have proved by tracking them from their maritime stations 
inland until the normal form is acquired. The marked excep- 
tion is var. acuaria of Grevillea parviflora, a species of the 
Victorian Alps. I think that the Kangaroo Island plant has 
fair claim to specific rank under the cognomen G. halma- 
turina. It has recently been gathered in the Port Lincoln 
district by Mr. S. Dixon! 


Additional species not known in any other part of South 
Australia, though extra-limital, as indicated by the affixed 
initial letters in the subjoined geographic columns, are as 
follows :— 


Cakile maritima... ... T. V.. J Daeip awe 
Phyllanthus australs. ... T. is 
Thryptomene ericwa.. ... ut v. ee ate 
Hydrocotyletripartita ... i. Ve OS.) oe 
Adenanthos sericeus.. W.A.... ibs ak : 
Lobelia platycalyx ...... 1p ve oe ay 
Seutellaria humilis ...... T. Vv.  N.8.W..  @: 
Styphelia striata ... W.A.... ig Ve 
Pterostylis precox ... ... .. Rida A NN ei 
Schcenus sculptus ... W.a. a 

Stipa teretifolia ... W.a. 1. v. 


Dichelachne sciurea... ... T. ¥. "NAW 4d, 


142 


Phytogeographic research in Kangaroo Island brought first to 
notice the following additions to South Australian flora, though 
they have subsequently been found in other parts of the 
colony :—Pomaderris apetala, Cassinia spectabilis, Wilsonia Back- 
housit, Caustis pentandra. 


SPECIES OF ExtrRa-AUSTRALIAN ORIGIN. 


It is noteworthy that the number of more or less cosmo- 
politan species 1s not great; thus, whilst the number of such in 
South Australia approaches 100, there are not more than 55 on 
Kangaroo Island. With the exception of three, they all occur 
on the larger insular mass of Tasmania, which possesses at the 
least 90 extra-Australian species. The paucity of cosmopolitan 
species on Kangaroo Island cannot well be explained except on 
the assumption of isolation before immigration, else Tasmania, 
so rich in peculiar genera and species, should possess even a 
fewer number; whereas it contains nearly twice the number. 
An analysis of the habitats of the several species indicates, 
that two-thirds of the Kangaroo. plants of this category are 
either maritime or paludinal. There are a few weeds, and 
their occurrence as indigenous may be disputed. The wide 
dissemination throughout Australia of plants of this kind may, 
I think, be attributed to the agency of aboriginals, at least as 
far as regards those species, the nativity of which is not ques- 
tioned. Kangaroo Island had never been subject to such dis- 
turbing influences until the last 50 years, hence its freedom 
from aggressive plants. Of the native species occurring beyond 
Australia also, the following are :— 


Maritine. 


Lepidium ruderale Apium prostratum 
Cakile maritima Halophila ovata 
Capsella procumbens Ruppia maritima 
Nitraria Scheeberi Lepturus incurvatus 
Frankenia levis Sporobolus virginicus 
Spergularia marina Distichlis maritima 


Sueda maritima 
Mesembrianthemum australe 
eequilaterale 
The following widely distributed shore-species seem absent :— .- 
Salsola kali, Avicennia officinalis, Juncus maritimus and Scirpus 
maritimus. 


Paludinal. 
Epilobium tetragonum Potamogeton natans 
Fiydrocotyle Asiatica obtusifolius 
Cotula coronopifoha pectinatus 


Cotula filifolia Juncus bufonius 


Centipeda Cunninghami 
Lobelia anceps 

Selhera radicans 
Gratiola Peruviana 
Limosella aquatica 
Triglochin striata 


Ranunculus parviflorus 
Hypericum Japonicum 
Parietaria debilis 
Gnaphalium Japonicum 
Wahlenbergia gracilis 
Oxalis corniculata 


143 


Heleocharis multicaulis 

Scirpus cartilagineus 
riparius 
fluitans 

Scheenus nitens 

Carex pseudo-cyperus 

Lomaria capensis 


Sylvan. 


Stellaria glauca 
Daucus brachiatus 
Luzula campestris 
Dichondra repens 
Festuca bromoides 
Pteris aquilina 


Geranium Carolinianum Adiantum Ethiopicum 


Weeds. 
Guaphalium luteo-album 
Solanum nigrum 
Lepturus incurvatus 


Lepidium ruderale 
Papaver aculeatum 
Sagina apetala 

Spergularia rubra 


ALIEN SPECIES. 


As to the endemic origin of the forementioned extra-Austra- 
lian species, there cannot be any uncertaimty, except as regards 
some of those which I have grouped together as weeds. 
Gnaphalium luteo-album is apparently restricted to the vicinity 
of homesteads, and Lepturus incurvatus occurs under suspicious 
circumstances on cultivated clay-lands at Kingscote, but is 
certainly native around the shores of “Salt Lagoon,” at the 
head of the Bay of Shoals. Lepidiuwm ruderale is another 
species, apparently native at one or two places, which has 
become domesticated. I have not paid particular attention to 
the occurrence of alien species on the main mass of the island, 
but the following occur :— 

Chenopodium glaucum, Kangaroo Island [probably Cygnet 
River |, Waterhouse. 

Onopordium acanthium. Known since the last two or three 
years about The Gap. 

Picris hieracioides, Kangaroo Island, Waterhouse. Discovery 
Flat! 

Sonchus oleraceus. 

Lagurus ovatus. Roll’s Point, Telegraph Reserve; and by 
homestead, Eleanor River. Doubtlessly planted. , 


On Dudley Peninsula, the following agral-weeds are nearly 
all of common occurrence:—, 
Seniebiera, didyma, ,Capsella bursa-pastoris, Sisymbrium 


144 


officinale, Maiva rotundifolia, Erodium cicutarium, Urtica 
urens, Silene Gallica, Stellaria media, Cerastium vulgatum, 
Chenopodium glaucum, Polygonum aviculare, Vicia sativa, Medi- 
cago denticulata, Melilotus parviflorus, Alchemilla arvensis, 
Centaurea melitensis, Onopordium acanthium, Hypocheris 
glabra, Sonchus oleraceus, Cryptostemma calendulacea, Picris 
hieracioides, Anagallis arvensis, Plantago lanceolata, Lithos- 
permum arvense, Lolium perenne, L. temulentum, Hordeum 
murinum, Bromus sterilis, B. mollis, Briza minor, Phalaris Can- 
ariensis, P. minor, Festuca rigida, F. elatior (?), Poa annua 
and Avena fatua. Marrubium vulgare, Celsia cretica and 
Solanum sodomzum have also become naturalized. 


INTER-PROVINCIAL RELATIONSHIPS. 
The florula of Kangaroo Island is made up of :— 


Peculiar species ... aa a5: 11 

Cosmopolitan species... oe 55 

Australian species aa 1. eee 
Potala. o.s-s, ee 


The very large proportion of continental species—about 97 
per cent.—indicates that the island from a botanical point of 
view has not long been isolated. And it is obvious, that we 
should turn our attention to the flora of the adjacent parts of 
the mainland to elucidate this former connection. 

Of the 348 Australian species inhabiting Kangaroo Island, 
186 form part of the West Australian flora, 335 occur in South 
Australia, 203 in Tasmania, and 309 in Victoria. 

By numbers only, it is clear, that the plants of Kangaroo 
Island have the greatest specific identity with those of South 
Australia. Of the twelve Australian species, not yet found on 
the mainland of South Australia, seven are proper to the 
south-east part of Australia including Tasmania; one also is 
Victorian only, and two belong to West Australia. On the 
whole, Kangaroo Island contains a larger number of south-east 
species than any other part of South Australia, excepting the 
Mount Gambier district, which is botanically a part of 
Southern Victoria. In Kangaroo Island we have the meeting 
ground of West Australian and Tasmanian species, which here 
find their eastern and western limits respectively. Of the 
eastern species not less than 68 do not pass beyond the meri- 
dian of St. Vincent Gulf on the mainland; whilst Daviesia 
incrassata, Pomaderris obcordata, Adenanthos sericeus, Styphelia 
striata, are not known west of Kangaroo Island. It is also 
worthy of remark, that among the commonest species in 
Kangaroo Island there are 21 of West Australian origin, 
eleven of which do not extend to the Victorian frontier, eight 


145 


passing over the boundary, and two—Lasiopetalum discolor and 
Trachymene heterophylla—common to Western Australia, South 
Australia and Tasmania. 

Thus Kangaroo Island, occupying a median position between 
the western and eastern phytogeographic regions, partakes a 
little of the character of each mingled with South Australian 

lants. 

i The affinity of the flora of Kangaroo Island with that of 
South Australia is strongly shown by the presence of Ptilotus 
Beckeri, Correa decumbens, Dodonea humilis, Pultenea acerosa, 
Acacia dodonetfolia, Darwinia micropetala, Hucalyptus cosmo- 
phylla, Cryptandra spathulata, Scevola linearis, Hremophila 
Behriana, Styphelia patula, S. concurva, Xanthorrhoea quadrangu- 
lata, Scheenus Tepperi, fourteen in all. These and the restricted 
species make up a total of 25 peculiarly South Australian, 
which occur on the island. 


CoMPARISON OF THE FLORA WITH THAT OF SoutTH AUSTRALIA. 


The greatest similarity subsists between the florula of Kan- 
garoo Island and that of the elevated tracts of the Adelaide 
chain, and more particuiarly with that of the region about the 
source affluents of the Rivers Finniss and Hindmarsh. Here 
at elevations of from 800 to 1,000 feet are extensive peaty 
morasses—such as the Square Waterhole, Black and Hungry 
Swamps, embayed amidst a range of hills attaining to about 
2,000 feet elevation. Much of the lower slope of the range is 
clothed with a thicket of heathy plants and shrubs, whilst the 
higher parts are covered with stringybark forests. Like Kan- 
garoo Island, this region is rich in south-eastern species, many 
of which do not cross the summit of the Adelaide chain. The 
general aspect of the vegetation is the same, and though many 
of the characteristic plants are in common, yet not afew are 
representative and not identical. Such are— 


Mount Lofty Range. Kangaroo Island. 
Adenanthos sericeus A. terminalis 
Correa speciosa (typica) C. speciosa (glabra) 
Prostanthera Behriana P. coccinea 
Xanthorrhea semiplana X. quadrangulata 
Spyridium obovatum S. halmaturinum 
Melaleuca squamea M. squarrosa 
Eucalyptus Gunn E. corynocalyx 


The arboreous and shrubby vegetation of the wet heathy 
ground is the same in each :—LHucalyptus capitellata, E. cos- 
mophylla, Acacia retinodes, Casuarina distyla, Banksias, 
Adenanthos terminalis, Phyllota pleurandroides, Spyridium 
spathulatum, and species of Styphelia; whilst among humbler 

K 


146 


plants are—Marianthus, Micrantheum, Ixodia, Zieria, Poranthera 
ericoides, Caustis, Lomaria &e. One marked difference is the 
absence in Kangaroo Island of Pultenzas (exceptin three species 
occurring rarely), so abundant specifically and individually on 
the Mount Lofty Range, whilst on the other hand Kangaroo 
Island is rich in species of heathy Myrtacee as Darwinia, 
Lhotzkya and Thryptomene, which are unrepresented on the 
Mount Lofty Range. 

Another similarity is with the country stretching from 
Lake Wangarry to the base of the Marble Range, Port Lincoln, 
the flora of which presents the same facies as that of Kangaroo 
Island, but exhibits a larger number of species of western 
types. Affinity with it is shown by Lucalyptus santalifolia, 
EE. cosmophylla, E. corynocalyx, Daviesia incrassata, Acacia 
dodonetfolia, Lasiopetalum Schulzeni, Prostanthera coccinea, 
Dodonea Bauert, Eriostemon capitatus, Didymotheca thesioides, 
Ptilotus Beckert, Atriplex prostratum, Melaleuca uncinata, 
Pomaderris obcordata, Cassinia levis, Ixiolena swpina, Veronica 
distans, Grevillea halmaturina, Schenus nitens and Cladiwm 
deustum. 

That those orders which are largely comprised of desert 
plants, as Salsolacee, Amarantacee, Boraginee, Goodenovie and 
Malvacee, are so poorly represented is not to be wondered at ; 
but the fewness of Leguminose, Composite and Graminee is a 
matter of surprise. 

It is premature to speculate on the absence of some of the 
widely distributed annuals, endemic in Australia, because they 
may have escaped notice, from the circumstance, that no ex- 
tended exploration has been conducted at their chief season of 
growth, or in localities most favourable to them. Nevertheles, 
the absence of Ranunculus lappaceus, Linum marginale, Minuria 
leptophylla, Craspedia Richeit, Microseris Fosteri, Helichrysum 
apiculatum, Anthistiria ciliata and many others can be explained 
only on the assumption that the area was isolated before immi- 
gration. Or take the case of Loranthus pendulus, what has 
barred its admission into the island, when the species of 
Cassytha, presenting apparently no greater advantages for 
conveyance, have gained possession? The same remarkable 
circumstance isa feature of the Tasmanian flora, which includes 
the same three Cassythas, but not one Loranthus. These facts 
suggest the inquiry by what species of animals these parasitic 
plants are conveyed from one place to another; and then 
as a corollary, does the geographic distribution of those agents 
accord with that of the plants? 


PECULIARITY OF Haxprr oF sOME SPECIES. 
Because of the humidity and extreme mildness of the climate 


147 


of Kangaroo Island, we find brought together at little above 
sea level plants, which only a few miles to the northward are 
relegated to various zones of considerable elevation relatively. 
This kind of association is well seen at the Stun’sail-boom 
River and at the Cygnet River. Itis also worthy of notice, 
that several of the species have habits considerably different 
from those, which they have on the mainland. Hucalyptus capi- 
tellata is always shrubby, whilst 2H. cosmophylla in moist, 
sheltered situations attains to a height of 25 feet, with a stem 
three feet in girth. ZH. obliqua is only known as a small scraggy 
tree. Melaleuca wncinata, on the margin of the subsaline plain 
at the Cygnet River, towers up in pyramidal shape to fifteen 
feet, and MW. pustulata forms a dense forest-growth in protected 
situations about D’Estrees Bay. Banksia marginata is always 
shrubby, but Xanthorrhea quadrangulata acquires unusual 
dimensions, the trunks being not infrequently bifurcate, and 
rarely trifurcate, and in a few instances I have seen them with 
four crowns. 

It cannot, I think, be questioned that the climate is suitable 
for the growth of exotics of the colder temperate regions, and 
such of those of the warm temperate regions, which require 
equable conditions of heat and moisture. The experimental 
culture of the tea-plant, as suggested by Baron Sir F. von 
Mueller, might engage the attention of the Commissioner of 
Crown Lands and the Conservator of Forests. 

The effect of the battering action of the sea-moistened winds 
on the plants, living on the exposed cliffs of the soutk coast is 
to produce growths which at first sight are difficult to recognise 
specifically. In general there results a prostrate habit, and 
the development of thick fleshy leaves. The species in which 
this effect is conspicuously seen is Lrodia achilleoides, which 
from a slender shrubby herb of about three feet high, with 
long linear leaves in favourable situations, here presents a 
dense carpet of a few inches thick, covering the stony surfaces 
on the summits of the sea-cliffs, the leaves ovate-spathulate, 
thick and fleshy, half an inch long. Here Podolepis rugata be- 
comes stemless, and Apiwm prostratum and Lobelia anceps are 
minute prostrate plants. Huphrasia Brownii, Aster Huegeélit, 
Senecio lautus, Samolus repens and Plantago varia are also much 
altered in appearance. 


COMPARATIVE STATISTICS. 

Of the 416 species admitted as indigenous to Kangaroo 
Island, there are :—Dicotyledonex, 326; Monocotyledone, 84 ; 
Vascular Cryptogams, 6. The ratio of the Monocotyledons to 
the Dicotyledons, being 1 to 4, approximates closely to that 
for the flora of Australia, which is 1 to 4°53, rendered excep- 


148 


tionally high from the overwhelming number of Dicotyledons 
in West Australia. The ratio of the two classes in that flora 
is 1 to 5°3, and that for Kangaroo Island comes nearer to it 
than any provincial flora. This high ratio is the more remark- 
able when examined from a geographical point of view. It 
contrasts most markedly with that of Tasmania, with which it 
has many specific points of contact, the ratio for Tasmania 
being 1 to 2°6; whilst South Australa, which claims 97 per 
cent. of its species, the ratio is 1 to 3°7. 

The sequence of the ordinal groups, according to predomi- 
nance of their numbers of species, is as follows :—Composite, 
43; Myrtacex, 33; Leguminose, 27; Cyperaceex, 24; Graminex, 
20; Umbellifere, 14; Epacridee, 11; Proteacee, 11. These 
orders are also the first seven in a like arrangement for the 
Australian flora, though their relative positions are not the 
same. In the South Australian flora, Proteace and Epacrideze 
give place to Salsolacee and Orchidee; and in Tasmania, 
Orchidez and Filices replace Myrtaceze and Proteacee ; but in 
West Australia the similarity is greater, inasmuch as Graminex 
occupies the eighth place, being deposed from the seventh 
by Goodenovier, and Myrtacee stands second, the same posi- 
tion it occupies in the Australian list and in that of Kangaroo 
Island. 

The remarkable morphological diversity is indicated by the 
presence of 230 genera, belonging to 69 orders; so that the 
ratio of genera to species is 1 to 18; whereas for the Austra- 
lian flora it is 1 to 64 nearly, and for South Australia 1 to 3°6, 
and for Tasmania 1 to 2°6, the lowest among the provincial 
floras. 

The genera containing more than three species to each are :— 
Eucalyptus, 14; Acacia and Styphelia, 11; Pimelea, 9; Mela- 
leuca and Hydrocotyle, 7; Cryptandra and Scirpus, 6; Aster, 
Helichrysum, Scheenus, 5; Hibbertia, Lasiopetalum, Drosera, 
Triglochin and Leptospermum, 4. 


CONCLUSIONS RESPECTING RELATIONSHIP OF THE FLORA. 


1. The small number of peculiar species does not entitle 
Kangaroo Island to the rank of a botanical region. 

2. The large proportion of its species being common to the 
mid-southern districts of South Australia, Kangaroo Island 
becomes a part of that botanical region. 

3. The number of its peculiar species and those of Tas- 
manian origin entitle it to a subregional rank. 

4, The absence of a large number of species, alien and en- 
demic, widely spread over the continent would seem to imply 
isolation before immigration of the extra-Australian species 
and those endemic ones of marked exotic genera to the Stores 


149 


of the adjacent mainland. The isolation was, without doubt, 
subsequent to that of Tasmania, though prior to the advent of 
man in Australia, botanical isolation being secured against 
man’s aggression by reason of his inability to cross the Straits. 


CATALOGUE OF THE FLowEeRING Prants AND FERNS, WITH 
Localities. 

The sequence of the orders and the nomenclature of the 
species are adopted from Baron Sir F. von Mueller’s 
“ Systematic Census of Australian Plants ;’ and to that gen- 
tleman I am greatly indebted for the revision of the specific 
determinations. The plant-names to which an asterisk is pre- 
_ fixed are now published for the first time. 


RANUNCULACE. 
*Ranunculus parviflorus. Mossy banks in gullies near Kan- 
garoo Head. 
*Clematis microphylla. Common near the coast. 


DILLENIACER. 
*Wibbertia densiflora. Heath near American River. 
*Hibbertia stricta. Common on sandy and stony heath- 
ground. 
*Hibbertia Billardieri. Not uncommon on sandy _heath- 
ground. 
*Hibbertia fascicularis. Wet heath-ground three miles east 
from Karatta; also at the Harriet River. 


LAURINE. 

Cassytha glabella. Kang. I., Sealey. Sandy heath-ground, 
parasitic on Lepidosperma filiforme chiefly. 

*Cassytha melantha. Parasitic on the smaller Eucalypts 
chiefly. 

*Cassytha pubescens. Parasitic on small heathy shrubs and 
Melaleuca uncinata. 

PAPAVERACE. 

*Papaver aculeatum. Sandhills at American Beach, and rocky 
ground northward to Kangaroo Head; Kingscote; 
D’Estrees Bay. | 

CRUCIFERE. 

*Capsella procumbens. Rocks by the sea and moist gullies, 
North Dudley Peninsula; also in ti-tree thickets bor- 
dering salt lake near Pelican Lagoon. 

*Cakile maritima. Sandy shore of D’Estrees Bay. 

Lepidium foliosum. Kang. I., Bannier. | 

*Lepidium ruderale. Chiefly by the sea, Dudley Peninsula; 
an Cask Bay, Eleanor River, Kingscote and Bay of 
Shoals. 


150 


VIOLACER. 
Viola hederacea. Kang. I., Waterhouse, in Frag. Phyt., x., 82. 


PITTOSPORE®. 

Pittosporum phillyroides. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Sea cliffs 
east side of Bay of Shoals; about Salt Lagoon. 

*Marianthus bignoniaceus. Thickets under the shade of 
Sugar-gum trees at the Harriet and Stun’sail-boom Rivers. 

*Bursaria spinosa. Sandhills, Hog Bay; shady banks of the 
Hog Bay, Cygnet, Harriet and Stun’sail-boom Rivers. 

Billardiera cymosa. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Bushy places 
throughout Dudley Peninsula, and at Kingscote, American 
River, Harriet and Stun’sail-boom Rivers, and occasionally 
in open heath-ground. 

Cheiranthera linearis. Kang. I., Waterhouse. 

Cheiranthera volubilis. Scrub in Kang. I., Waterhouse. 


DROSERACES. 
*Drosera pygmea. Sandy heath-ground, central Dudley 
Peninsula. : i 
*Drosera Whittakerii. Dudley Peninsula, R. 8. Rogers! ; 
wet sandy heath-ground near D’Estrees Bay. 
*Drosera auriculata. Heathy tracts, central Dudley Penin- 
sula, near D’Estrees Bay and Kingscote. 
*Drosera Menziesii. Heath-ground near D’Estrees Bay; near 
Kingscote, &. 8. Rogers! 
HYPERICINS. 
*Hypericum Japonicum. Growing among rocks on the upland 
country about American Beach. 


POLYGALEX. 

*Comesperma volubile. Bushy places in the south parts of 
Dudley Peninsula, Western Cove, Kingscote and Salt 
Lagoon. 

Comesperma calymega. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Wet sandy- 
heath ground. Central Dudley Peninsula and near 
D’Estrees Bay. 

Comesperma polygaloides. Kang. I., Waterhouse. 


TREMANDRE 2S. 

Tetratheca ericifolia. Kang. I., Heuzenroeder in Frag. Phyt., 
Xi1,| 6. 

STERCULIACED. 

Thomasia petalocalyx. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Heathy ground 
chiefly. American River; near D’Estrees Bay; at the 
Harriet, Eleanor, and Stun’sail-boom Rivers, by the Cygnet 
River, and towards Freestone Range. 

Lasiopetalum discolor. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Heath-ground, 
near Kingscote. 


151 


Lasiopetalum Behrii. Kang. L., Waterhouse. 

Lasiopetalum Bauerii. Kang. I., Waterhouse. UHeathy and 
stony ground, Dudley Peninsula, and westward to Kings- 
cote and Stun’sail-boom River. 

Lasiopetalum Schulzeni. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Sand-dunes 
and stony ground near Rocky Point, American Beach ; 
heathy ground, American River, and elsewhere near the 
coast; rarely in the interior parts of the island. 


MALVACES. 
*Lavatera plebeia. On the loam-lands by the Hog Bay River. 
*Plagianthus spicatus. On stiff clay soil, after burning of the 
brushwood, at Salt Lagoon, Emu Creek, and between 
Kingscote and Cygnet River. 


GERANIACER. 

*Geranium Carolinianum. Common in shady places and 
thickets on Dudley Peninsula. 

Erodium cygnorum. Kang. IL. in #J. Austral. 

*Pelargonium australe. Shady places and sand-dunes, Dudley 
Peninsula. Var. erodioides. Sandy ground about Kings- 
cote, American River, D’Estrees Bay, Mount Mary, and 
Dudley Peninsula. 

*Oxalis corniculata. Shady banks of Cygnet River, R. 8. 
ftogers! and Tate. Common in gullies and open places in 
thickets on Dudley Peninsula. 


ZYGOPHYLLE®. 
Zygophyllum Billardieri. Kang. 1., &. Brown. Cliffs by the 
sea, D’ Estrees Bay. 
Nitraria Schoberi. Kingscote Point, Waterhouse, Tate. Rocks 
by the sea to the north of American Beach. : 


RUTACER. 

Zieria veronicea. Kang. I1., in Fl. Austral. Heath between 
American River and D’Estrees Bay. 

*Boronia cerulescens. Heath between American River and 
D’Estrees Bay. 

Boronia filifolia. Kang. I., Waterhouse in Frag. Phyt., i1., 
177. Heath near D’Estrees Bay, Hawk’s Nest, and 
Mount Pleasant, to the Stun’sail-boom River. Dudley 
Peninsula, 7. Willson! 

*Eriostemon capitatus. Sea cliffs, D’Estrees Bay; on the 
calciferous sandstone between Mount Pleasant and the 
Eleanor River. 

*Correa speciosa. Cygnet River, R. 8. Rogers! and Tate. Creek 
between Birchmore and White Lagoons; at the Eleanor, 
Harriet and Stun’sail-boom Rivers. Sandhills at Mount 
Mary. 


152 


Correa alba. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Throughout Dudley 
Peninsula. Kingscote, R. 8. Rogers! Cygnet River, and 
Western Cove to American River. 

Correa decumbens. Kang. I., Waterhouse. 

abe fay ae Sea cliffs, Kingscote Point and Bay of 
Shoals. 


EUPHORBIACER. 

*Poranthera ericoides. Heath near D’Estrees Bay, at White 
Lagoon, and between Mount Pleasant and Eleanor River. 

*Poranthera microphylla. Shady places throughout Dudley 
Peninsula and at American River. 

*Micrantheum hexandrum. Heath, on ironstone-gravel, be- 
tween the Harriet and Eleanor Rivers. 

Beyeria opaca. Kang. 1., R. Brown. Common on sandy and 
stony heath-yround, bushy places, and by the sea coast. 

Bertya rotundifolia. Cygnet River, Waterhouse. Heath- 
ground from Kingscote to American River and Stun’sail- 
boom River. | 

*Phyllanthus australis. Sandy ground at White Lagoon and 
Eleanor River. 

*Phyllanthus thymoides. Heath, Central Dudley Peninsula. 

Adriana quadripartita. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Banks of the 
Hog Bay River ; sandhills at Mount Mary. 


URTICACES. 
*Urtica incisa. Banks of the Lower Cygnet River. 
Parietaria debilis. Kang. 1., Fl. Austral. Rocky gullies and 
shady places throughout Dudley Peninsula. 


CASUARINES. 

Casuarina quadrivalvis. Kang. I., Waterhouse. By the coast, 
at Salt Lagoon, Kingscote Point, Western Cove, American 
River ; north coast of Dudley Peninsula and Hog Bay 
River. 

Casuarina distyla. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Forming thickets 
on sandy heath-ground, Cygnet River to D’Estrees Bay 
and Stun’sail-boom River ; Central Dudley Peninsula. 


SAPINDACER. 

Dodonea viscosa. Kang. I., Sealey, Waterhouse. Chiefly in th 
form attenuata. Coast shrubs, Kingscote ; Western Covee 
American River, Hog Bay River, American Beach. Also, 
thickets in the elevated interior parts as between Birch- 
more’s and White Lagoon, along the banks of the south- 
western rivers, and North Dudley Peninsula. 

*Dodonza Baueri. Sandy heath-ground about Kingscote and 
to Emu Creek ; American River. 

*Dodonea humilis. Sandy heath, near D’Estrees Bay. Sand- 


153 


hills and on ealciferous sandrock, Eleanor River, Hog Bay 
River to Rocky Point, American Beach. 


STACKHOUSIE®. 
*Stackhousia linarifolia. Kingscote and Eleanor River; var. ? 
wet sandy heath near D’Estrees Bay. 


FRANKENIACE. 
*Frankenia levis. Saline swamps, Bay of Shoals and Nepean 
Bay ; margins of salt lagoons about Flour-cask Bay and 
Pelican Lagoon. 


PORTULACER. 
*Claytonia volubilis. Among rocks, north coast of Dudley 
Peninsula. 
*Claytonia calyptrata. Rocky shady places about Kangaroo 
Head ; gorge of the Hog Bay River. 


CARYOPHYLLE®. 

*Stellaria glauca. Among rocks by the sea, Christmas Cove, 
and gullies North Dudley Peninsula; under shade of gum 
trees, Hog Bay River. 

*Sagina apetala. Western Cove, Nepean Bay. Common 
throughout Dudley Peninsula, especially near the coast. 

*Spergularia rubra. Cliffs slopes by the sea, north coast of 
Dudley Peninsula. 

*Spergularia marina. Saline swamps, Bay of Shoals and 
Nepean Bay. Along the courses of the salt-water creeks, 
North Dudley Peninsula. 


AMARANTACES. 
*Polyenemon pentandrum. Saline swamp at the head of Bay 
of Shoals; around shore of salt lagoon to the east of 
Pelican Lagoon. 
*Ptilotus Beckeri. On ironstone gravel, after fire, about 
Mount Pleasant and hence to the Eleanor River. 
*Alternanthera triandra. Banks of the Cygnet River imme- 
diately above tidal influence. 


SALSOLACER. 

Rhagodia crassifolia. Kang. I., R. Brown. Sea cliffs and salt 
swamps from American River to Bay of Shoals; littoral 
tracts of North and West Dudley Peninsula. 

Rhagodia nutans. Kang. I, R. Brown. Rocks by the sea 
north coast of Dudley Peninsula and to American Beach. 

Chenopodium carinatum. Kang. I1., R. Brown (as C. pumilio, 
R. Br.). Grassy slopes by the sea, north coast of Dudley 
Peninsula. 

Atriplex paludosum. Kang. I., R. Brown, Waterhouse. Saline 
swamps head of the Bay of Shoals; rocks at high-water 


154 


mark north coast of Dudley Peninsula to American 
Beach. 

Atriplex cinereum. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Kingscote Point 
and Bay of Shoals; Hog Bay and American Beach. 

Atriplex prostratum. Kang. I., &. Brown. 

*Kochia oppositifolia. Rocks by the sea between Penneshaw 
and Kangaroo Head. 

*Enchylena tomentosa Sea cliffs, Kingscote; Christmas 
Cove and American Beach, Dudley Peninsula. 

*Salicornia arbuscula. Salt swamps, Nepean Bay, American 
River; Christmas Cove. 

*Salicornia australis. Salt swamps, common. 

*Sueda maritima. Rocks by the sea, north coast of Dudley 
Peninsula; sandhills, American Beach and Hog Bay. 


FICOIDE®. 

*Mesembrianthemum australe. Saline swamps, Bay of Shoals 
and Nepean Bay ; and wet rocks by the sea north coast of 
Dudley Peninsula. 

*Mesembrianthemum quilaterale. Sand-dunes, common. 

*Tetragonia implexicoma. D’Estrees Bay; rocks by the sea 
north and west coasts of Dudley Peninsula. 


POLYGONACER. 

Muehlenbeckia adpressa. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Bushy places 
and heath-ground; especially near the sea; mallee scrub 
and thickets throughout Dudley Peninsula. 

Rumex Brownii. Kang. I., Huezenroeder. Cygnet River ; 
pastures and thickets throughout Dudley Peninsula. 


PHYTOLACCER. 

Didymotheca pleiococca. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Heath be- 
tween American River and D’Estrees Bay; between 
White Lagoon and Hawk’s Nest, and towards the Eleanor 
and Stun’sail-boom Rivers. 

*Didymotheca thesioides. Chiefly on calciferous sandstone 
formation, from Hog Bay River to Rocky Point, American 
Beach. 

LEGUMINOSS. 

Gompholobium minus. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Heath between 
American River and D’Estrees Bay; by watercourse be- 
tween Birchmore Lagoon and Mount Pleasant. 

*Daviesia genistifolia. Heath near Kingscote; between 
Eleanor and Stun’sail-boom Rivers, and central Dudley 
Peninsula. 

Daviesia inerassata. Kang. 1., Waterhouse. Karatta. 

*Daviesia brevifolia. Heath between American River and 
D’Estrees Bay ; towards the Eleanor River. 

Phyllota pleurandroides. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Heath south 


155 


side of Cygnet River; thence common to D’Estrees Bay 
and Stun’sail-boom River. 

*Pultenea acerosa. Heath near D’Estrees Bay and Central 
Dudley Peninsula. 

*Pultenea (af) hibbertioides. Sugar-gum tree forests at 
Karatta. 

Pultenza tenuifolia. Kang. I., Bannier. 

*Kutaxia empetrifolia. Kingscote; Mount Pleasant to Eleanor 
and Harriet Rivers. Heath, Central Dudley Peninsula 
and on stony ground by Hog Bay River. 

Dillwynia floribunda. Kang. I[., Waterhouse. Heath near 
D’Estrees Bay. Dudley Peninsula, 7. Willson ! 

Platylobium obtusangulum. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Common 
from the Eleanor River to Karatta. 

Goodia medicaginea. Kang. I., Waterhouse in Frag. Phyt., ix., 
157. Kingscote, Cygnet River. Open part of mallee 
scrub, and thickets throughout Dudley Peninsula. 

Lotus australis. Kang. I, Waterhouse. Coast cliffs at Hog 
Bay River. 

*Swainsonia lessertiifolia (forma normalis). On sandy ground 
near the sea, Hog Bay, American Beach to Hog Bay 
River; American River; sandy banks of the Eleanor 
River, Mount Mary. 

*Kennedya monophylla. Thickets southward of Rocky Point, 
Dudley Peninsula; American River. 

*Kennedya prostrata. Mount Pleasant to Eleanor River. 

*Acacia spinescens. Heath, Central Dudley Peninsula. 

*Acacia rupicola. On calciferous sandstone at Mount Mary ; 
thickets at Karatta. 

*Acacia verticillata. Heath near Karatta. 

Acacia calamifola. Kang I., Fl. Austral. Sandy ground, Bay 
of Shoals, south of Cygnet River, and White Lagoon. 
Acacia armata. Kang. I., &. Brown. Common throughout the 
island, forming dense thickets on the calciferous sand-rock 

formation. 

*Acacia microcarpa. Stony ridge between Rocky Point and 
Salt Lagoon, Dudley Peninsula. 

Acacia dodoneifolia. Kang. I., Baudin’s Exped. 

Acacia retinodes. Kang. 1., Waterhouse. Constituting dense 
thickets along line of water courses in the south-western 
parts. Sandhills around Vivonne Bay and Hog Bay River. 

*Acacia pycnantha. Open scrub lands North Dudley Penin- 
sula. 

*Acacia brachybotrya. Murray’s Lagoon. 

Acacia farinosa. Kang I., Waterhouse. 


ROSACER. 
*Rubus parvifolius. Loamy banks of the Hog Bay River. 


156 


*Acena ovina. Pasture slopes by the sea, south of Kangaroo 
Head. 

Acena sanguisorbe. KangI., 2. Brown. Open lands and shady 
places, chiefly near the sea. Dudley Peninsula, Kingscote, 
&e.; Mount Pleasant to the Stun’sail-boom River. 


CRASSULACER. 
*Tillea verticillaris. Rocks, shaded gullies, and sand-dunes, 
Dudley Peninsula; Bay of Shoals and Western Cove. 
*Tillea recurva. Eleanor River. 
*Tillea macrantha. Mossy banks in the gullies of North 
Dudley Peninsula. 


ONAGRER. 
*Epilobium tetragonum. Inundated ground, throughout 
Dudley Peninsula; Discovery Flat, Cygnet River, Hawk’s 
Nest and American River. 


HALORAGER. 

Loudonia Behrii. Kang. 1., Waterhouse. Sandy heath-ground, 
American River to Karatta. 

Haloragis mucronata. Kang. L., R. Brown. 

*Haloragis tetragyna. Discovery Flat. 

*Haloragis teucrioides. Stony and sandy heath-ground, Kings- 
cote to D’Estrees Bay and Eleanor River. Central Dudley 
Peninsula. 

*Myriophyllum elatinoides. Cygnet River. . 

*Myriophyllum variifolium. Eleanor and Stun’sail-boom 
Rivers. 


MYRTACER. 

Darwinia micropetala. Kang. I., Bannier. 

Calycothrix tetragona. Kang. IL., Fl. Austral. Coast scrubs 
chiefly, Kingscote, Bay of Shoals, American River, Mount 
Pleasant to Karatta. Hog Bay River. 

Lhotzkya glaberrima. Kang. I., Bannier. Sandy heath ground 
near D’Estrees Bay, and from Mount Pleasant to Karatta. 

Thryptomene ericea. Kang. 1., Bannier, Waterhouse. Heath 
near Kingscote and American River. 

*Thryptomene ciliata. Heath ground White Lagoon, Mount 
Pleasant, to Stun’sail-boom River. 

Beckea crassifolia. Kang. 1., Waterhouse. 

*Kunzea pomifera. Sandhills, Vivonne Bay. 

Leptospermum levigatum. Kang. I., Frag. Phyt., iv., 60. 

Leptospermum scoparium. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Common 
on the wet sandy heaths of the main mass of the island. 

Leptospermum myrsinoides. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Stun’sail- 
boom River. 

*Leptospermum lanigerum. Thickets along the margins of the 
south-western rivers. 


157 


Callistemon coccineus. Kang. I., Fl. Austral. Olaypans 
throughout the island; Hog Bay River; heath-ground 
Central Dudley Peninsula. 

Melaleuca acuminata. Kang. I., R. Brown, Waterhouse. Sandy 
ground, Kingscote. Common throughout Dudley Penin- 
sula. 

Melaleuca gibbosa. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Common on heathy 
ground and around claypans. 

Melaleuca squarrosa. Kang. 1, R. Brown. 

Melaleuca cylindrica. Kang. L., R. Brown. 

Melaleuca uncinata. Kang. L., Waterhouse. Chief constituent 
of the sandy heath-ground. Central Dudley Peninsula. 

Melaleuca parviflora. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Kingscote to the 
Freestone Range; Mount Mary. Common throughout 
Dudley Peninsula, except on the sandy heath-ground. 

Melaleuca pustulata. Kang. I1., Waterhouse. Salt swamps and 
by the sea generally distributed ; Murray’s Lagoon and 
around subsaline claypans or “ti-tree flats” about Mount 
Pleasant. 

*Eucalyptus capitellata. On the high sandy ground between 
Mount Pleasant and the Stun’sail-boom River. 

Eucalyptus santalifolia. Kang. I., R. Brown. Chiefly near 
the coast around Dudley Peninsula, at the Cygnet River, 
American River and White Lagoon. 

*Eucalyptus obliqua. On the dividing ridge between Birch- - 
more Lagoon and Mount Pleasant. 

*Kucalyptus gracilis. Stony heath-ground from Mount Plea- 
sant to the Stun’sail-boom River. ) 
Eucalyptus hemiphloia. Kang. I., R. Brown. The Wells, 

Western Cove, Nepean Bay. 

Eucalyptus paniculata. Banks of the Cygnet River, Water- 
house. 

Eucalyptus largiflorens. Cygnet River, Waterhouse. 

*Eucalyptus Leucoxylon. Grassy flats on the western and 
southern parts of Dudley Peninsula; Twelve-tree Flat, 
between Bay of Shoals and Cygnet River; banks of 
Cygnet, Eleanor and Stun’sail-boom Rivers. 

*Kucalyptus corynocalyx. Freestone Hill Range; American 
River, on alluvium; chief constituent of the forest- 
growth on the Cygnet, Eleanor and other Rivers. 

Eucalyptus cneorifolia. Kang. I., R. Brown. Northern and 
western parts of Dudley Peninsula, and westward along 
north coast to Smith’s Bay. 

Eucalyptus cosmophylla. Kang. I., Waterhouse. A chief con- 
stituent of the scrub, on stony ground, from the Cygnet 
River to American River, and Stun’sail-boom River. 

Eucalyptus incrassata. Kang. I., Baudin’s Exped. Freestone 


158 


Hill Range; rocky shores of Bay of Shoals and American 
River; Eleanor River. The varietal form dwmosa consti- 
tuted the chief mass of the mallee scrub throughout the 
island. 3 

Eucalyptus viminalis, Kang. I., &. Brown. Cygnet River 
among LH. corynocalyx. 

Eucalyptus rostrata. Cygnet River, Waterhouse, Tate; Dis- 
covery Flat. 


RHAMNACED. 

Pomaderris apetala. Kang. I., Waterhouse. 

*Pomaderris racemosa. Heath-ground about American River 
and Mount Mary; sandy tracts near Rocky Point, American 
Beach. Var. Shady banks of the Cygnet River ; gorge of 
the Hog Bay River, and Deep Creek, Dudley Peninsula. 

*Pomaderris obcordata. Sand-dunes, Mount Mary; stony 
ridge between American Beach and Salt Lagoon, Dudley 
Peninsula. 

*Spyridium obovatum. Forest on the Stun’sail-boom River. 

Spyridium spathulatum. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Heaths, Kings- 
cote, American River, &c., to the Stun’sail-boom River; 
Central Dudley Peninsula. 

Spyridium halmaturinum. Kang. I., Sealey. Freestone Hill 
Range, Waterhouse. Western Cove to American River 
and D’Estrees Bay ; Cygnet River to the south-west coast. 
Sandy ground near Rocky Point, Dudley Peninsula. 

*Spyridium vexilliferum. American River and Kingscote. 

Spyridium leucophractum. Kang. I., Waterhouse, in Frag. 

‘Phyt., iii, 77. On calciferous sandstone towards the 
Eleanor River. 

Spyridium Waterhousei. At the foot of the Freestone Hill 
Range, Waterhouse, in Frag. Phyt., ii1., 88. Heath-ground, 
American River, White Lagoon, thence to the forest of 
sugar-gum trees at Karatta. Heath-ground, Central 
Dudley Peninsula. 


UMBELLIFER&. 

*Hydrocotyle hirta. Thickets, White-Gum Gully, Dudley 
Peninsula. 

*Hydrocotyle laxiflora. Under Hucalyptus leucorylon, in the 
gorge of the Hog Bay River. 

*Hydrocotyle tripartita. Shady banks of the Cygnet, Eleanor, 
and Stun’sail-boom Rivers. 

*Hydrocotyle crassiuscula, n. sp., allied to H. trachycarpa. 
Heath-ground, Central Dudley Peninsula. 

*Hydrocotyle callicarpa. Mossy banks in gullies, under shade 
of thickets, and wet heath-ground, Dudley Peninsula. 

Hydrocotyle capillaris. Kang I., Fl. Austral. Wet banks of 


159 


creeks, Dudley Peninsula; on burnt heath-ground, 
Central Dudley Peninsula. 

*Hydrocotyle Asiatica. Wet banks of the Cygnet and Eleanor 
Rivers. 

*Didiscus pusillus. Sandy ground, under the shade of shrubs, 
near Rocky Point, Dudley Peninsula. 

*Trachymene heterophylla. Heath-ground between American 
River and D’Estrees Bay, White Lagoon, and Eleanor 
River. : 

Xanthosia dissecta. Kang. I., Fl. Austral. Heath near 
American River and at the Eleanor River. 

*Eryngium vesiculosum. Inundated ground, Birchmore’s 
Lagoon, and at Hawk’s Nest; wet banks of the Eleanor 
and Stun’sail-boom Rivers. 

*Apium prostratum. Salt Lagoon, Bay of Shoals, &c.; sea 
cliffs on the south coast; wet banks of Cygnet, Eleanor, 
and other rivers. Generally distributed throughout Dudley 
Peninsula. 

*Crantzia lineata. Mud-banks of the Cygnet and Eleanor 
Rivers. 

*Daucus brachiatus. Open places, Emu Creek, Kingscote, 
Western Cove, American River, and widely distributed 
throughout Dudley Peninsula. 


SANTALACER. 

Choretrum glomeratum. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Common on 
sandy heath-ground, Bay of Shoals and Kingscote to 
D’Estrees Bay and Stun’sail-boom River; Central Dudley 
Peninsula. 

Choretrum spicatum. Kang. I., Bannier. 

*Leptomeria aphylla. Heath-ground near the Eleanor River 
and at Karatta. 

Exocarpos cupressiformis. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Thickets 
on the Stun’sail-boom River; sparsely distributed through- 
out the Dudley Peninsula. 

PROTEACER. 

Petrophila multisecta. Kang. 1., Waterhouse, in Frag. Phyt., 
vi., 242. Heaths, from Cygnet River eastward to Ameri- 
can River, and south-west to the Stun’sail-boom River. 

Adenanthos sericea. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Heath lands, 
from Cygnet River to Redbanks, American River and 
D’Estrees Bay, thence to the Eleanor River, &c. 

Adenanthos terminalis. Kang. I., Fl. Austral.; with the last. 

Conospermum patens. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Wet sandy 
heath near D’Estrees Bay, north of Mount Pleasant and 
near Karatta. | 

Grevillea parviflora, var.? Kang. 1., Waterhouse. Forest on 
the Stun’sail-boom River at Karatta. 


160 


Grevillea ilicifolia. Kang. l., Waterhouse. Kingscote, south 
of Cygnet River, American River, and White Lagoon to 
Eleanor River. 

Hakea rostrata. Kang. I., #7. Austral. American River, and 
along the south coast. Heath, Central Dudley Peninsula 

Hakea rugosa. Kang. L., Waterhouse. Sandy heath-ground, 
American River to D’Estrees Bay ; and along south coast. 
Central Dudley Peninsula, &. S. Rogers ! 

Hakea flexilis. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Between the salt 
lagoons west of Bay of Shoals; forming dense thickets 
on sandy ground, south of Cygnet River to Birchmore 
Lagoon ; Murray Lagoon, thence to Karatta. 

Banksia marginata. Kang. I., Waterhouse. _ Sandy heath- 
ground, from the Cygnet River to D’Estrees Bay, and the 
Stun’sail-boom River. 

Banksia ornata. Kang. I., Prag. Phyt., vii., 56. Wet sandy 
ground between Cygnet River and Birchmore Lagoon, be- 
tween American River and D’Estrees Bay; White Lagoon, 
and frequently to the Stun’sail-boom River. 


THYMELES. 

*Pimelea spathulata. Heath, near American River; Kingscote, 
R. S. Rogers! Common throughout Dudley Peninsula. 

Pimelea ligustrina. Sandy scrub, Kang. I., Waterhouse, in 
Frag. Phyt., vil., 5. Hawk’s Nest and Eleanor River. 

Pimelea microcephala. Kang. I., &. Brown. 

*Pimelea serpyllifolia. Kingscote, R. 8. Rogers! Heath, be- 
tween American River and D’Estrees Bay; sand-dunes, 
Vivonne Bay; coast tracts, Dudley Peninsula. 

Pimelea flava. Kang. I., Waterhouse, in Frag. Phyt., vii., 6. 
Heath, near American River; Mount Pleasant to the 
Eleanor River ; Central Dudley Peninsula. 

Pimelea octophylla. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Heaths, on stony 
or sandy ground by the Cygnet River; Redbanks to 
American River and D’Estrees Bay, and along south coast. 

*Pimelea curviflora. On calciferous sandstone, Hog Bay 
River. 

*Pimelea phylicoides. Heath, between American River and 
D’ Estrees Bay. 

Pimelea stricta. Kang. I., Heuzenroeder, in Frag. Phyt., vii., 4. 


RUBIACER. 
*Opercularia varia. Heath ground, Central Dudley Peninsula 
Galium australe. Kang. I, Fl. Austral. Western Cove; 
thickets Dudley Peninsula. 
*Galium umbrosum. Open ground, Western Cove and 
American River; natural pastures Dudley Peninsula. 


161 


COMPOSITS. 

Aster axillaris. Kang. I., R. Brown. Near the coast, Kings- 
cote and American River; widely distributed, Dudley 
Peninsula. 

*Aster floribundus. Eucalypt-forests at the Harriet, Eleanor 
and Stun’sail-boom Rivers. . 

Aster teretifolius. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Scrubs about 
American River and White Lagoon. Generally distributed 
throughout Dudley Peninsula. 

*Aster exul. On the calciferous sandstone formation, Hog 
Bay River to American Beach, and American River ; 
Kingscote, R. 8S. Rogers! Sand-dunes, Mount Mary. 

Aster Huegelii. Kang. I1., Waterhouse. American River and 
adjacent south coast. Stony ground between Mount 
Pleasant and Eleanor River. 

*Vittadinia australis. Kingscote and Salt Lagoon to Dis- 
covery Flat; Murray’s Lagoon; Mount Mary. Widely 
dispersed over Dudley Peninsula. 

*Lagenophora Billardieri. Mossy banks in gullies and under 
shade of gum trees and thickets, Dudley Peninsula. 

*Lagenophora emphysopus. Pasture slopes by the sea, south 
of Kangaroo Head. 

*Cotula filifolia. Along courses of salt-water creeks and by 
the sea, northern coast of Dudley Peninsula; also clay 
flats in the basin of Deep Creek. 

Cotula coronopifolia. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Cygnet River. 
By creeks and wet ground throughout Dudley Peninsula. 

*Cotula australis. Pasture lands, under shade, throughout 
Dudley Peninsula ; and by the coast towards Kangaroo 
Head. 

Centipeda Cunninghami. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Inundated 
ground and river-banks, throughout the island. 

*Achnophora Tatei. Wet heathy ground, two miles east from 
Karatta. 

*Tsoetopsis graminifolia. Pasture slopes by the sea south of 
Kangaroo Head. 

Myriocephalus rhizocephalus. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Inun- 
dated ground, Cygnet River and Salt Lagoon. 

*Angianthus Preissianus. Margins of the salt-water creeks 
and clay flats throughout Dudley Peninsula. 

*Angianthus strictus. Pasture slopes by the sea, north and 
west coasts of Dudley Peninsula. 

Calocephalus Brownii. Kang. I., Fl. Austral. Rocks by the 
sea, north-east coast of Dudley Peninsula, Kingscote and 
D’Estrees Bay. 

Ixodia achilleoides. Kang. I., Fl. Austral. Very abundant 
throughout the island. 


M 


162 


*Cassinia levis. Murray’s Lagoon. On calciferous sandstone, 
Hog Bay River. 

Cassinia spectabilis. Kang. I., Fl. Austral. On burnt ground, 
throughout Dudley Peninsula, American River, Kingscote 
and Emu Creek. Sparsely distributed as far west as the 
Eleanor River. 

*Briochlamys Behrii. Cliffs by the sea, D’Estrees Bay and 
near Hog Bay River. 

*Toxanthus perpusillus. Grassy slopes by the sea, south of 
Kangaroo Head. 

-*Millotia tenuifoha. Sandy soil near the coast at Western 
Cove and American River. Wet banks and thickets, 
Dudley Peninsula. 

Ixiolena supina. Kang. I., Fl. Austral. Sea cliffs around 
Dudley Peninsula and D’Estrees Bay. 

~*Podosperma angustifolia. Sand-ridges shores of Western 
Cove, American Beach, and American River; sand-dunes 
at Mount 1] Mary; on calciferous sandstone, Hog Bay © 
River. 

*Podolepis rugata. Sea-cliffs of D’Estrees Bay. 

Helichrysum obtusifolium. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Near 
Western Cove, Nepean Bay ; between Mount Pleasant 
and the Eleanor River. 

*Helichrysum lucidum. Smith’s Bay. 

Helichrysum adenophorum. Scrub near Wallan’s Hut, Water- 
house. Smith’s Bay; heathy ground from Cygnet River 
to Mount Prospect, and the Stun’sail-boom River. 

*Helichrysum leucopsidium. Pasture slopes by the sea, 
D’Estrees Bay, and towards Hog Bay River. Sand-dunes 
Vivonne Bay and American Beach. 

*Helichrysum retusum. Heathy ground at Kingscote, and 
Red-banks to American River. Mallee scrub, north 
Dudley Peninsula ; and near Rocky Point. 

*Helipterum dimorpholepis. Grassy slopes by the sea, south 
of Kangaroo Head. 

Gnaphalium luteo-album. Kang. I., #7. Austral. American 
River and about Mount Mary. Widely dispersed over 
Dudley Peninsula. 

Gnaphalium Japonicum. Kang. L., Waterhouse. Discovery 
Flat; White Lagoon and “Eleanor River. Common on 
Dudley Pohitisila. 

*Gnaphalium indutum. Cliff-slopes on the north and west 
coasts, clay-flats and under shade of thickets, Dudley 
Peninsula. 

*Stuartina Muelleri. With the last. 

*Erechthites prenanthoides. . Sandy ground, Cygnet River. 
Sparsely distributed throughout Dudley Peninsula. 


163 


Erechthites arguta. Kang. I., Fl. Austral. Kingscote; Cygnet 
River. 3 : 

*Erechthites quadridentata. Open mallee scrub, and extending 
to heathy ground, north Dudley Peninsula. 

Senecio lautus. Kang. 1I., Fl. Austral. Sea cliffs, D’ Estrees 
Bay to Hog Bay River, north coast of Dudley Peninsula ; 
sand-dunes of Vivonne Bay. . ; 

Senecio odoratus. Kang. 1., &. Brown. Bushy places, widely 
distributed. 

*Cymbonotus Lawsonianus. Natural pasture lands and grassy 
glades in. mallee scrub, throughout Dudley Peninsula. 


CAMPANULACE®. 

Lobelia microsperma. Kang. 1., Waterhouse, Heaths common 
Cygnet River to Mount Pleasant, &c. Grassy slopes by 
the sea, D’Estrees Bay. 

Lobelia anceps. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Wet banks of Hog 
Bay, Cygnet, Eleanor and other western rivers; sea cliffs, 
Hog Bay River. » 

*Lobelia platycalyx. Mudbanks of the Cygnet River. 

*Wahlenbergia gracilis. Cygnet River and American River ; 
common throughout Dudley Peninsula. . | 


CANDOLLEACE. 


*Candollea graminifolia. Wet sandy heath, near D’Estrees 
Bay, and between the Harriet and Stun’sail-boom Rivers. 

*Candollea calcarata. Alony runnels, sandy heath-ground, 
Central Dudley Peninsula. 

*Candollea despecta. Along runnels, clayey heath-ground, 
Central Dudley Peninsula. 

*Leewenhekia dubia. Grassy slopes by the sea, north-west 
coast of Dudley Peninsula. 


GOODENIACEX. 


Goodenia ovata. Cygnet River, Waterhouse, Tate. Bushy 
places by water-courses— American River, Eleanor, 
Harriet and Stun’sail-boom Rivers; mallee- and heath- 
scrubs, Dudley Peninsula. 

*Goodenia varia. Sea cliffs of D’Estrees Bay. 

*Goodenia geniculata. Sandy heath-ground by Cygnet River, 

~at White Lagoon and Mount Pleasant. 
var. ertophylla. Wet heath between American River and 
D’Estrees Bay. 

*Selliera radicahs. Cygnet River, Murray Lagoon, Eleanor 
and Stun’sail-boom Rivers. . 

*Scevola crassifolia. Coast hills, Pennington Bay and east- 
ward, and at Vivonne Bay. 

*Scevola emula. About Mount Pleasant and towards Mount 


164 


Mary; profusely abundant over area of burnt heath, 
Central Dudley Peninsula. 

Sceevola linearis. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Wet sandy heath- 
ground between American River and D’Estrees Bay. 
*Dampiera lanceolata. Near D’Estrees Bay with the last ; 
sandy ground by the sea near Rocky Point, Dudley 

Peninsula. 


GENTIANER. 

Sebea ovata. Kang. 1., Heuzenroeder. Banks of the Eleanor 
River ; pasture slopes by the sea, D’Estrees Bay; every- 
where throughout Dudley Peninsula. 

*Erythrea australis. On clay soils, Kingscote to the Free- 
stone Hill Range; by the Cygnet and Eleanor Rivers; 
natural pastures throughout Dudley Peninsula. Speci- 
mens with white flowers are abundant in the mallee-scrub ~ 
on stony ground between Rocky Point and Salt Lagoon, 
Dudley Peninsula. 


LOGANIACE®. 

*Mitrasacme paradoxa. Mossy banks in shaded gullies, and 
wet sandy heath-ground, Dudley Peninsula. 

*Logania crassifolia. Sea cliffs, D’Estrees Bay. 

Logania ovata. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Heathy ground, 
American River, White Lagoon, and Mount Pleasant to 
Karatta. Between Rocky Point and Salt Lagoon, Dudley 
Peninsula. 


PLANTAGINESD. 

Plantago varia. Kang. 1, &. Brown (as P. parviflora), Water- 
house. Discovery Flat, Cygnet River, Eleanor River. 
Common grassy slopes of sea cliffs and natural pastures 
throughout Dudley Peninsula. 


PRIMULACES. 
*Samolus repens. Cygnet River, Bay of Shoals and contiguous 
lagoons, Murray’s Lagoon, and Eleanor River. Shores of 
Salt Lagoon, sea cliffs at Hog Bay River, Dudley Penin- 
sula. 
APOCYNE. 
*Alyxia buxifolia. Sea cliffs, Bay of Shoals, Kingscote, Wes- 
tern Cove, and American River. 


CONVOLVULACEZ. 
Convolvulus erubescens. Kang. I., Baudin’s Exped. Emu 
Creek, Discovery Flat, and Cygnet River. Natural pas- 
tures, North Dudley Peninsula. 
*Dichondra repens. Thickets and shady places throughout 
Dudley Peninsula. Freestone Hill Range, Kingscote, 
American River, and Eleanor River. 


165 


*Wilsonia rotundifolia. Bay of Shoals and Salt Lagoon, 
Murray’s Lagoon. : 

*Wilsonia humilis. Salt Lagoon by Pelican Lagoon. 

*Wilsonia Backhousii. Margin of Salt Lagoon by Flour-cask 
Bay. 

SOLANE®. 

Solanum nigrum. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Growing among 
mica-slate rocks on the upland country about American 
Beach. : 

Solanum simile. Kang. 1. R. Brown. Towards Kangaroo 
Head and Hog Bay River. Kingscote, American River, 
and River Eleanor. 

Nicotiana suaveolens. By the seashore, Leschenault. Rocks by 
the sea, north and north-west coasts of Dudley Peninsula ; 
gorge of the Hog Bay River. 

*Anthocercis myosotidea. Wet sandy heath between American 
River and D’Estrees Bay. 


SCROPHULARINES. 

*Mimulus repens. Wet banks of Hog Bay, Cygnet and 
Eleanor Rivers. 

Gratiola Peruviana. Kang. 1., Waterhouse. Cynet and Stun’- 
sail-boom Rivers. 

Limosella aquatica. Kang. I., R. Brown. 

*Veronica distans. Sand-dunes and calciferous sand-rock, Hog 
Bay River, Rocky Point, American River and Mount 
Mary. 

ieiaiticth Chlyieinds Kang. I., Waterhouse. 

*Euphrasia Brownii. Sea cliffs, D’Estrees Bay. 


LENTIBULABIN®. 
*Polypompholyx tenella. Margin of runnels on heathy ground, 
Central Dudley Peninsula. 


ASPERIFOLIACES. 
*Myosotis australis. Shady gullies and thickets throughout 
Dudley Peninsula. 


LABIATH. 

Scutellaria humilis. Kang. I1., R. Brown, Sealey. Thickets, on 
the sand-dunes at Hog Bay and American Beach, at Hog 
Bay River and Mopehawk Gully. 

Prostanthera spinosa. Scrub near Wallan’s Hut and Cygnet 
Bay, Waterhouse in Frag. Phyt., vi., 108. Bushy places, 
Cygnet and Stun’sail-boom Rivers, &c.; heath-ground from 
Mount Pleasant to Karatta. 

Prostanthera coccinea. Sandy-scrub, Waterhouse. Common 
about Kingscote and American River; stony ridge near 
Rocky Point, Dudley Peninsula. 

Prostanthera chlorantha. Cygnet Bay, Waterhouse. 


166. 


*Westringia rigida. Dudley Peninsula, 7. Willson ! 
Ajuga australis. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Cygnet River; under 
gum trees, Hog Bay River. 


MYOPORINER. 

*Myoporum insulare. By the coast around Dudley Peninsula, 
Nepean Bay, &ce. 

Myoporum viscosum. Kang..I., Prag. Phyt., vii., 110. Kings- 
cote, American River, Cygnet, Eleanor and Stun’sail-boom 
Rivers; sand-dunes at Mount Mary; common in the 
mallee-scrub, Dudley Peninsula, flowering while still 
young, when not attained one foot in height. 

*Myoporum parvifolium. Hawk’s Nest. 

Eremophila Behriana. Kang. I., Waterhouse. Wet. heath, 
near D’Estrees Bay. : 

Eremophila Brownii. Kang. 1., Waterhouse. Heath and coast 
plains, common; rare in mallee serub on the north coast 
of Dudley Peninsula. 


EPACRIDEZ. | 

Styphelia humifusa. Kang. I., in Fl. Austral. Heaths, 
common ; sandhills at Mount Mary. 

Styphelia Sonderi. Kang. I., in Fl. Austral. Heathy grounds 
at American River, Mount Pleasant, Eleanor River and 
Central Dudley Peninsula. 

*Styphelia strigosa. Mount Pleasant. 

Styphelia Richei. Kang. I., in Fl. Austral. Sand-dunes, 
pee Bay, American River, Vivonne Bay and American 
Beach. 

*Styphelia concurva. Stony heath-ground, Harriet River and 
American River; stringybark scrub, near Birchmore 
Lagoon. 

Styphelia rufa. Kang. I., Sealey, Waterhouse. Sandy heath- 
ground, near American River, Birchmore Lagoon to Mount 
Pleasant and Karatta; Central Dudley Peninsula. 

*Styphelia striata. Heaths about American River, and from 
Mount Pleasant to Karatta. 

Styphelia patula. Kang. I1.,in Fl. Austral. Western Cove, 
and stony ridge, south of Rocky Point, Dudley Peninsula. 

Styphelia depressa. Kang. I., R. Brown. Widely dispersed, 
Dudley Peninsula; Kingscote, White Lagoon, &c. 

*Styphelia ovalifolia. Sand-dunes, Vivonne Bay. 

Brachyloma ericoides. Kang. I., in Fl. Austral. Sandy heath- 
ground between American River and D’Estrees Bay. 


CONIFERS. : 

Callitris verrucosa. Kang. I., R. Brown. On sandy ground 

near the coast, Hog Bay River to American Beach and 
American River ; Western Cove and Bay of Shoals. 


167 


*Callitris cupressiformis. Thicket, about four miles from 
Cygnet River, towards Birchmore Lagoon. 


ORCHIDER. 

*Thelymitra longifolia. Thickets, Mopehawk Gully, &c., North 
Dudley Peninsula. 

*Diuris longifolia. North Dudley Peninsula, 7. Willson! 

*Microtis porrifolia. Natural pastures and open thickets 
throughout Dudley Peninsula; Cygnet River. 

*Pterostylis precox. Bay of Shoals and Dudley Peninsula, 
RR. 8. Rogers! 

*Pterostylis nana. Heath between Hog Bay and Hog Bay 
River. 

*Cyrtostylis reniformis. Bay of Shoals, R. S. Rogers! Glades 
on edge of mallee-scrub, Mopehawk Gully, and under ti- 
tree scrub by Salt Lagoon, Dudley Peninsula. 

Caladenia carnea. Kang. I., Waterhouse. 

*Caladenia deformis. North Dudley Peninsula, 7. Willson !; 
heath, Central Dudley Peninsula. 


IRIDER. 

*Patersonia glauca. Wet sandy heath at White Lagoon, and 
at three miles east from Karatta. 

Sisyrinchium cyaneum. Kang. I., R. Brown. Widely distri- 
buted through Dudley Peninsula. Grass-lands and clay- 
flats, common on the north coast, but extending to Karatta ; 
occasionally on loose sand as at Mount Mary and American 
Beach. 


HYDROCHARIDES. . 
*Halophila ovata. Bay of Shoals and Nepean Bay. 
*Ottelia ovalifolia. Cygnet River. 


LILIACES. 

*Dianella levis. Cygnet River, Western Cove, towards 
D’Estrees Bay, and at Karatta. Open parts of mallee 
scrub and thickets, sparsely distributed, over Dudley 
Peninsula. 

*Burchardia umbellata. Heath near D’Estrees Bay and 
Central Dudley Peninsula; heathy scrub, Hog Bay River.. 

Thysanotus dichotomus. Kang. I., in Frag. Phyt., vu, 69. 
Heath-ground towards D’Estrees Bay, at White Lagoon, 
and Mount Pleasant. 

*Thysanotus Patersoni. Thickets and heath-ground through- 
out North and West Dudley Peninsula. 

*Chamescilla corymbosa. Sandy heath-ground about sources 
of Hog Bay River. 

Bulbine semibarbata. Kang. I., R. Brown. The commonest 
plant on Dudley Peninsula. Clayey ground, Kingscote to 
Freestone Range, to American River and Mount Pleasant. 


168 


*Arthropodium strictum. Gullies and cliffs by the sea, north- 
west parts of Dudley Peninsula; gorge of the Hog Bay 
River. 

*Arthropodium laxum. On the metamorphic rocks of ‘Kings- 
cote Point. 

*Xanthorrheea quadrangulata. Heath-ground from south side 
of Cygnet River to D’Estrees Bay and the Stun’sail-boom 
River ; Central Dudley Peninsula. 


FLUVIALES. 

*Triglochin centrocarpa. Mossy banks in gullies and cliff 
slopes by the sea, North-west Dudley Peninsula. 

*Triglochin striata. Margins of the Cygnet, Eleanor, Stun’- 
sail-boom and Hog Bay Rivers. 

Triglochin mucronata. Kang. I., in Fl. Austral. 

*Triglochin procera. Cygnet,* Eleanor and Stun’sail-boom 
Rivers. 

*Potamogeton natans. Lagoon-like extensions of the Lower 
Cygnet River; in the Stun’sail-boom River. 

*Potamogeton obtusifolius. Cygnet River. 

*Potamogeton pectinatus. Cygnet and Eleanor Rivers. 

*Ruppia maritima. Cygnet, Eleanor and Hog Bay Rivers, 
Deep Creek. 


JUNCACER. 

*Luzula campestris. Natural pastures and glades in thickets 
throughout Dudley Peninsula. 

*Juncus bufonius. American River, Margins of streams, clay- 
flats, and wet ground, Dudley Peninsula. 

*Juncus pauciflorus. Thickets bordering the Harriet and 
Stun’sail-boom Rivers. 

*Juncus pallidus. Common by margins of rivers and inundated 
flats throughout the island. 


RESTIACES. 


*Trithuria submersa. By runnels, heath-ground Central 
Dudley Peninsula. 

*Aphelia gracilis. With the last. 

*Aphelia Pumilio. Mossy banks in gullies, and cliffs by the 
sea, North Dudley Peninsula. 

*Centrolepis polygna. With the last. 

*Centrolepis strigosa. With the last, and at American River. 

*Centrolepis aristata. By runnels, heath-ground Central 
Dudley Peninsula. Var. pygmea. Sea-slopes, south of 
Kangaroo Head. 

*Calastrophus fastigiatus. Wet sandy heath-ground between 
American River and D’Estrees Bay, White Lagoon and 
near Karatta. 


169 


CYPERACED. 

*Heleocharis sphacelata. Cygnet, Harriet and Stun’sail-boom: 
Rivers. | ; 

*Heleocharis multicaulis. Stun’saii-boom River. 

*Heleocharis acuta. Cygnet River at the “sheep-wash.”’ 

*Scirpus fluitans. Cygnet, Stun’sail-boom and Hog Bay 
Rivers. ? 

*Scirpus riparius. Hog Bay and Eleanor Rivers; soakage at 
Frenchman’s Rock, Hog Bay, and heath-ground central 
Dudley Peninsula. 

*Scirpus cartilagineus. Damp gullies and cliff-slopes by the 
sea, north Dudley Peninsula ; American River. 

*Scirpus inundatus. Cygnet and Stun’sail-boom Rivers. 

*Scirpus nodosus. Depressed parts of sandhills, Nepean Bay, 
American River, Vivonne Bay, American Beach and Hog 
Bay River. 

*Scirpus setaceus. Heath-ground, Central Dudley Peninsula. 

*Chorizandra enodis. Inundated ground Discovery Flat, 
Birchmore’s Lagoon and White Lagoon. 

*Scheenus nitens. Eleanor and Stun’sail-boom Rivers. 

*Schenus Tepperi. Heath near D’Estrees Bay; White 
Lagoon and frequent on open heath-ground to beyond the 
Eleanor River. 

*Schenus apogon. Heath-ground Central Dudley Peninsula. 

*Schenus sculptus. By runnels, heath-ground central Dudley. 
Peninsula. 

*Schenus, sp. With the last. 

*Lepidosperma gladiatum. Sand-dunes between Hog Bay 
River and False Cape. t 

*Lepidosperma viscidum. Around inundated ground, through- 
out main mass of the island; heath, Central Dudley. 
Peninsula. 

*Lepidosperma filiforme. Sandy heathy ground, common; _ 
Central Dudley Peninsula. 

*Cladium junceum. Wet heathy ground between the Eleanor 
and Stun’sail-boom Rivers. 

*Cladium Filum. Inundated ground, White Lagoon, Hawk’s 
Nest, Mount Pleasant and near Karatta. 

*Cladium deustum. Coast-cliffs between Pennington Bay and 
Hog Bay River; stony ground between Mount Pleasant 
and Eleanor River. 

*Caustis pentandra. Wet heath between American River and 
D’Estrees Bay, near White Lagoon and Karatta. 

*Carex tereticaulis. Stun’sail-boom River. 

*Carex pseudo-cyperus. With the last. 


170 


GRAMINED. 

*Spinifex hirsutus. Sandy sea-shores, Bay of Shoals, Nepean 
Bay, D’Estrees Bay, &c.; American Beach. 

*Lepturus incurvatus. Salt Lagoon and at Kingscote ; along 
the margins of the salt-water creeks, north Dudley 
Peninsula. 

*Erhharta stipoides. Banks of Cygnet River; shady places 
throughout Dudley Peninsula. 

*Stipa teretifolia. Rocks by the sea, north coast of Dudley 
Peninsula. 

*Stipa semibarbata. Wet heath between American River and 
D’Estrees Bay. 

*Stipa aristiglumis. American River and Discovery Fiat. 
Open grassy lands throughout Dudley Peninsula. 

*Dichelachne crinita. Open places in mallee scrub, north 
Dudley Peninsula; sandy ground, Rocky Point; Hog Bay 
River. if 

*Dichelachne sciurea. Heath near American River, and 
throughout Dudley Peninsula. | 

*Echinopogon ovatus. Thickets, on the Cygnet River; under 
shade of gum-trees, Hog Bay River. | 

*Sporobolus Virginicus. Wet subsaline places, Cygnet and 
Eleanor Rivers ; north and north-west. coasts of Dudley 
Peninsula and Hog Bay River. 

*A crostis Solanderi. Inundated ground, towards the Freestone 
Range, Nepean Bay and American River ; shady places 
on the Cygnet River. Natural pastures throughout 
Dudley Peninsula; also heath-ground. ? 

*A crostis quadriseta. Shaded banks of the Cygnet and Stun’- 
sail-boom Rivers. 

*Danthonia penicillata. Shady places, American River, Eleanor 
and Cygnet Rivers. Natural pastures throughout Dudley 
Peninsula; also heath-ground. 

*Danthonia nervosa. Shady places, Cygnet and American 
Rivers. | 

*Poa cespitosa. Sea-cliffs along south coast; subsaline tracts, 
Bay of Shoals; natural pastures throughout Dudley 
Peninsula. 

*Festuca bromoides. Natural pastures, Freestone Hill Range 
and throughout Dudley Peninsula. 

*Festuca litoralis. Sand-dunes, Hog Bay River. 

Distichlis maritima. Kang. I., Heuzenroeder. Littoral and 
subsaline tracts, Bay of Shoals, Nepean Bay, and north 
coast of Dudley Peninsula. 

*Bromus arenarius.. Sand-dunes, Hog Bay and American 
Beach. 

*Aoropyron scabrum. ‘Towards Freestone Hill, American 


171 


River, and common in thickets throughout Dudley 
Peninsula. 


FILICES. 

Adiantum Aethiopicum. Kang. I, R. Brown. Thickets on 
the Stun’sail-boom River. 

*Cheilanthes tenuifolia. On metamorphic rocks, American 
River, North Dudley Peninsula, Deep Creek and Hog 
Bay River. 

Pteris aquilina. Kang. I., Waterhouse. At the Wells, Western 
Cove; American River; by the Harriet and Stun’sail- 
boom Rivers. | 

*Lomaria discolor. Thickets in the bed of the Stun’sail-boom 
River. 

*Lomaria capensis. With the last. 

*Grammitis leptophylla. Deep Creek and gullies on the north- 
west coast of Dudley Peninsula. 


172 


MISCELLANEOUS CONTRIBUTIONS 
TO THE 


NATURAL HISTORY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA. 


Edited by Professor R. Tarr, Director of the Natural Science 
Correspondence Department. 


ZOOLOGY. 


NoveE ON THE OCCURRENCE OF PSALIDURA IN SoUTH AUSTRALIA. 


The weevil, remarkable by its having a pair of anal forceps, 
which was exhibited at the May meeting, belongs to the genus 
Psalidura, so the Rev. T. Blackburn informs me. The genus 
Psaliduwra, Macleay, is comprised in the Family Amycteride, 
of the order Curculionide, ‘‘ the most remarkable feature of 
which,”’ writes W. MacLeay, jun., Tran. Entom. Soc., N.S.W., 
I., p. 201, ‘‘is the strong anal forceps with which the male is 
armed . . and seems to enclose the organs of generation 

The large excavation of the last ventral segment in the 
male is remarkable ; but this is also characteristic of the allied 
genus Zalaurinus. . . Very little is known of the habits of 
these insects.”’ 

Thirty-six species of Psalidura inhabit Australia, but are 
most numerous in New South Wales and Queensland. This is 
the first record of the occurrence of the genus in South Aus- 
tralia, represented by a species allied to P. elongata, MacLeay, 
jun. 

Locality —Fowler’s Bay, 7s. A. Richards, one example; 
Mount Parry, Aroona Range, R. Tate, two examples. 

Ralph Tate. 


Notes on Sourn AvstTraLIAN COLEOPTERS DESTRUCTIVE TO 
VEGETATION. 


‘“‘ DIPHUCEPHALA SPLENDENS, W. S. Macleay, v. D. colas- 
pidoides, Gyllenhal—“I do not know which name has the 
priority. Itis a leaf-eater, and when very numerous (as it some- 
times is) 1s injurious to some plants. I have seldom seen it in 
New South Wales, but is the most common in Victoria.”—Hon. 
W. Macleay. 

“During November, 1882, it occurred in myriads about 
Mount Gambier, by Glencoe, to Mount Graham, attacking 
elms, and vines, apricots, and other fruit trees; also 


173 


some indigenous shrubs and trees, particularly Acacia decurrens, 
extensive groves of which I had seen absolutely denuded of 
leaf. Two years before it committed serious depredations 
about Mount Graham. JD. splendens has not hitherto been 
recorded for South Australia, and appears to reach its western 
limit in the South-East of this colony.”—R. Tate. 

“This little pest is a perfect terror to the fruit-growers in 
this colony, and is seen in countless thousands. I have seen 
them covering every living part of Leptospermum bushes for 
miles in extent. When they alight they make short work of 
all green leaves, cherries and plums being specially singled out 
for their attention. In our colony the means generally adopted 
for its extirpation are to light fires near where they are 
thickest, and I am pretty certain that the larve feed on the 
roots of Leptospermum scoparium or L. levigatum. Here these 
insects make their appearance about every three years.’’—Ex- 
tract from letter by Charles French, Botanic Gardens, Mel- 
bourne. 

‘““SPHEROPTERUS sp. comes very close to the genus Otiorhyn- 
chus of Europe, and will, I think, fit in to the genus Spherop- 
terus of Guerin, which represents Otiorhynchus in this part of 
the world; but the species is quite new to me.”—W. Macleay. 

“This weevil was taken in December upon and beneath 
orange trees in the garden of Mr. G. Laughton, Walkerville, 
where it had made sad havoc among the trees named and 
others. It seems to be a different species from the one in- 
festing the almond.” —R. Tate. 

““LAMPRIMA VARIANS, Burmeister ; like all of the genus, it is 
a leaf-eater, but I never before heard of its being destructive.” 
—W. Macleay. 

“The specimens upon which the above determination was 
founded were sent by Mr. Love, Forester, Wirrabara Forest 
Reserve, with the note that it had caused some damage to the 
young forest growth during the summer of 1882.”—2R. Tate. 


List or Marine Moniusca, Rorrnest, FREEMANTLE. 
Named by Professor R. Tate. 

A small parcel of shell-sand forwarded by M. A. H. Cour- 
derot de Malange has furnished, as far as the condition of the 
specimens will admit of satisfactory identification, the following 
species, which are for the most part known only in South Aus- 
tralian waters :— 

Clathurella rufozonata, Angas. 

Clathurella bicolor, Angas. 

Marginella sagittata, Hinds. 

Marginella albida, Tate. 

Bittium tenue, Sow. 


174 


Rissoina elegantula, Angas. 
Rissoina crassa, Angas. 
Cingula spina, Crosse. 
Turbonilla acicularis, Addams. 
Parthenia gracilis, Angas. 
Oscilla lgata, Angas. 
Leiostraca acutissima, Angas. 
Triforis Angasi, Crosse. 
Cerithiopsis croccea, Angas. 


BOTANY. 


BreriogRaPHicaL Norms Rerurting THE ALLEGED ALIEN 
Nature or Two Spectres oF SournH AUSTRALIAN PLANTS. 


1. OROBANCHE CERNUA, Bentham (non Loefl.)—In the pages 
of our Transactions, vol. iv., p. 135, 1881, I have given my 
reasons for the opinion that the only Australian species of the 
genus is indigenous, and probably distinct from the European 
plant with which it had been conjoined. Baron Sir F. yon 
Mueller, in his recently published ‘“‘ Systematic Census of Aus- 
tralian Plants,” has given the Australian plant specific rank 
under the name of Orobanche australiana. Lately, I have had 
an opportunity of reading James Backhouse’s “ Narrative of a 
Visit to the Australian Colonies,” and therein, at p. 511, I 
find recorded the occurrence of “an Orobanche very like O. 
minor of England ’”’ on sandy ground covered by cypresses near 
Port Adelaide. I have gathered O. australiana at the same 
station; the two plants are evidently conspecific; and as 
Backhouse’s observations were made November 30 and De- 
cember 12, 1837, so soon after the settlement of the colony no 
room for doubt is left as to its endemic origin. In September 
of this year I found it in the dry bed of Mount Parry Creek, 
Aroona Range, where it is parasitic on the roots of [xolena 
tomentosa. 


2. VERBENA OFFICINALIS, Linn.—By some this is considered 
an alien; but as Backhouse noted it in 1837 along the borders 
of the River Torrens, its claim to rank as an endemic species is 
thereby satisfactorily established. In the ‘Flora Austra- 
liensis,’”’ it is recorded as occurring “near Adelaide, Blan- 
dowski; and towards Spencer’s Gulf, Warburton.” To these 
localities J can add banks of the Little Para River near Salis- 
bury, banks of the River Murray about Morgan, Lake Alexan- 
drina at Point Pomond, gullies.to the east of Belair and around 
the Springs near Mount Graham. . R. Late. 


175 


Nores on MicrostemMMa TUBEROSUM, 2. Brown. 


This plant belongs to the order Asclepiadez, and was origi- 
nally described by Robert Brown from specimens collected by 
him on islands in the Gulf of Carpentaria; a half-century later 
Baron Mueller found it on the Burdekin. The specific name 
is in allusion to its tuberose underground stems; the tuber, not 
much unlike a potato, is circular in outline, depressed, two or 
three inches in diameter. These characters are drawn from 
specimeus received from Inspector Foelsche, who obtained 
them near Palmerston. Under Mr. Mohan’s care, a tuber 
planted November 30, 1882, developed a slender simple branch 
one-and-a-half foot high, with distant linear leaves, terminat- 
ing in a short raceme of dark-coloured inconspicuous flowers, 
which appeared towards the middle of February. 


Inspector Foelsche writes:—‘ By the aid of the natives I 
have found a bulb plant . . . the bulb of which is eaten by 
them, and I have eaten it myself. It resembles very much a 
white turnip, and when boiled does not taste unlike it; the 
natives eat them raw or roasted. The plant grows plentifully 
at Palmerston and neighbourhood.” dee Pate, 


Nore ON THE PRESENCE OF “TANNIN” IN THE “‘ PoLYGONUM”’ 
oF Exprtorers. By Professor R. Tare. 


Being aware that tannin exists in many plants of the Order 
Polygonacez, I turned my attention to the “ Polygonum-bush”’ 
of explorers, botanically known as Muehlenbeckia Cunninghamit, 
as a probable economic source of that valuable substance. The 
results of two experiments on the dried twigs gave a mean of 
only 3°038 per cent. of tannin, a ratio far too low to render 
the plant commercially valuable. | 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. 


Synonymy oF AusTRALIAN Martine Mottusca. By J. Brazier, 
Proc. Lin. Soc., N.S.W., viil., pp. 224-234. 
Among others, references are made to the following South 
Australian species :— 
Natica Baconi, Angas=NV. Incez, Philipi. 
Cancellaria undulata, Angas—V. granosa. 


Lucina Cumingi, Ad. and Angas=L. dentata, Wood sp. 
Modiolaria barbata. 


176 


New GENERA AND SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN Fisnues. By C. 
W. DeVis, Pro. Linn. Soc., N.S.W., viil., p. 283. 

The following species are founded on South Australian 
samples :— 

Dactylophora (n. gen. of fam. Cirrhitide) semimaculata and 
Platycephalus semermis. 


Description oF A New Honey-Ant. By Sir John Lubbock, 
Proc. Linn. Soc., London, vol. xvii., p. 51, April 17, 1883 (Pl. 
ii., figs. 1-10). 

Melophorus (n. gen.) Bagoti, from Central Australia. 

Remarks oN THE “Manna” orn Lere Insect or Soure 


Avstrania. By J. G. Otto Tepper, Proc. Linn. Soc., London, 
vol. xvii. p. 109, July 31, 1883. 


177 


AboLRACT OF... PROCBE RINGS 


OF THE 


Aoval Society of South Australia, 


OSES 


Orpinary Mretine, Novemper 7, 1882. 


Cuarzes Topp, C.M.G., President, in the chair. 

Battor.—Messrs. John. B. Whiting and A. B. Black were 
elected Fellows. 

Exurpits.—Professor Tarr, F.G.S., exhibited Zrymalium 
Wayit (F. von Mueller and Tate) and Hymenanthera Banksit 
from the Onkaparinga Gorge; also Dendrobiwnm Foelschet 
(F.v.M.), a new epiphytal orchid found by Mr. Paul Foelsche 
at Port Darwin; also a piece of hydrated silicious rock con- 
taining Miocene fossils, found at Tintara vineyard, near Noar- 
lunga, at an elevation of 525 feet above sea level; also a 
collection of seaweeds made by Mr. M. de Courdorot at Rott- 
nest Island; and a collection of Alpine plants from the sources 
of the Mitta Mitta, by James Stirling, Omeo, Victoria. 

Mr. Frazer §. Crawrorp moved—* That the Council of the 
Society be requested to arrange for the opening of the room 
at stated intervals for holding informal meetings.” 

His Honor the Curer Justice moved as an amendment— 
‘“‘That the proposal be referred to the Council for their recom- 
mendation on the subject.” 

The amendment was carried. 

J. Davizs Tuomas, M.D., F.R.C.S., Eng., read a paper upon 
‘Statistics of Hydatid Disease in Australia.” 


Orpinary Merertine, DECEMBER 5, 1882. 
H. Waurrrert, M.D., in the chair. 
Batitor.—The Hon. Allan Campbell, M.LC., &.; E. B. 
Grundy ; and J. E. Brown, F.L.S., were elected Fellows. 
The Council’s recommendation that, during nine months of , 
the year, the evening of the third Tuesday of each month 
N 


178 


should be set apart for informal meetings of members, was 
adopted. 

It was resolved that the Council be requested to present 
Mr. Walter Rutt, C.E., with a life membership, in recognition 
of his services as Hon. Sec. during five years. 

A discussion on Dr. Davies Thomas’ paper upon “ Hydatids” 
then followed. 


Orprnary Meeting, Fesruary 6, 1883. 


C. Topp, Esq., C.M.G., in the chair. 

Batitor.—Prof. H. Lamb, Thomas Parker, C.E., and John 
Haslam, C.E., were elected Fellows. 

Exuisits.—The Rev. W. R. Fletcher, M.A., exhibited some 
iron concretions found by him amongst the Bald Hills, 8.A. 
Prof. Tate, F.G.S., exhibited specimens of three species of S. A. 
Coleopters destructive to vegetation. 


The following letter by Mr. Samuel Dixon was read : — 


In view of the discussion taking place on Hydatids, I wish to mention 
some facts which I have observed. 

Some years ago, before fencing in runs had begun and all sheep were 
shepherded, it was no uncommon thing for as much as 2 per cent. of the 
hoggetts, or year-old sheep, to die from “‘ crankiness” or ‘“‘ tumsick.” 

The symptoms were dulness, ceasing to feed, or to follow the flock, and 
then sudden paroxysms of turning rapidly round and round, until the un- 
fortunate fell, or else, after standing motionless for a long time, a sudden 
rush straight ahead, as if blind, would by followed by another fall, and in 
time the poor brute would become too emaciated to feed, and die, unless 
killed by dogs, of pure starvation. 

On dissecting the head, a cyst would be found occupying almost the whule 
of the right or left lobe of the brain, and on the opposite side to that to 
which the sheep turned, or in other cases where the sheep would stand 
stock still, nearly the whole of the cerebellum would be replaced by a cyst. 

After the sheep reached two years, fewer died, and old sheep were 
almost free from it. 

Now-a-days a “‘cranky” sheep is seldom to be seen anywhere, and the 
reason is not far too seek. At the time [ speak of it was customary to have 
two shepherds and a hutkeeper at each hut, and as each man had his dogs, 
it was not uncommon to see a dozen at one hut—(this was before the Dog 
Act). The shepherds, especially the laziest ones, were accustomed to keep 
the flocks round about the huts, especially in the evening after watering, 
when sheep eat the greediest, and I have no doubt this partially accounts 
for the heavy losses amongst young sheep. The old sheep being more 
cautious, the stink from grass soiled by dogs would prevent them eating it. 

Is it not most important to discover what length of exposure to solar heat 
will destrov the hydatid germ, seeing that our water supply in Adelaide is 
derived from a catchment area covered with villages and farmhouses, and ~ 
in the Northern Areas the household supply of water is frequently from 
dams filled from the hardened surface immediately surrounding farm- 
houses where dogs have fouled the surface ? 

I have never heard of these cysts being found in cattle. 


179 


DISCUSSION. 


Dr. Wuuirrett thought from the description of symptoms 
given by Mr. Dixon that the disease was not caused by hydatids 
but by a species of Caenurus in its larval condition, and this did 
not affect man. 

Dr. GARDNER was also of opinion that the disease in the 
sheep was caused by Cenurus cerebralis. As this parasite was 
derived as well from the ova of a tape-worm of a dog (Zenia 
cenurus) the fact of the disease being less prevalent when the 
sheep were paddocked than when they were shepherded, was as 
easily explainable as though the Tenia had been Tenia echino- 
coccus. Furthermore, the brain was a rare locality for the 
“hydatid,” but a favourite one for the Canurus. 

Prof. Tare suggested that if hydatids were existent in the 
brain of a sheep the symptoms would be similar. 

Mr. Drxon said that the cysts observed by him agreed with 
the descriptions given by medical authorities. 


Orpinary Mererina, Marcu 6, 1883. 


C. Topp, C.M.G., &c., President, in the chair. 

Battor.—C. Bowyer-Smythe, H. Gill, Rev. W. Howchin, and 
H. Y. L. Browne were elected Fellows. 

Exutspits.—Professor Tate, F.G.8., &¢., exhibited a dead 
specimen of the mollusc (dArgonauta tuberculosa), popularly 
known as the “paper-nautilus,’ forwarded by Mrs. Richards 
from Flinders Island. Also the tuber of Wicrostemma tuberosum 
sent by Inspector Foelsche, Corresponding Member, from Pal- 
merston. Also a new species of Composite, Hpaltes Tatez. 

Dr. Davies THomas read some further observations on 
hydatids. 

‘Prof. Tare read a “Record of new plants and of new 
Localities for Rare Plants,” by himself. 

Mr. J. G. O. Tepper, F.L.S., sent some ‘ Botanical Notes.”’ 

Mr. D. B. Apamson read a paper upon some experiments 
made by him upon Carre’s di-electric induction machine, and 
performed some experiments. 

Cuartes Topp, C.M.G., &c., announced that he had 
been yery successful in taking observations of the transit of 
Venus, when at Wentworth. 

Prof. Tarr, F.G.S., &¢., mentioned that the rules of the 
Society did not provide for the loan of books out of the 
library, and on behalf of the Council requested permission to 
make by-laws for regulating such loans. This was granted. 

Prof. Tate, F.G.S., &¢., &e., read some ‘‘ Notes upon Geo- 


180 


psittacus occidentalis,” sent by Mr. F. W. Andrews. He supple- 
mented the same with some bibliographical notes, and Dr. 
Stirling exhibited a stuffed specimen. 

A list of Alge collected at Hallett’s Cove, St. Vincent 
Gulf, by Mr. J. G. O. Tepper, F.L.S., Corresponding Member, 
and identified by Prof. J. Argadh, was laid on the table. 

C. Topp, C.M.G., drew attention to the fact that the differ- 
ence of longitude between Singapore, Banjoewangie, Adelaide 
and Melbourne had been satisfactorily determined. 


Orpinary Mererine, Apri 3, 1883. 


C. Topp, C.M.G. (President), in the chair. 

Baxttot.—F. 8. C. Driffield, Herbert Hughes, jun., and John 
Henry Mohan were elected Fellows. 

Exuteits.—Prof. Tarr, F.G.S., &e., showed some cakes of 
mud upon which the wings of termites had become impressed 
very perfectly, showing the nervules distinctly. He suggested 
that in undisturbed localities these impressions might be 
covered with another thin layer of mud, and in course of time 
the impressions would become fossilised. | 

The PrestpeNnt submitted a code of rules for regulating the 
loan of books from the library. to the Fellows and Members of 
the Society, and requested confirmation of the same by the 
Fellows present. This was done, and it was decided to put the 
rules into practice, subject to the decision of the annual 
meeting. 

The PresrpenT announced that His Excellency the Governor 
had accepted the office of Vice-Patron of the Society. 

The PrestpENT said it was a pleasant circumstance that 
Lieut. Darwin, son of the late Charles Darwin, the great 
naturalist, had been deputed by the Royal Society im London 
to come to the Colonies and take observations of the transit of 
Venus, in which, however, through the state of the weather, he 
had not been very successful. Lieut. Darwin was also engaged, 
in conjunction with himself, in determining the longitudes. 

Prof. Tarr, F.G.S., &e., read a “ Diagnosis of a New Species 
of Composite,” by Baron von Mueller, and named by the 
latter Achnophora Tater. 

Prof. Tarr, F.G.S., also read a paper on the “ Proteacezx of 
the Australian Alps,’ by James Stirling, F.L.S., of Omeo, 
Victoria. 

H. Wurrrett, M.D., read a description of a “ Dissection of 
a Compound Ascidian.”’ 


181 


Orpinary Meretine, May 1, 1883. 


H. Warrrett, M.D., Vice-President, in the chair. 

Batitor.—James Stirling, F.L.S., was elected a Correspond- 
ing Member, and J. Nicholls and A. K. Varley were elected 
Fellows. 

Exutpits.—W. Haacke, M.D., exhibited 22 embryos of the 
common ground shark (Mustelus anarcticus), including nine 
females and 22 males; also specimens of Meduse, belonging to 
the new order Psendorhizide, lately founded by D. v. Lenden- 
feldt, these he thought to belong to anew genus. Also specimens 
of Orustacee were shown, taken from sacs in the skin of the 
Monocanthus or Leather-jacket. Also four embryos of a Skate. 
Also several specimens of Cryptodromia littoralis or sponge-back 
crabs. Dr. Haacke mentioned that in dredging he had taken a 
great number of these, some of which had simple and com- 
pound ascidians fixed upon their backs. Prof. Tate, F.G.S., 
exhibited a weevil belonging to the genus Psalidura, giving the 
idea of an entomological marsupial. 

Dr. Haacke read a paper consisting of ‘‘ Observations made 
onafemale Trachydosaurus rugosus, and her young,” by Miss 
Tomsett, contributed by Mr. Govett, of Port Adelaide 
Museum. Dr. Haacke exhibited living specimens of the same 
species and preserved specimens of 7. rugosus and T. asper, to- 
gether with some dissections of the same. 

Prof. Tart, F.G.S., &c., read a description of a new species 
and genus of Verbenacee (Tatea subacaulis) from Arnheim’s 
Land, diagnosed by Baron v. Mueller. He also directed atten- 
tion to a work upon which the latter was engaged, viz., “A 
Systematic Census of Australian Plants.” He also read “Ad- 
ditions to the Flora of Australia,” mentioning that since 
Bentham’s ‘“ Flora Australiensis’” was published, upwards of 
800 new plants had been described. He next read a “ Diagno- 
sis of three new Species of Squilla.”’ 

Dr. Haacke described his new apparatus for preserving 
natural history specimens in spirits. 

J.G O. Tepper, F.L.S., sent ‘“‘ Botanical Notes,’ which were 
read by Prof. Tate. 

T. Meyrick, B.A., forwarded someremarks on the descriptions 
of supposed new Lepidoptera, as published in this Society’s 
Transactions, which were read by Prof. Tate. In this paper 
the author deprecates the practice of describing insects at hap- 
hazard as presumably new, and says that ‘‘no naturalist is en- 
titled to describe a species as new until he has carefully 
examined for himself the description of allied species by other 
authors, and satisfied himself that his species is, so far as he 
can judge, truly undescribed ; and until, moreover, he has pro- 


182 


perly examined the generic structure and attempted to indicate 
its true position in classification.” According to the author, 
who had inspected original drawings of the species—Smerin- 
thus (?) Wayi, Tepper, vol. v., p. 29, is a known species of 
Geometrina.  Lithosia rubrata, id., p. 30, is also already des- 
cribed; itis not a true Lithosia, though belonging to the family. 
Thryphena (?) tineeformis, Tepper, id., p. 31, is the very 
well-known Mecyna polygonalis, Hb., one of the Botyde 
(Pyralidina), and is abundant throughout most of the world, 
including Europe, the whole of Australia and New Zealand. 
Moreover, he considers all the butterflies, vol. iv., pp. 25 et seq., 
already named, and has no doubt that Lycena Phebe, Murray, 
which he collected at Adelaide and Port Lincoln, is one of the 
species included. 


OrpinaRy MeEeEtine, JuNE 5, 1883. 


Cuar_eEs Topp, C.M.G., President, in the chair. 

Batitor.—W. H. Phillips and Geo. F. Giles were elected 
Fellows. 

Prof. Tarr, F.G.S., sent some “‘ Notes upon the Occurrence 
of Psalidura in South Australia; also a list of unrecorded 
plants from Eyre Peninsula, chiefly based upon a collection 
made by Mrs. A. Richards, Corresponding Member, during 
October, 1882. . 

Mr. J. G. O. Tepper sent some “Botanical Notes” and a 
reply to some remarks made by Mr. Meyrick, and read at the 
previous meeting. 

Mr. W. Routt, C.E., mentioned an exceptional rainfall which 
had recently occurred at Hamley Bridge. A tank, 26 feet 
above ground, 21 feet square, with vertical sides, between the 
afternoons of May 5 and 7 collected water to the depth of 15 
inches. The Prusrpent said the rainfall for this district was 
six inches for the month. 

Mr. J. G. O. Tepper presented some suspected fossils found 
by Mr. East, of Riverton, near Mount Lock, at an altitude of 
2,800 feet. They were discovered on the surface of the Mount 
in decomposed mica slate. 

Mr. J. Hasnam, C.E., read a paper upon “Sanitary Drainage.”’ 


Orpinary Meretine, Jury 3, 1883. 


CuarueEs Topp, C.M.G., President, in the chair. 

Batitor.—W. H. Cornish was elected a Fellow. 

Exurpits.—Mr. F. 8. Crawford showed specimens of a plant 
found by Mr. H. T. Gluyas, of Telowie, much infested 
with a species of fungus, which appeared in two distinc, 


183 


forms. In one form it produced black pustules on the stem, 
which corresponded to the character of Uromyces; and the 
other form, which attacked the leaves, appeared to be a Tricho- 
basis, or rust. Mr. J. G. O. Tepper exhibited a species of 
Gordius, or hair-worm, found near Hahndorf. 

The PrEsIpEnt stated that the Board of Governors had re- 
commended a grant of £90 16s. 

Mr. S. Powtirzer, C.E., read a paper on the “ Hydraulic 
Survey of the River Murray.”’ 


Orpinary Mretine, Aveustr 7, 1883. 


C. Topp, C.M.G., President, in the chair. 

Batitot.—E. Mitchell Smith was elected a Fellow. 

Exureits.—Prof. Tate, F.G.S., showed specimens of the 
honey-ant (Melophorus Bagoti, Lubbock), forwarded by Mr. 
May, of AliceSprings. Mr. H. Yeates exhibited a Wilmshurst’s 
duplex electrical machine made by himself. 

Prof. Tare laid on the table a description and diagnosis of a 
new genus of Composite. 

An abstract of a paper by Mr. A. K. Varley entitled, “A 
suggestion as to the origin of typhoid fever,” was read 

Prof. Tare, F.G.S, read the first part of a paper on Kangaroo 
Island. 


Orpinary Mererine, SEPTEMBER 4, 1883. 


H. T. Wuirrett, M.D., Vice-President, in the chair. 

Battor.—B. Poulton, M.B., J. W. Leary, W. E. Pickels, 
F.R.M.S., H. P. Woodward, and Thos. Evans were elected 
Fellows, and D. Burchell an Associate. 

Exurpits.—Mr. L. C. E. Gee showed a leaf, which formed 
the habitation of a spider existing in the Everard Ranges. Mr. 
W. E. Pickels, F.R.M.S., showed specimens of graphite found 
near Port Lincoln ;. also manganese-ore from the vicinity of 
Terowie. 

Mr. L. C. E. Gee was appointed to audit the accounts. 

The Vicr-Presipent read a draft of rules for the regulation 
of the proposed Natural History Section of the Royal Society 
of South Australia. Notice of motion was given that they 
would be brought forward at the next meeting for consideration 
and adoption. 

Prof. Tarz, F.G.S., sent the remainder of his paper on Kan- 
garoo Island, which was read. 

Mr. T. C. Croup, F.C.S., sent an abstract of a “‘ Catalogue of 
Minerals found in South Australia,’ which was read. 


184 


AnnvaL Meerine, Ocroper 2, 1883. 


CuarLEs Topp, C.M.G., President, in the chair. 

Messrs. J. Bruer and C. H. Harris were elected Fellows of 
the Society. 

Professor Tare gave a verbal explanation on a number of 
geological specimens sent in by Messrs. Sabine and Lattorff, 
from places on the west side of Lake Torrens, and said he 
would report on them. 

Mr. J. G. O. Tepper brought forward a list of alge from St. 
Vincent’s Gulf; also, reported that Mr. J. C. Chambers had 
collected Mimulus prostratus, R. Br., at a new locality—the 
Everard Range. 

Rules for regulation of Library were adopted. 


FIELD NATURALISTS’ SECTION. 


Professor Tate explained that a number of young men con- 
nected with certain Societies in the city had intimated a desire 
to prosecute the study of natural history under the counten- 
ance of the Royal Society, and as the Council approved of the 
idea they had drawn up the following regulations :— 

1. This Section is established to promote the practical study 
of Natural History, by affording fuller opportunities and 
facilities in meeting and working together. 

2. This Section shall consist of :—(a) members of the Society 
who shall have signed the rules of the Section, and (6) of other 
persons not being members of the Society who shall have been 
elected subscribers to the Section. 

3. The members of the Section shall elect their own Com- 
mittee of Management. 

4, Subscribing members shall pay annually 5s. in advance. 
The year to terminate on the 31st October. 

5. Subscribers to the Section shall have access to the Library 
of the Society, and shall be entitled to a copy of the “ Miscel- 
laneous Contributions to Natural History,” and the “ Annual 
Reports’”’ published by the Society for the current year. 

6. The Committee of Management shall furnish to the Hon. 
Sec. of the Royal Society an Annual Report of the proceedings 
of the Section in time for publication in the Royal Society’s 
Annual Volume. 

7. By application to the Council, grants of money may be 
made out of the general funds of the Society to the Section. 

The Presipent spoke in favour of the proposal, which was 
intended to encourage the young men—who might in the future 
become members of the Society—to take field excursions in the 
study of natural history. 

The regulations were confirmed. 


185 


Mr. W. E. Pickets suggested that in inaugurating this sec- 
tion of the Society a conversazione should be held in one of 
the rooms of the Town Hall, and that Professor Tate might 
elucidate to probable members the objects of the section. 

The matter was, after discussion, referred to the Council. 


ANNUAL REPORT. 
The Hon. Secrerary read the annual report as follows :— 


The Council has again the pleasure of giving a favourable report of the 
past year’s work, and of the general condition of the Society. The mem- 
bership of the Society has increased during the year from 123 to 149. The 
increase is almost exclusively in the class of Fellows, namely, 27, there 
being the Corresponding Member and the Associate elected in addition. 
Death has removed three Fellows, viz., William Goss, M.D., F.R.C.S. Eng., 
who was present at the first meeting when the Society was founded, and was 
the last but one representative; and George Hamilton and R. G. Thomas, who 
had been members of the Society since 1868 and 1877 respectively. The 
Natural History exhibits have been numerous and interesting. In connec- 
tion with this the Council, in carrying out a resolution passed at a general 
meeting, arranged for the holding of informal meetings on the third 
Tuesday of each month. It was hoped that this might induce the members 
to come forward with exhibits, to compare notes, or to seek for information 
on any particular matter that might interest them, which they could not so 
very well do at the more formal meeting. Up to the present time the 
attendance has been small, and has consisted of an enthusiastic few, whose 
example, it is to be hoped, may he increasingly followed as time goes on. 

The subscriptions to the Darwin Memorial Fund from the members of the 
Royal Society amounted to £21 9s. The expenses for advertising, postages, 
bank-draft, &c., &c., came to £3 12s., leaving a balance of £17 17s.; which 
was duly forwarded, and the receipt of which was acknowledged January 
16, 1883. 

Another new departure contemplated is the formation of a section for the 
more especial study of Natural History in the field. The Council has 
drafted suitable rules to define its connection with the parent Society, and 
hopes that these will receive confirmation at the present annual meeting. 
To make the proposed section as popularly and publicly useful as possible, 
it is intended to allow persons not wishing to become members of the Royal 
Society to join the section only, and by a moderate subscription obtain 
certain collateral advantages. Arrangements have also been made for 
giving greater facilities for borrowing books from the library of the Society. 
For this purpose the Council has drawn up a set of rules to regulate the 
removal and return of books. These have been adopted at a general 
meeting, and now await the confirmation of this annual meeting. Among 
the additions presented to the library during the past year are some valuable 
illustrated works, such as the records of the ‘‘ Norwegian North Atlantic 
Expedition,” the ‘Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Geology, 
Harvard.” 


Mr. Cuapere, B.A., B.Sc., moved the adoption of the report, 
and suggested that the Darwin Fund and the list of papers 
read during the year should be added to the report. Mr. W. 
Rurr seconded, and the motion was carried. 

The balance-sheet showed that the receipts for the year, with 
balance brought forward, amounted to £416 14s. 5d., while the 


186 


expenditure had been about £150, leaving a deposit balance of 
£200 and a credit balance of £75 13s. 7d. 


ELECTION OF OFFICERS. 


The Presrpent stated that he felt compelled to refuse to 
act for another year. His official duties were so heavy that he 
felt he could not give that time to the Society’s affairs which 
was expected of its chief officer. So much depended on the 
President that no one should hold that high position unless he 
could carry out the duties to the satisfaction of himself and 
advantage of the Society. He asked them to excuse his short- 
comings. Although he had not given so much time to the 
duties of President, he had given a great deal of attention to 
the work of the Board of Governors of the Institute, which 
took up considerable time. Therefore, although he could ery 
“ peccavi” with respect to the Presidency, he did not think he 
need do so as a member of the Board. He would feel grateful 
if he was relieved. The two previous Presidents had been 
elected for two years each, but he should rather feel it a kind- 
ness if a similar honour were not paid to him. He would 
take that opportunity of explaining why he was not prepared 
with an address ; his defection was owing to the pressure of 
his official duties. He would, however, prepare a paper, and 
hoped that would be taken in place of an address. 

The election of officers resulted as follows :—President, H. 
L. Whittell, Esq., M.D.; Vice-Presidents, Professor H. Lamb 
and E. C. Stirling, Esq., M.D.; Treasurer, Mr. T. D. Smeaton ; 
Hon. Secretary, W. L. Cleland, Esq., M.B.; Council, Professor 
Tate, Messrs. C. Todd, C.M.G., W. Rutt, and D. B. Adamson. 

Professor TaTE gave notice of motion to increase the number 
of members of Council to six. 


PAPERS. 


Dr. Srrruina, in the absence of Mr. F. W. Andrews, read 
his notes on several rare birds found near the Square Water- 
hole, near Mount Compass, on the road to Mount Jagged. 

Professor Tarr gave outlines of five papers by himself and 
Baron von Mueller. 

The Hon. Srcrerary read a communication from Mr. Frazer 
S. Crawford, in which reference was made to a letter from Mr. 
Maskell, of New Zealand, who has made a special study of the 
Coccide, congratulating Mr. Crawford on having discovered 
the male of Lecanium cycadis, the common black turtle-scale of 
our orange trees. Hitherto the males obtained by Mr. Craw- 
ford have not been full-grown, and he awaits additional 
material to complete the diagnosis. 


187 


THE TREASURER IN ACCOUNT WITH THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA. 


ee ee SS SSS eee 


Dr. 

To Balance, October, 1882  .. ee ne 
Subscriptions ee ee oe wa 
Sale of Transactions é% ae he 
Government Grant .. se te Re 
Interest on Deposit Receipt a8 *, 


Be Sts 
201 10 5 
113 18 6 

519 6 

90 16 0 

410 0 


— 


£416 14 5 


By Printing Reports 


66 ce 


Deposit Receipt 


Cr. oa. dd. 

Ga es “i ee oo eo 8 

Assistant Secretary, Salary oe is Pomeroy | Lae 
Publishing Reports.. vis 2 0 

Rent to South Australian Institute * we © ne 20 0 
Binding, Donations, &c. .. Se os Ld 26 
Printing and Advertising .. +: os . 1416 6 
Postages and Sundries... ae ae a 6. 8. Ff 
Balance in Bank, less Outstanding Cheque Do Ono 
- ae ws 55 7. 200 -O* 0 

£416 14 5 


ee AE Se a SS eee 


Audited and found corret, 
LIONEL C. E. GEE, Auditor. 
1st October, 1883. 


THOMAS D. SMEATON, Treasurer. 


188 


DONATIONS TO: THE ‘LIBRAM 
For the Year 1882-3. 


I.—TRransactions, JOURNALS, AND Reports. 
Presented by the respective Societies, Editors, and Governments. 


Baltimore—American Chemical Journal. Vol. V., No. 3. 
Ballarat School of Mines—Annual Report of 1882. 
rs — Science Lectures, first series, 1882. 
Batavia—Natuarkundig Tijdschrift voor Nederlandsch-Indie, to 
vol. XLII., 1851-1882. 
Belfast Natural History and Philosophical Society—Proceed- 
ings for the Session 1881-82. | 
Berlin—Koniglich-preussiche Academie der Wissenchaften. 
Sitzungzberichte, XX XIX.-LIV., 1882, and I.-XXT., 
1883. 

Bordeaux—Société des Sciences Physiques et Naturelles. Me- 
moires, Serie 2, Tome V., 1882. 
Brussels—Musée Royal d’Histoire Natureile de Belgique. 

Bulletins, Tome I., 1882. 
Cambridge, U.S.A.—Museum of Comparative Anatomy. Annual 
Report of the Curator for 1881-82. 
Bulletin, Nos. 1-4. 
Vol. X., No. 6, Report on the results of 
the Dredging in the Caribbean Sea, 
1878-79. 
Vol. XIX., Report on the Fishes. 
——___———— Vol. XX. Report on the Ophiuroidee. 
Geissen—Bericht der Oberheissischen Gesellschaft fiir Natur- 
und-Heilkunde, No. CX X., 1882. 
Lausanne—Société Vaudoise des Sciences Naturelles. Bulletin, 
Sér. 2, Tome XVIII., No. 88, 1882. 
London—Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society. Series 
2, vol. II., parts 6 and 5; vol. III., parts 1-4, 
1882-83. 
Munich—K 6niglich-bayerische Akademie der Wissenchaften. 
Sitzungsberichte der Mathematisch-physika- 
leschen Classe, 1881, Heft IV., 1882, Hefte 1-4. 
New South Wales—Proceedings of the Linnean Society. Vol. 
VIL., part 3, 1882; vol. VIII., parts 1 
and 2, 1883. 


189 


Report of Trustees of Sydney Public 
Library for 1882. 

New Zealand—Colonial Museum and Geological Survey De- 
partment—Reports of Geological Explora- 
rations during 1881, with maps and sections. 

— Catalogues of the New Zealand Diptera, Hymen- 
optera, with description of the species by 
Prof. W. Hutton, 1882. 
—— Seventh Annual Report of the Museum and 
Laboratory, 1882. 
Norwegian—North Atlantic Expedition, 1876-78. Part VI., 
Holothuride; VII., Annelide; VIII., Mol- 
lusca; IX., Chemistry, 1882. 

—— Meteorology, Christiana, 1882. 

——— Geodatische Arbeiten. Hefte 1-3, 1882. 

— Vandstand Observationen. Heft 1 (Christiana, 


1882). 
Philadelphia—Academy of Natural Sciences’ Proceedings. 
Part I., 1883. 


South Australia—Report of the Botanic Gardens at Adelaide 
for year 1882. 

——_————— Meteorological Observations taken at the 
Adelaide Observatory during 1880-82. 

Southern Science Record.—Vol. [I., Nos. 9-12. Melbourne, 


1882. 
Tasmania—Numerons} papers laid before the Legislative 
Council. 
Victoria—Transactions and Proceedings of the Royal Society. © 
Vol. XIX. 


—-—— Victorian Year-Book for 1881-82. 

—- Fourth Annual Report in connection with Friendly 
Societies, with Statistics of Friendly Societies. 

—— Census for year 1881. 

——— Census of Ages of the People. 

——-— Census of Conjugal Condition of the People. 

—- Census of Education. 

—- Australian Statistics for 1881. Statistical Register— 
Partill., Population; Part IV., Vital Statistics ; 
Part V., Interchange ; Part VI., Law, Crime, &c.; 
Part VII., Accumulation; Part VIII , Production; 
Part IX., Religious, Moral, and Intellectual, 
1883. 

Vienna—Kaiserlich Konigliche Geologische !Reischsanstalt 
Verhandlungen, 1882, Nos. 8-11; 1883, Nos. 1-6. 

— Kaiserliche Akademie der Wissenschaften. Sitzungs- 
berichte, Mathematisch-Naturwissenschaftliche 
Classe, Band. 1882, Band. Hefte 1.,3, and 8, 1883. 


190 


Kaiserlich-Konigliche Zoologisch-botanische Gesell- 

schaft. Verhandlungen. Band XXXTTI., 1882. 
Wuzburg—Physicalisch-Medicenisch Gesellschaft. Sitzung- 
berichte, 1882. 


Il.—Booxs and PAMPHLETS. 
(Names of donors in italics). 


Bailey, F. M.—Synopsis of the Queensland Flora. Brisbane, 
1883 


—_————— A Classified Index of the Indigenous and 
Naturalised Plants of Queensland. Brisbane, 
1883. 
Lamb, Horace—On the Vibrations of a Spherical Shell. London, 
1883. 
——_—_———— The Basis of Statics. London, 1883. 
————— On the Oscillation of a Viscous Spheroid. 
London, 1883. 
—— On the Vibrations of an Elastic Sphere. Lon- 
don, 1883. | 
Mueller, Baron Sir F. von—Systematic Census of Australian 
Plants. Part I1., Vasculares. 
Melbourne, 1883. 
— The Floraof Australia. A lecture 
delivered at the School of Mines, 
Ballarat, 1882. 
Pollitzer, S—A Study about the River Murray. Adelaide, 
1883. 
Stirling, James—On the Caves perforating Marble deposits, 
Limestone Creek. Melbourne, 1883. 
Todd, Charles—Observations of the Transit of Venus, December 
8-9, 1874, at Adelaide. Reprinted from 
Memoirs Roy. Astron. Soc., vol. XLVII. 
London. 
Watts, H.—Foraminifera of Victoria. Melbourne, 1883. 
Wesslar, O. H.—F¥ree Trade and Protection. London, 1883. 


IiT.—map. 


South Australia. Map showing existing and proposed Lines of 
Telegraph, 1882. By Charles Todd, Esq., C.B., FRAN. 


191 


LIST OF FELLOWS, MEMBERS, &c., 
November 6th, 1883. 


Those marked (F) were present at the first meeting when the Society was 
founded. Those marked (L) are Life Fellows. Those marked with an 


asterisk have contributed papers. 


HONORARY FELLOWS. Bs 
Angas, Geo. French, F.L.S.,C.M.Z.S. Norland-square, London .. 1879 
Barkley, Sir Henry, K. C.M. G., K.C.B. ahs a 1857 
Ellery, R. L. J., F.B.S.  .. . Observatory, Melbourne 1876 

*Garran, A., an DD. a .. Sydney .. se 1853 

*Hull, H: M. Hobart 1855 
Jervois, H. E. Sir W. F, D.. K. C.M. G., 

C.B., &c. a New Zealand . 1878 
Little, E. ds zs a Ze . 1855 
Macleay, W., F. Te 8. Sydney .. 5. . 1878 

*Mueller, Baron Ferd. von., kK. C.M. G., 

Be xy OC, c's -- Melbourne . £879 
Russell, H. G., BA., FUR: AS. -- Observatory, Sydney < L876 
Warburton, Col. ee E., C.M.G. -- Beaumont . 1858 

*Wison, OC. A. ~. Supreme Court «> 1853 

*Woods, Rev. J. E. ed bee F.LS., F.G.S., 

&e. <- 7. pyaney ‘=. oe 1877 

CORRESPONDING MEMBERS. 

*Andrews, F. W. .. a -. Adelaide Museum .. of Sos 
Bailey, F. M., F.L.S., ae .. Goy. Botanist, Brisbane,Q. 1881 
Canham, J. <- -. Stuart’s Creek -. 1880 

*Cloud, T. Cs. C. S. sf -- Wallaroo 1881 
Chandler, rE. Sy se -- Peake 1881 

*Foelsche, Paul .. os .- Palmerston 1880 
Goldstein, Ju. *Y. - Melbourne 1880 

*Hayter, H. i, M.A;, C.M: coh F.S. S. Government Statist, Melbourne 1878 
Holtze, Maurice ae . Palmerston 1882 

*Kempe, Rev. J. .. Ae .. Finke, MacDonnell Ranges. 1880 

*Richards, Mrs. A. a .. Fowler’s Bay ae 1880 

*Scoular, Gavin .. ne .. Smithfield 1878 

*Stirling, James, F.L.8. .. -» Omeo, Victoria : 1883 

aieoper J. G. O., F.L.8.'.. .. Museum.. ae 1878 

FELLOWS. 

*Adamson, D. B. .. re .. Angas-street aaa . 1867 
Addis, W. L. of as .. Currie-street, «i379 
Angas, J. H. oe =f .. Angaston 1874 
Biggs, Col. J. H.. oe .. Edwardstown 1878 
Black, A. B. 3 ae .. Exchange, Pirie-street ae) Jee 
Bowyer- Smyth, C., CEs: .. Engineer-in-Chief’s Office .. 1883 
Brown, J. G., F.L. 's. Se .. Conservator of Forests, Adel. 1882 
Brown, L. G. 5. os .. Two Wells : wei toor 
Browne, SY. Di: oy: -. Gov. Geologist, Adelaide 1883 
Brunskill, Geo. .. a +3 'Morgan> ©. epee te: 


Burchell, F. N. 


192 


Campbell, Hon. i, L.RB.GP., Edin. 
A. 


Caterer, T. A., B. 

*Chalwin, Thos., M.R.L.V.S. 
Chapple, F., B. Ag B.Se. 
Cleland, W. Tie M. B. 

*(L)Cooke, E. ee ‘ee 
Cox, W. C. se fe 
Cornish, W.H. .. as 
Crawford, F.S. .. 3 

*Davenport,S. .. “ 
Davies, Edward .. ae 
Davis, F. W. ae ae 
Dobbie, A. W. .. ies 
Driffield, F. 8. C. aie 
Elder, Sir Thomas a 
Evans, Thomas .. As: 


Barrar, G. BH. . «s 
*Fletcher, Rev. W. BR, M. ie 

Florance, W. ce 

Foote, H. es 

Fowler, W. 

Gall, D.. 

Gardner, 'W., M. D. i 

Gee, Lionel, C. E. wie 

Giles, Geo. F. ie 

Gill, H. C. 

Grandy, EB. .. 

Gosse, Charles, M.D. 
*Goyder, Geo., jun. oe 
*Haacke, Wm., Ph.D. s% 

earris, . W.. ‘ss es 

Harris, C. H. =k a 

Harrold; A.L. .. ‘ 

Harry, Thomas .. 
*Haslam, John, C.EH. cs 

Hay, Hon. Alexander We 

Henry, Alexander, M.D. 

Hopkins, Rev. W. ‘ 

Howchin, Rev. W., F.G. S. 

Hughes, H. W. 56 
*Hullett, J. W. EO " 

Johnson, sae af 
*Joyce, J. F., 
*(r) Kay, R. 

Knevett, S. 


*Lamb, Prof. ele ,M.A. ie 


«Laughton, K. 
Leary, J. W. 
*Lloyd, J. 5S. 


MRCS. .. 


Madley, L. G., Principal of Training 


College se oe 
Magarey, A. T. .. 
*Magarey, S. J., M.B. 


Mais, H. C., C. EK. 
*Mann, Jas., L.R.C.P. et 8. 
*Mayo, George, Rakes a0 
Mayo, G. G. ws ° 


Survey Office a 2 
Adelaide’.. *y- " 
Norwood 4 
Currie-street : 
Prince Alfred College 
Parkside Asylum .. ‘ 
South Terrace 


Survey Office : re 
Surveyor- General’s Office 
Beaumont a ok 
Hutt-street y a 
Advertiser Office .. BS 
Gawler-place sin = 
Waymouth-street .. ok 
Grenfell-street .. ate 
Adelaide .. +5 ihe 
Adelaide.. ae aa 
Kent Town 3 
Outalpa .. sis ae 


Yarroo, Kulpara .. 
Tynte-street, North | Adelaide 
Adelaide . 

Survey Office oe - 


General Post Office ike 
S.A. Institute "2 Se 
Adelaide .. Be es 
Adelaide .. Se aes 


Government Offices 

Director S.A. Museum 
Register Office .. oe 
Survey Office — 
Hindley-street 


Exchange, Pirie-street ae 
Adelaide .. oe Sos 
Beaumont ae an 
Victoria-square ee 
Glenelg .. + 
Christian Colonist’ Office ab 
Booyoolie - - 
Port Augusta oi aid 
Alfred Chambers .. f 
South-terrace ke 


S.A. Institute 
Carrington-street .. 
University ot = 
Currie-street fe ce 
North-terrace 2 
Lefevre-terrace, N. ‘Adelaide 


Whitmore-square .. 

emeend s-terrace 

Adelaide. ‘ 
eee in- Chief's Office . Pe 
Adelaide. a . 
Adelaide . dig 
Engineer-i in- Chief's ’ Office “® 


1881 
1882 
1882 
1877 
1876 
1879 
1876 
1880 
1883 
1865 
1856 
1882 
1882 
1876 
1883 
1871 
1883 
1883 
1876 
1881 
1883 
1882 
1865 
1882 
1882 
1883 
1883 
1882 
1877 
1880 
1882 
1882 
1883 
1876 
1878 
1883 
1861 
1882 
1880 
1883 
1883 
1876 
1875 
1880 
1853 
1878 
1883 
1874 
1883 
1856 


1879 
1873 
1874 
1883 
1882 
1853 
1874 


*Meyrick, E., B.A. ‘ 
Middleton, W. J. C. 
Mohan, John Henry 
Molineux, A. 45 

(u) Murray, David.. 
Nesbit, E. Pariss, jun. 
Nesbitt, W. Peel, M.B., 
Nickolls, J. 
Parker, Thos., 
Phillips, W. H. 
Pickels, W. E. EF. R. M.S. 

*Pollitzer, S. ; 
Poulton, oo MB. = 
Rees, John, M.R.C.S. 
Rees, Roland, M.P. 
Rigaud, R. J. .. 
Robertson, R., F.F.P.S. 
Robin, BR. B. oe 
Rogers, Rev. N. . 
Russell, W. wa 

*Rutt, Walter, C.H. 
Salom, Hon. M... 

*Schomburgk, R., Ph.D. 

*Smeaton, Stirling, B.A. 

*Smeaton, Thos. D. 
Smith, E. Mitchell 
Smith, R. Barr .. 
Smith, William .. 
Smyth, J. Y., B.A. 
Sparks, H. Y. 

*Stirling, E.C., 
Stuckey, J. J. , MA. 


C.E. 


eo 8) oOo ge 6 "9: 8) Cee 


*Tate, Prof. R., E.G.S., E.LS., &e. 


*Telfer, W. 


*Thomas, J. Davies, M.D., F. B.C.S. 


Shaw, William .. 
*Tietkins, W. H., F.R.G.S. 1 


M.D., F.B.C.S. 


193 


*Todd, Charles, C. M.G., F.R.A.S., &e. 


Tomkinson, Samuel 

Tyas, J. Ww. e 

Umbehann, C. .. 
"Varley, A.K. .. 


*Verco, J. Cooke, M.D., F. R. C. 8. 


Vickery, G. 
Ware, W. L. 
Way, E. W., M.B., ‘M.R.C.S. 
Way, 8. J., Chief Justice oe 
White, R. A. a 
Whiting, John B. 

*Whittell, H., M.D. 

Woodward, H. O. 

Wragge, C. L., F.R.G.S. 
Wyatt, Wm., M.D. ae 
Young, Wm., M.A. ote 


Burchell, D. rr as 


ee 


Christchurch, N.Z. ste 
Kangarilla aa ra 
Kent Town a i 


North Adelaide .. 
King William-street 
North Adelaide .. 
New Zealand 

Port Adelaide : 


Adeline. 


Adelaide Hospital. . 
Hindmarsh ae 
North Adelaide . 


Register Office 3 = 
Adelaide.. ae : 
Grenfell-street fe 3 
Moonta .. 6 a 
Port Adelaide os 


Engineer-in-Chief’s Office .. 
North Adelaide .. 

Director of Botanic Gardens: 
Engineer-in-Chief’s Office .. 
Bank of South Australia .. 
Survey Department x 
Torrens Park, Mitcham .. 


Hydraulic Engineer’ s Office 
Norwood Sa - 
Glenelg .. os oe 
North Adelaide .. ae 
Adelaide .. wa 
aces of Adelaide - 
Adelaide . ea ei - 
Railway Department . 
Millswood <a . 
Adelaide .. ae 2 
Adelaide . . 
University of Adelaide = 
General Post Office ° 


Mount Gambier .. 
North Adelaide .. 


Meadows.. ai ° 
Adelaide .. ae 
Adelaide .. aie A 
North Adelaide .. 


Engineer-in-Chief’s Office . 
Destitute Board Office 
Glenelg .. 

Goy. ais Office 


; Bapacide ne : 
. Hindmarsh ais é 
ASSOCIATE. 


Surveyor General’s Office .,. 


1881 
1882 
1883 
1880 
1859 
1875 
1880 
1883 
1883 
1882 
1883 
1881 
1883 
1880 
1874 
1882 
1882 
1882 
1882 
1879 
1876 
1881 
1865 
1882 
1857 
1883 
1871 
1880 
1882 
1878 
1881 
1878 
1876 
1880 
1877 
1878 
1881 
1856 
1876 
1882 
1879 
1883 
1878 
1868 
1878 
1878 
1859 
1882 
1882 
1882 
1883 
1877 
1859 
1881 


1883 


, POOR Ne oie eal 
A ‘ f 
‘ © G8 pin ' ie} wy Sy 
’ Ae pe ip eh; 
" ’ ‘ Lees . 4 oe ana "7 
i oa te 5 ies £ J 
L * a daitndotadd SA et ty sia 
r ba | é — ~~ \F <~ 
i 2 -t ¥e at Bie ie Ky ayhtem my  ayeera he 
Lb Hats (ow btw ur ' : 
\« aay 3 Byres ee Fa “ 
- ' a ft ey Po) ne an § pu Ty tet pie. Ab iy re 
YOY id ae el my f 
GEL iow 5 ye «ye RRO AIODA criti bt ektoteel tone 
Bits a Peeste~iite it ie 4 is ia 2, y > he 
i Pave ee “1 Pe f Ry vee C 
: 4)? ae +s ee Hf ae co é, er gg OH, 4 n pt hed # 
- e hs 
an _ ro , a i itv LAO. Wr a a ae 
“WeEeB A cag t2) sy ODtARDA MnTi psu jokes 
’ i ny - v SA} rn ** ag 
7 ‘ ne "e* ae am 4 aS i 
LEE iad oe = we) Ay ae ee le ae 4 
< i a ** Ca tae 7 4.9 
| ¢ ih 4 Pans Pay « j wok] " Lua f 4” _ ae ‘ 
- « ‘ - i Pe 
: iA a ne Mata hes ne _ 
a i ae ae Au ntylie if Zz as Aa a 
tm 
eo ae | as os gore) ea ee 4 Py 
‘ . : ai 
y } . a eo se DS hf ae a. As 
ce = 7 BY Ps ie af 4i= ‘ «hag? 2A 7 oe 
7 ( ee *F o? “iat a ae oe «> 
p ' L * * bh +) me. #{ ae ss 
4 P . 
oe. = 40 i uw i pai ool ‘ a * 
e j baa! > oe 2 J Eat A ay a 
~ : | tay ‘ ‘ ) yt ¥ re * “tha a“ 
= - oa 
a bye! be waht : : ao x * a oi eis i 4 
oe rae ai . ‘ ! z bn a's ie a wate ’ 
; a ae eS yee 2 Totosia 
: , zy) t ‘ i OG bing | ae 
\ S \ ‘. Pvt ee 
7 a. , a 
: Lv: t4 Shay , H 1 ve =e 
eas) e t ae Ha ' a4 
| / as - as 
i es! ® t? es 
a 1% ue eg a = me 
i a . 4 i s* af é rh, eat 


-, VSS Siaa *- *» of a eat Ne ach Te ogee eieas af 
i aie 4 rest rr qo io e of Ks ee es as. 


x i 

_ (ies ip ah ea ba et A ws , o,0 a. i, se i 
Sek. As phere 20?) ee BD TOTID AY. Vis ied gO), ee af 
ms te a rs. eee RV: © fs ua ae i ok 
ERO. mn, SRiuidtok Wp vileraviad. << Me ae oh aa he i 


, 


eae hie 2 SRO tea Ta eGaeh "ae eye ae 

: SEGGb:: 5, Bc. Toblingnd Byole « re 
tr oe > ah ab lcigh&: MetOM! kee teats Be Hy 

iy nas 5 ee iT ' oye ve ~es Pt ae oe ‘ a); 
AEN he vi ee 5p Spreads, 1 On 

Pd Soe yt ove SUUWbIL. Hokus. ol SLA Re we 

"AWGRE bi Bits ohinigbd aig Ba Ws ea ' 

; i Aest tin mihO A Tarty.) tf Wier yas of re an 8 ie ’ 


_ <2%. [ oa fat pont) bigdatg fi ifosils Ui ns trad © 
8 iad os o ~ ae ee) carte ¥ Cid al 
¥ pisos ahi IND iti glia Tey! ae 


‘ 
iy ‘ ee SS its 
7 XR - hae aa oe” ' *% ile “ . titel \ a 
7" “yebe. 7 we oo hihi: “Sy eae ay a aff. My 
os! : bs sas “7 
pers By Anes fi Bt a UTS (ail a a a 
; a —"* , Custtivet® AY y 


eee aj i PEO IPN 


apa hin Morons recoveud te ee ae 
aan thee yar ‘wae 


§ “ 
* . 
. i Ye <5 
6 eae ogee 
’ . i 4 . a i es be 
Fa) y ho fore 
; ee ir 1B oa ne 


. “ , 
° ' 
Pe 
* 
* 
.. 
i] 
j 
i 
, 
‘ 
- 
. 
é 
‘ 
’ 
j 
Ld . 
. 
. 
’ 
‘ F 
4 
‘ 
‘ 
& S 
‘ 
‘ 
‘ 
: 
¥ - 
, ‘ 
’ 
. 
‘ 
. 
é 
. i 
F ‘ 
ra 
; 
é 
< . 
: 
L: 
¢ 
= 
i 
' . 
? ‘ 
- 
. 
e . 
‘ 
*. . 
' 
4 ; 
’ 
9 : ° 
. 
, ad ie 
noe q “ 
| ‘ f < 
f ‘ sie i 
ri AN DOP oN 
AD ‘ Pa NE 


ys 
\ iy ors 


- _- ; : \ iS oa i" A 4 wal 
ee Ts re as’ WPT eee Yale ane . eet 


al 


| 


Komrmone del. 


eee 


Say 
R 

SSN 
SSS: 


GQ 
W4t 
Me, 


V4; wees 
UCC ty | 
kia 


Z Par 
> 
ag 


A 
4 
5 


nN. ¢ N, A S - 
» 
’ a 7 
“4 u oe ‘ 
‘ 
= 
S 
’ - ” 4 P, 
role 
Pe oe ; 
’ 2 
. 
° / ‘ ' 
’ 2 = 
. ‘ 
> 
= ~ - 
va > i . 
en oy we - 
° ~~ I Me - ‘ 
= _ >, * - oe 27 
9 4 Pe : 
on = — ay e 
“ Ck 7 
a ol 3 ae! ee 
ei , a 
@ v re ~ 
mah ct = ” * - : 
Lan - e - ° 
\ 
me > 
= ’ 
- - V 
“ da 
' . : 
¢ >» ba P . 
. eae > 
ro Pa . 
oo 7 " . 
» = . 
Pe Js | 
rs a 
" ; s 
oh : ; 
; ‘ 
i 
a 4 . 
7] 
“ ‘ 
Te : . 
. nn . 
» : . 
& - 


Hpi 
Leo phy) ib 
y A 


TRREEN 


I 


hanna 


amino da. ad. 


PLAN OF 


KANGAROO ISLAND 


COUNTY CARNARVON. 


xB PEAWN Ba ae 

y ae jo° gsi 
fan, : ae 
cA ym PENNESHAW 
Ms C Torrans . Feat: 


C. Borda <a 


Eh 


ee 
‘ 
iene 
tPe0 o¥ ore 
\ 
ate 
4 g 


& 


e 
sg Fi 
& 


West Bay /- - 
. <i ‘a 


CBedouh. 


ee 


QCASUARINA it % OUIN ROCK 


os PELORUS IF 


Scale. 


MILES. 


val qin, 
Http 
> y 
- * ¥ 


; Giessen Feuerarsscaces-- — 
72 SG 
Peg /SD3 


"TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS 


AND 


] REPORT 


OF THE 


ROYAL SOCIETY of SOUTH AUSTRALIA. 


TES Eat ot ere EE 


BORSSMEDUCHSOURORPSPOED 


Se 
4 


Gy ES GP OM Be NOR eT Mee 
(FOR 1880-81.) 


| Pees Moby AN PALIN ¥y Goo 2 


| ~~ 2 aS ORS BE Poss ~_—~ 


Adclaiwe : 
G. ROBERTSON, 103, KING WILLIAM STREET. 


Parcels for transmission to the Royal Society of South 
Australia, from Europe and America, should be addressed 
‘per Mr. W.C. Rigby, care Messrs. Thos. Meadows & Co., 

35, Milk Street, Cheapside, London.”’ 


Scadibiarsduialndiusiignstase : 


> Bune, ese 


--seneunaucananE SUREUTIGELIUEEES i aa 


iy ‘w See ae 


ihe See LO 
Praavsicnion ‘AND. PROCEEDINGS 3 | 
REP @-R-T 
ROYAL SOCIETY of SOUTH AUSTRALIA 


BY gk SO tore Pe yes 
(FOR. 1881-82.) 


ISSUED DECEMBER, 1882. 


“Adelaide: 


G. ROBERTSON, 103, KING WILLIAM STREET. 


1882. 


a Be te 
2 
os { 
1 
NA = 
on 
{: 
; 
‘ 
a 


Y Gxpirs i Ree een 7 = we 
/ 


Broly. ia ee ) 


ie 


REPORT 
| ROYAL SOCIETY of SOUTH AUSTRALIA. 


= S2 oe ae AES ae 
(FOR 1882-83.) 


MONI 
Adelaide : 


G. ROBERTSON, 103, KING WILLIAM STREET. 


| 
| 
ISSUED. DECEMBER, 1883. 
| 
| 
| 
| 1883. 


6: 


Parcels for transmission to the Royal Society of South Aus- 
|| tralia, from Europe and America, should be addressed 
“per W.C. Rigby, care Messrs. Thos. Meadows and 
ned Co., 35, Milk Street, Cheapside, London.” | 


——. fe 


Webb, Vardon, & Pritchard, Printers, Gresham-street, Adelaide. 


aay a 


aims lente acne git en 
wi 


: ont ; 
at OM Ta 


~—INEONO